TS428 1 EN Col20 PP CONSULTANT

S4280
SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for

Production Engineering and
Operations
.
.
PARTICIPANT HANDBOOK
INSTRUCTOR-LED TRAINING
.
Course Version: 17
Course Duration: 5 Day(s)
Material Number: 50157433
SAP Copyrights, Trademarks and
Disclaimers
© 2021 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the
express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company.
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in Germany and other
countries. Please see http://global12.sap.com/corporate-en/legal/copyright/index.epx for additional
trademark information and notices.
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software
components of other software vendors.
National product specifications may vary.
These materials may have been machine translated and may contain grammatical errors or
inaccuracies.
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only,
without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP SE or its affiliated companies shall not be liable
for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate
company products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements
accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty.
In particular, SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business
outlined in this document or any related presentation, or to develop or release any functionality
mentioned therein. This document, or any related presentation, and SAP SE’s or its affiliated companies’
strategy and possible future developments, products, and/or platform directions and functionality are
all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time for any
reason without notice. The information in this document is not a commitment, promise, or legal
obligation to deliver any material, code, or functionality. All forward-looking statements are subject to
various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations.
Readers are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements, which speak
only as of their dates, and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions.
© Copyright. All rights reserved. iii

Typographic Conventions
American English is the standard used in this handbook.

The following typographic conventions are also used.
This information is displayed in the instructor’s presentation
Demonstration
Procedure
Warning or Caution
Hint
Related or Additional Information
Facilitated Discussion
User interface control Example text
Window title Example text
iv © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Contents
xi Course Overview
1 Unit 1: Production Engineering and Operations Infrastructure
3 Lesson: Explaining Key Features and Benefits of SAP S/4HANA

Manufacturing for Production Engineering and Operations (PEO)
11 Lesson: Assigning Roles and Working with SAP S/4HANA PEO Apps
on SAP Fiori Launchpad
19 Exercise 1: Create a Group of SAP S/4HANA PEO Apps on the
SAP Fiori Launchpad
23 Lesson: Setting Up Manufacturing Users for SAP S/4HANA PEO
25 Exercise 2: Create a Manufacturing User and Assign it to a
Default Work Center and Plant
31 Unit 2: Production Engineering
32 Lesson: Handing Over the Engineering Snapshot from PLM to

Production Engineering
35 Exercise 3: Monitor Engineering Snapshots
39 Lesson: Preparing MBOM Creation (Based on Snapshot)
55 Exercise 4: Prepare MBOM Creation (Based on Snapshots)
59 Lesson: Creating MBOMs based on EBOM using Visual Enterprise
Manufacturing Planner (VEMP)
63 Exercise 5: Create MBOMs with the Visual Enterprise
Manufacturing Planner
71 Unit 3: Setup of Shop Floor Routing
72 Lesson: Creating a Simple Shop Floor Routing and Assigning it a

Manufacturing BOM
81 Exercise 6: Create a Simple Shop Floor Routing and Assign it a
Manufacturing MBOM
88 Lesson: Assigning Components, PRTs, and Documents to Operation
Activities
95 Exercise 7: Assign Components, PRTs, and Documents to
Operation Activities
99 Lesson: Defining Simple Work Instructions for Operation Activities
103 Exercise 8: Define Simple Work Instructions for Operation
Activities
107 Lesson: Releasing Shop Floor Routing and Creating a Production
Version
109 Exercise 9: Release Shop Floor Routing and Create a Production
Version
© Copyright. All rights reserved. v

115 Unit 4: The Basic Production Process
117 Lesson: Releasing and Managing Shop Floor Orders in SAP S/

4HANA PEO
125 Exercise 10: Release and Manage Shop Floor Orders in SAP S/
4HANA PEO
129 Lesson: Executing Serialized Production Process and Monitoring
Production Results
147 Exercise 11: Execute Serialized Production Process and Monitor
Production Results
155 Lesson: Disassembling Components in Various Scenarios
169 Exercise 12: Disassemble Components Triggered by
Engineering Change
176 Lesson: Recording Defects
189 Exercise 13: Record a Defect for Serialized Material and View
Defect Information in Monitoring Apps
195 Lesson: Executing Non-Serialized Production Process and
Monitoring Production Results
201 Exercise 14: Execute Non-Serialized Production Process and
Monitor Production Results
215 Unit 5: Unitized Products and the Complex Assembly/Installation

Process
217 Lesson: Understanding the Complex Assembly Process

225 Lesson: Understanding the Concept of Parameter Effectivity
235 Lesson: Preparing MBOM Creation for a Unitized Product
237 Exercise 15: Prepare MBOM Creation for a Unitized Product for
Shared Teams
241 Lesson: Handing Over EBOM to MBOM, Creating Related Planning
Scopes, Creating Installation Kits, and Maintaining Parameter
Effectivity
243 Exercise 16: Hand Over EBOM to MBOM, Create Related
Planning Scopes, Create Installation Kits, and Maintain
Parameter Effectivity
253 Unit 6: Advanced Shop Floor Routing Part I: Setup and Start Workflow
254 Lesson: Defining Teams and Responsibilities

257 Exercise 17: Create a New Team and Assign Team Members
with Functions
261 Lesson: Creating a Workflow for the Shop Floor Routing
265 Exercise 18: Create and Start a Workflow for the Shop Floor
Routing
vi © Copyright. All rights reserved.

273 Unit 7: Advanced Shop Floor Routing Part II: Effectivity, Components,
Inspection Characteristics, Work Instructions
274 Lesson: Creating a New Shop Floor Routing with Effectivity and
Assigning Components
287 Exercise 19: Create a New Shop Floor Routing with Effectivity
and Assign Components
295 Lesson: Creating Tabular Inspection Characteristics
297 Exercise 20: Create Inspection Characteristics
303 Lesson: Managing Standard Texts
307 Exercise 21: Create Standard Texts
311 Lesson: Creating Interactive Work Instructions for Operation
Activities
313 Exercise 22: Create Interactive Work Instructions for Operation
Activities
319 Unit 8: Advanced Shop Floor Routing Part III: Qualifications and Buyoff
320 Lesson: Creating Qualifications and Assigning Qualifications to

Objects in SAP S/4HANA PEO
325 Exercise 23: Create Qualifications and Assign Qualifications to
Objects in SAP S/4HANA PEO
329 Lesson: Setting Up Buyoff Cycle Templates
331 Exercise 24: Set Up Buyoff Cycle Templates
335 Lesson: Assigning Qualifications and Buyoffs to Operation Activities
337 Exercise 25: Assign Qualifications and Buyoffs to Operation
Activities
343 Unit 9: Advanced Shop Floor Routing Part IV: Tool Tracking
344 Lesson: Defining Trackable Tools and Assigning them to Shop Floor
Routings
349 Exercise 26: Assign a Trackable Tool to an Operation Activity
and Add to Work Instruction
355 Lesson: Releasing the Shop Floor Routing, Creating a Production
Version, and Approving Workflow Review Steps
357 Exercise 27: Release the Shop Floor Routing, Create a
Production Version, and Approve Workflow Review Steps
362 Lesson: Completing a Change Record
363 Exercise 28: Complete a Change Record
369 Unit 10: Advanced Production Process
370 Lesson: Claiming and Registering Tools During Production

Execution
375 Exercise 29: Claim and Register Tools During Production
Execution
© Copyright. All rights reserved. vii

383 Unit 11: Setup of a Project System for Unitized Products
385 Lesson: Creating a Project for a Complex Product Using the Manage
Major Assembly Projects App
391 Exercise 30: Create a New Project Using the Manage Major
Assembly Projects App
397 Lesson: Assigning Reference Points to the Major Assembly BOM
Items (Installation Kits)
401 Exercise 31: Assign Reference Points to the Major Assembly
404 Lesson: Exploding the BOM for a Major Assembly
407 Exercise 32: Run the BOM-PS Interface to Explode the BOM
411 Lesson: Performing MRP to Create Demand and Planned Orders
415 Exercise 33: Perform MRP to Create Demand and Planned
Orders
418 Lesson: Converting Planned Orders to Production Orders
421 Exercise 34: Convert Planned Orders to Production Orders
425 Lesson: Checking Major Assembly Projects
429 Unit 12: Management of Engineering Change During the Production

Process
430 Lesson: Creating and Releasing a New EBOM Version

431 Exercise 35: Create a New EBOM Version and Release it in the
Maintain Bill of Material App
435 Lesson: Managing Unassigned Modified EBOM Versions
437 Exercise 36: Reuse an Existing Planning Scope and Create a
New Change Record with New Versions for EBOM and MBOM
441 Lesson: Performing Change Impact Analysis
445 Exercise 37: Analyze the Change Impact of an Engineering
Change
448 Lesson: Implementing Engineering Changes and Performing
Execution
453 Exercise 38: Implement Engineering Changes, Execute the
Updated Production Order, and View the As-Built Record for the
Production Order
467 Unit 13: Variant Configuration
468 Lesson: Setting Up Business Process for Variant Configuration

481 Exercise 39: Change and Release Shop Floor Routing
486 Lesson: The Make to Order Process for Configurable Materials
495 Exercise 40: Create Sales Order and Run MRP
499 Exercise 41: Convert a Planned Order to a Production Order and
Release It
viii © Copyright. All rights reserved.

505 Unit 14: Product Manufacturing Information (PMI)
506 Lesson: Creating and Consuming 3D Views in Work Instructions

511 Exercise 42: Create 3D Views and Insert them in a Work
Instruction
515 Lesson: Creating Routing Objects with PMI
519 Exercise 43: Assign a Dimension PMI to an Inspection
Characteristic
523 Exercise 44: Assign a PMI to Equipment
527 Exercise 45: Display 3D Work Instruction in the Perform Work
App
531 Lesson: Tracking and Managing Changes to PMI and Related
Routing Objects
535 Exercise 46: Create a New Version of Routing with Changed PMI
Data
539 Exercise 47: Execute Production Order with Reference to PMI
545 Unit 15: Planning and Execution BOMs and Routings
546 Lesson: Creating Master Data for MRP Planning

549 Exercise 48: Create Planning BOM with Phantom Assembly
555 Exercise 49: Run MRP and Validate Procurement Elements
560 Lesson: Creating Shop Floor Master Data for Execution
563 Exercise 50: Create Execution BOM and Routing
569 Unit 16: Management of Action Settings
570 Lesson: Defining Status and Action Schemas

573 Exercise 51: Define Status and Action Schemas
577 Lesson: Defining Reason Codes and Reason Code Groups
583 Exercise 52: Create a Reason Code, Create a Reason Code
Group, and Assign the Reason Code to the Group
587 Lesson: Setting Up Action Properties
591 Lesson: Configuring Action Type Handlers
© Copyright. All rights reserved. ix

x © Copyright. All rights reserved.
Course Overview
TARGET AUDIENCE
This course is intended for the following audiences:
● Project Manager
● Application Consultant
● Super / Key / Power User
● Industry Specialist
© Copyright. All rights reserved. xi

xii © Copyright. All rights reserved.
UNIT 1 Production Engineering and
Operations Infrastructure
Lesson 1
Explaining Key Features and Benefits of SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for Production Engineering 3
and Operations (PEO)
Lesson 2
Assigning Roles and Working with SAP S/4HANA PEO Apps on SAP Fiori Launchpad 11
Exercise 1: Create a Group of SAP S/4HANA PEO Apps on the SAP Fiori Launchpad 19
Lesson 3
Setting Up Manufacturing Users for SAP S/4HANA PEO 23
Exercise 2: Create a Manufacturing User and Assign it to a Default Work Center and 25
Plant
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Understand the key features and benefits of SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for production
engineering and operations (PEO)
● Enable the production engineering and operations function modules in SAP S/4HANA
● Explain which business roles are required for which SAP S/4HANA PEO apps
● Understand the grouping of SAP S/4HANA PEO apps on the SAP Fiori launchpad
● Manage SAP Fiori launchpad settings and create your own group with applications
● Explain the purpose of using manufacturing users in SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for
production engineering and operations
● Create a manufacturing user and assign it to a default work center and plant
© Copyright. All rights reserved. 1

Unit 1: Production Engineering and Operations Infrastructure
2 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 1
Lesson 1
Explaining Key Features and Benefits of SAP
S/4HANA Manufacturing for Production
Engineering and Operations (PEO)
LESSON OVERVIEW
This lesson provides a general overview of SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for Production
Engineering and Operations (PEO) product features and functions. It explains the purpose of
using SAP S/4HANA PEO product and how PEO can support manufacturing users during
engineering, planning, and execution of their production activities. In this, you also learn how
to enable Production Engineering and Operations (PEO) function modules in SAP S/4HANA
products.
Business Example
John is a consultant with the low-volume A&D Company focusing on the final assembly of
complex products. The Company is looking into the possibility of implementing SAP S/
4HANA PEO product in one of its production facilities. John is tasked with explaining the
benefits and value that the Company gains when using PEO applications, describing
engineering, and execution capabilities the SAP S/4HANA PEO product has, as well as
activating SAP S/4HANA PEO function modules in a given plant.
Note:
Due to data dependencies between the exercises, please start with the first
exercise in unit 1 and complete the exercises in the order that they appear in the
course.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for Production Engineering and Operations (PEO)

Overview
SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for production engineering and operations (PEO) is a
separately priced SAP S/4HANA product extension expanding SAP S/4HANA Enterprise
Management core manufacturing capabilities. The solution provides enhanced visualization
supporting engineering to manufacturing bill of material (BOM) collaboration and newly-
developed and enriched production process planning and manufacturing change
management feature sets. It also offers execution capabilities that are tailored for high
complex, low volume, manual processing.

SAP S/4HANA Benefits

With SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for production engineering and operations (PEO), you will
experience the following advantages:
Enhanced Visualization
SAP S/4HANA PEO utilizes SAP Visual Enterprise (VE) software as well as graphical SAP
Fiori capabilities to provide 3D visualization and live simulations that simplify engineering
and execution activities, such as EBOM to MBOM handover, analyzing the impact of a
change by seeing what orders, routings, and MBOMs are affected in a graphical way. This
leads to faster and more accurate decisions impacting manufacturing. Production
operators benefit from 3D visualization in their PEO production dashboards that allow
interaction with 3D models to highlight required components and track the progress of
assembly activities cross operations.
In-built integration with SAP S/4HANA Core
SAP S/4HANA PEO users can easily connect their process with core SAP S/4HANA
capabilities like QM, PS, PM, MRP, Inventory Management, and so on. This helps to
synchronize data across various processes like product engineering, manufacturing
engineering, production planning and execution, as well as ensure quality compliance and
on-time delivery of a product.
Seamless Incorporation of Engineering Changes into Running Production Process
SAP S/4HANA PEO ensures that the latest design change is received, analyzed and
incorporated throughout production with limited disturbances and via clear,
comprehensive work instructions and notifications to production operators.
Fully Integrated End-to-End Process
Extended SAP S/4HANA capabilities to manage and interact with production orders and
operation activities at the shop floor, where a full featured MES is not required.
Seamlessly collaborate with production order management system, work queue
management, shop floor execution, and genealogy in an integrated SAP S/4HANA
environment.
Simplified User Experience
SAP S/4HANA PEO follows the main principles of SAP Fiori to create a coherent and
enjoyable user experience, even when executing complex business scenarios. SAP Fiori is
role-based to provide the right information at the right time to the right people; adaptive
to enable you to work how and where you want, regardless of the device you use; simple
to help you personalize the experience and focus only on your relevant tasks and
activities.
Scalability
Provides an ability to smoothly scale production to meet demand.
Transparency
Provides increased visibility for product genealogy and traceability.
SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for Production Engineering and Operations (PEO)

Key Features
SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for production engineering and operations (PEO) consists of
features and functions that span across two main areas – Production Engineering and
Production Operations.

Lesson: Explaining Key Features and Benefits of SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for Production Engineering and Operations
(PEO)
Figure 1: SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for PEO Main Areas
Animation: SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for PEO Main Areas

For more information on SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for PEO Main Areas,
please view the animation in the lesson Explaining Key Features and Benefits of
SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for Production Engineering and Operations (PEO),
in your online course.
Production Engineering bridges the gap between product engineering and production
operations by converting the product design into production process design that is the basis
for production order management and shop floor execution.
Production Operations is about initiating, preparing, executing, controlling, and documenting
the actual end-to-end production process. Complex assembly execution is primarily designed
for complex, low volume production processes with high change frequency and focus on
manual work, typical for complex assembly and engineer-to-order businesses.
Table 1: SAP S/4HANA PEO Features

SAP S/4HANA PEO Feature Description
Version-managed Bill of Materials (BOMs) Every BOM version has its own release sta-
tus. A released BOM version is a consistent
model of a product's components that can be
used in production execution and that cannot
be changed. If you want to change the BOM,
you can create a new BOM version. You can
make changes to a new BOM version until it
is released. However, it cannot be used in
production execution while still in the status
in process. This guarantees consistent BOMs
in production execution.

Version-managed shop floor routings Every routing version has its own release sta-
tus. A released routing version is a consistent
model of a product's operations and activi-
ties. Released routing versions can be used in
production execution and cannot be
changed. You must create a new routing ver-
sion if you want to make changes. You can
make changes to a new routing version until
it is released. However, it cannot be used in
production execution while still in the status
in process. This guarantees consistent rout-
ings in production execution.
Version-managed shop floor routings with Every routing operation can have one or mul-
more level of detail tiple operation activities. Operation activities
enable you to define detailed work instruc-
tions for production operators without mak-
ing scheduling and costing on operation level
more complicated. You can also assign com-
ponents, inspection characteristics, PRTs,
documents, inspection characteristics, quali-
fications, and buyoffs to operation activities.
EBOM to MBOM Conversion A predefined process supports production

engineers to convert engineering BOMs cre-
ated by product engineers into manufactur-
ing BOMs that are suitable for production ex-
ecution. The process tracks which manufac-
turing BOM item relates to which engineering
BOM item and which manufacturing BOM
version relates to which engineering BOM
version. The Visual Enterprise Manufacturing
Planner is used to do the handover from the
EBOM to the MBOM by converting the de-
sign-driven EBOM structure into a manufac-
turing, built-sequence driven MBOM struc-
ture.
Manufacturing Change Record Used to orchestrate the whole production en-

gineering process and keeps track of all
changes made to manufacturing objects
when incorporating a new EBOM version. The
change record is used to analyze, plan, and
execute the changes required in a change cy-
cle. It is an integrated environment that pro-
vides visibility and access to all artifacts in-
volved in the change cycle. Manufacturing
engineers can plan and execute the changes
to MBOMs, shop floor routings, production
orders and so on directly from the Manage
Engineering Changes SAP Fiori application.

(PEO)
Change Impact Analysis The change impact analysis supports the

manufacturing engineer to identify all manu-
facturing-related objects that may be affect-
ed by a change to an existing object such as
an engineering BOM, manufacturing BOM, or
shop floor routing. After the related objects
are determined, manufacturing engineer can
take some quick action such as putting the
production order on hold or add the object to
the change record to act on them later in the
context of the change cycle. When working
with a unitized bill of material and shop floor
routing, you can see the effectivity impacted
by the change.
Standard Texts Using the Manage Standard Texts SAP Fiori

application, users can maintain a library of
reusable text elements for efficient work in-
struction authoring.
HTML Work Instructions Offer a great variety of formatting options,

hyperlinks, and the possibility to include pic-
tures or other content such as referenced to
components or inspection characteristics.
Using interactive work instructions, engi-
neers can provide their production operators
with an online data collection feature. HTML
standard texts can be referenced or copied
into work instructions in multiple languages
reducing the effort of creating and maintain-
ing work instructions.
Qualifications Used to ensure that only qualified production

operators perform critical or difficult opera-
tions. The qualifications are assigned to the
production operators. Operation activities,
work centers, or a material may also require
qualifications.

Buyoffs Contribute to the making of safe products

that fulfill the predefined quality standards.
Buyoffs are frequently used in safety-con-
scious industries such as the production of
aircraft, food, pharmaceuticals, and automo-
biles. A buyoff or buyoffs are assigned to the
operation activity and are confirmed by the
production operator as well as other respon-
sible experts. This process is to ensure that
the results of the operation activity comply
with predefined quality standards. Produc-
tion engineers can use a buyoff cycle tem-
plate when assigning buyoffs to the opera-
tion activity in the routing version.
Production Order Management A shop floor production order is an extended

version of the PP production order that uses
version-controlled execution BOM and rout-
ing. Using the Manage Production Orders
SAP Fiori application, production supervisors
can monitor current production orders within
their area of responsibility to check their sta-
tus, perform various actions on an order,
such as release an order, hold to block pro-
duction activities in case of engineering
change, read-master data to incorporate the
latest engineering change into the order,
view serial numbers created with order re-
lease, understand component availability and
operation progress. Therefore, production
supervisors have the chance to solve any
problems before execution is affected.
Work Assignment and Work Queues Orchestrates the actual execution of produc-
tion order operations and activities. Opera-
tors can access their tasks in work center
work queues or supervisors can explicitly dis-
tribute work to their team members by mov-
ing tasks to personal work queues.
Execution of Production Operations and Op- The Perform Operation Activity SAP Fiori ap-
eration Activities plication supports production operators in
executing their tasks by guiding them
through the production process with the help
of interactive work instructions, 3D visuals,
data collection with real-time valuations, and
so on. The app checks all preconditions of an
operation activity such as the completion of
the predecessor activity or the absence of
holds, making sure that the production proc-
ess is performed as planned.

(PEO)
SAS
Action Type Handler Framework
Change Alerts Used to notify production operators about

engineering changes and highlight the
changes. This ensures that engineering
changes are implemented that may other-
wise be missed if they are hidden somewhere
in the work instructions.
In-line Data Collection
Defects Handling Manages non-conformances by placing holds

on orders or parts, creating defects to be fol-
lowed up by quality engineers and executing
final usage decisions.
Production Confirmations
Production Tracking and Monitoring Serialized parts are tracked and traced dur-
ing the entire production process. The ge-
nealogy and action log collect all data and
create a complete and detailed record of how
a serialized part has been produced (as-built)
and how an order has been executed.
Activation of Function Modules for PEO in SAP S/4HANA

To be able to use the whole functional suite of SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for production
engineering and operations (PEO), you must first activate them in customizing of SAP S/
4HANA. For each of your plants, you can activate the following manufacturing features:
● Buyoffs
● Qualifications
● Change Alerts
● Extended Manufacturing Engineering
● Extended Production Operations
To activate function modules for SAP S/4HANA PEO, use SPRO → SAP Reference
IMG → Production → Manufacturing for Production Engineering and Operations → Activate
Features and Acknowledge License Obligations transaction.

Figure 3: Add Manufacturing User
Note:
The features that you enable in this activity are not part of the standard SAP S/
4HANA Enterprise license.
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:

Unit 1
Lesson 2
Assigning Roles and Working with SAP S/
4HANA PEO Apps on SAP Fiori Launchpad
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn which business roles and catalogs are available for SAP S/4HANA
Manufacturing for Production Engineering and Operations (PEO) applications, as well as
which applications are available for specific business roles. You also learn how to manage
various applications and settings on the SAP Fiori Launchpad.
Business Example
complex products. The Company would like to start using SAP S/4HANA PEO applications
using the SAP Fiori launchpad. John is tasked with assigning business roles to Company
users, so they can see and use SAP S/4HANA PEO applications from the SAP Fiori launchpad.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Business Roles Required for SAP S/4HANA PEO Application and Component
If you use the SAP Fiori launchpad as a user interface, a prerequisite is that you have roles
assigned to your SAP Fiori user in the NetWeaver Gateway system. Each SAP Fiori application
requires its own set of business roles (BR) to be assigned to use it.
SAP delivers template roles, called business PFCG roles, which refer to the corresponding
template business catalogs and business catalog groups.
Business PFCG Role (BCR)

A business PFCG role contains refers to business catalogs and business catalog groups.
Once you, as an administrator, assign the business PFCG role to a user, the user sees the
apps included in the business catalog group on the entry page of the SAP Fiori
launchpad. Through the business catalog referenced, users have access to further
relevant role- specific apps. The user can select the apps from the catalog to make them
available directly on the entry page.
Business Catalog (BC)
Business catalogs contain a sample collection of target mappings and app launcher tiles
relevant for a business role. The content of the business catalog is a subset of the
content of the technical catalog. This subset reflects the authorization requirements of a
certain business user.
Business Catalog Group (BCG)

Business catalog groups contain a set of applications from a business catalog that are
displayed to a user by default on the entry page of the SAP Fiori launchpad. Users can
adjust groups by adding or removing apps.
Technical PFCG Role (TCR)
Technical PFCG roles contain references to technical catalogs, and they allow users to
access the apps contained in these catalogs.
Technical Catalog (TC)
Technical catalogs contain all target mappings and app launcher tiles relevant for an
application, for example, SD or SAP SRM. As an administrator, you can use them as a
repository to create your own role-specific business catalogs.
Figure 4: Business Roles
Table 2: Business Roles
The following business PFCG roles with the assigned catalogs and groups are required per
SAP S/4HANA PEO Application and Component.
Component Application Role and Description
PP-PEO-ACI Analyze Change SAP_BR_PRODN_ENG_DISC

Impact
(Production Engineer - Discrete Manufacturing)
SAP_BR_PRODN_ENG_DISC_CAM
(Production Engineer - Discrete Manufacturing (Complex
Assembly))
SAP_BR_PRODN_ENG_DISC_EME
(Production Engineer - Discrete Manufacturing (Manufac-
turing Engineering))

Lesson: Assigning Roles and Working with SAP S/4HANA PEO Apps on SAP Fiori Launchpad
PP-PEO Check Major As- SAP_BR_PRODN_ENG_DISC

sembly Projects
Assembly))
Maintain Bill of SAP_BR_PRODN_ENG_DISC

Material
Assembly))
PP-PEO Manage Unas- SAP_BR_PRODN_ENG_DISC

signed EBOM
Assembly))
PP-PEO Manage Unas- SAP_BR_PRODN_ENG_DISC

signed MBOM
Assembly))

Manage Produc- SAP_BR_PRODN_ENG_DISC

tion Versions
Assembly))
PP-PEO-SFR Manage Shop SAP_BR_PRODN_ENG_DISC

Floor Routings
Assembly))
Cockpit for SAP_BR_PRODN_ENG_DISC

VEMP
(vmp_maintain)
Launch VEMP
Assembly))
PP-PEO-BUF Manage Buyoff SAP_BR_PRODN_ENG_DISC

Cycle Templates
Manage Buyoffs SAP_BR_PRODN_SUPRVSR_DISC_CAM (Production Su-

pervisor – Discrete Manufacturing (Complex Assembly))
PP-PEO_CER Manage Object SAP_BR_PRODN_ENG_DISC_CAM (Production Engineer -

Qualification Discrete Manufacturing (Complex Assembly))
Assignments SAP_BR_PRODN_PROC_SPCLST_CAM
(Production Process Specialist (Complex
Assembly))
Manage User SAP_BR_PRODN_SUPRVSR_DISC_EPO (Production Su-

Settings pervisor - Discrete Manufacturing (Extended Production
Operations))

PP-PEO-SFA Product Geneal- SAP_BR_PRODN_SUPRVSR_DISC_EPO (Production Su-

ogy pervisor - Discrete Manufacturing (Extended Production
Operations))
Production Ac- SAP_BR_PRODN_SUPRVSR_DISC_CAM (Production Su-

tion Log pervisor - Discrete Manufacturing (Complex Assembly))
SAP_BR_PRODN_SUPRVSR_DISC_EPO
(Production Supervisor - Discrete Manufacturing (Extend-
ed Production
Operations))
SAP_BR_QUALITY_ENGINEER_EPO
(Quality Engineer (Extended Production Operations))
PP-PEO-SFE Assign Work SAP_BR_PRODN_SUPRVSR_DISC_CAM (Production Su-

pervisor - Discrete Manufacturing (Complex Assembly))
SAP_BR_PRODN_SUPRVSR_DISC_EPO
(Production Supervisor - Discrete Manufacturing (Extend-
ed Production
Operations))
Manage Action SAP_BR_PRODN_PROC_SPCLST_EPO (Production Proc-

Settings ess Specialist (Extended
Production Operations))
Manage Produc- SAP_BR_PRODN_SUPRVSR_DISC_EPO (Production Su-

tion Holds pervisor - Discrete Manufacturing (Extended Production
Operations))
Manage Reason SAP_BR_PRODN_PROC_SPCLST_EPO (Production Proc-

Codes ess Specialist (Extended
Manage Reason SAP_BR_PRODN_PROC_SPCLST_EPO (Production Proc-

Code Groups ess Specialist (Extended
Manage Work SAP_BR_PRODN_OPTR_DISC_EPO (Production Operator

Center Queue - Discrete Manufacturing (Extended Production
Operations))

My Work Queue SAP_BR_PRODN_OPTR_DISC

(Production Operator - Discrete Manufacturing)
SAP_BR_PRODN_OPTR_DISC_EPO
(Production Operator - Discrete Manufacturing (Extended
Production
Operations)
Perform Opera- SAP_BR_PRODN_OPTR_DISC_EPO

tion
Production
Operations))
Perform Opera- SAP_BR_PRODN_OPTR_DISC_EPO

tion Activity
Production
Operations))
Reprocess SAP_BR_PRODN_SUPRVSR_DISC
Failed Material
(Production Supervisor - Discrete Manufacturing)
Movements
SAP_BR_PRODN_SUPRVSR_DISC_EPO (Production Su-
pervisor - Discrete Manufacturing (Extended Production
Operations))
PP-PEO-STX Find Standard SAP_BR_PRODN_ENG_DISC_CAM

Texts
Assembly))
Manage Stand- SAP_BR_PRODN_ENG_DISC_CAM

ard Texts
Assembly))
SAP S/4HANA PEO Apps on the SAP Fiori Launchpad

Applications are grouped into business catalogs in the SAP Fiori launchpad. To be able to see
specific applications by default in the entry page of the SAP Fiori launchpad, the catalogs
must be assigned to users’ PFCG roles. The applications that are relevant to SAP S/4HANA
PEO are grouped in the following business catalogs:

Table 3: Business Catalogs and Applications

Business Catalog Applications
Responsibility Management Manage Teams and Responsibilities
Production Engineering Maintain Bill of Material

Manage Unassigned EBOMs
Manage Unassigned MBOMs
Manage Shop Floor Routings
Manage Production Versions
Manage Buyoff Cycle Templates
Find Standard Texts
Manage Standard Texts
Cockpit for VMP
Monitor Shop Floor Master Data
Monitor Engineering Snapshots
Prepare MBOM Creation
Complex Assembly Project Man- Check Major Assembly Projects

agement
Production Execution Process Manage Reason Codes

Setup
Manage Reason Code Groups
Manage Action Settings
Manage User Settings
Manage Object Qualification Assignments
Change Record Manage Engineering Changes

Business Catalog Applications
Shop Floor Control and Manufac- Create Production Order

turing Execution
Change Production Orders
Manage Production Operations
Manage Production Orders
Manage Reason Codes
Manage Reason Code Groups
Manage Action Settings
Manage Work Center Queue
My Work Queue
Perform Work (Material/Serial Number)
Perform Work (Order/Operation)
Assign Work
Manage Buyoffs
Manage Production Holds
Reprocess Failed Material Movements
Defects Recording Process Defects
Production Execution Monitoring Product Genealogy

Production Action Log
Figure 5: Production Execution Process Setup
You can work with these standard business catalogs and groups, or, if you only usually work
with one or two apps, you can create your own group on the SAP Fiori launchpad and copy the
tiles of the applications that are relevant for you to the new group.

Unit 1
Exercise 1
Create a Group of SAP S/4HANA PEO Apps on
the SAP Fiori Launchpad
Simulation: Create a Group of SAP S/4HANA PEO Apps on the SAP Fiori
Launchpad
For more information on Create a Group of SAP S/4HANA PEO Apps on the SAP
Fiori Launchpad, please view the simulation in the lesson Assigning Roles and
Working with SAP S/4HANA PEO Apps on SAP Fiori Launchpad in your online
course.
Business Example
complex products. The company would like to start using SAP S/4HANA PEO applications
using the SAP Fiori launchpad. John has been given the tasks of assigning business roles to
company users, so they can see and use SAP S/4HANA PEO applications from the SAP Fiori
launchpad.
Note:
In this exercise, when you see the characters ##, replace the characters with the
number provided by your instructor.
1. Create a new group ## Applications on the SAP Fiori launchpad so that you can later
easily access SAP S/4HANA PEO apps.
2. Add the following apps to the newly created group:
● Create Production Order
● Manage Production Orders
● Assign Work
● My Work Queue
● Perform Work (Order/Operation)
● Product Genealogy
3. Change the launchpad settings to show only one group at a time.
4. Change the theme from SAP Belize to SAP Belize Deep.

Unit 1
Solution 1
Create a Group of SAP S/4HANA PEO Apps on
the SAP Fiori Launchpad
Simulation: Create a Group of SAP S/4HANA PEO Apps on the SAP Fiori
Launchpad
For more information on Create a Group of SAP S/4HANA PEO Apps on the SAP
Fiori Launchpad, please view the simulation in the lesson Assigning Roles and
Working with SAP S/4HANA PEO Apps on SAP Fiori Launchpad in your online
course.
Business Example
complex products. The company would like to start using SAP S/4HANA PEO applications
using the SAP Fiori launchpad. John has been given the tasks of assigning business roles to
company users, so they can see and use SAP S/4HANA PEO applications from the SAP Fiori
launchpad.
Note:
1. Create a new group ## Applications on the SAP Fiori launchpad so that you can later
easily access SAP S/4HANA PEO apps.
a) Open the SAP Fiori launchpad using the link provided by the instructor. Alternatively,
choose Start, search for Fiori, and select Fiori launchpad.
b) In the upper-right corner, choose the User icon and choose Edit Home Page.
c) Choose the Add Group button.
d) Enter ## Applications as a group name.
2. Add the following apps to the newly created group:
● Create Production Order
● Manage Production Orders
● Assign Work
● My Work Queue

● Product Genealogy
a) Drag and drop the apps to the newly created group.
b) Choose Close.
3. Change the launchpad settings to show only one group at a time.

a) In the upper-right corner, choose the User icon.
b) Choose Settings and then choose the Home Page option on the left.
c) Choose Show one group at a time.
d) Choose Save.
4. Change the theme from SAP Belize to SAP Belize Deep.

a) Choose the Appearance option on the left.
b) Choose SAP Belize Deep.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 1
Lesson 3
Setting Up Manufacturing Users for SAP S/
4HANA PEO
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to setup manufacturing users for SAP S/4HANA PEO and define
default plants and work centers for these users. You also learn for which processes and
applications of SAP S/4HANA PEO the existence of a manufacturing user is required.
Business Example
complex products. To use certain SAP S/4HANA PEO applications and processes, there is a
need to have manufacturing users in the system. John is tasked with creating manufacturing
users for SAP S/4HANA PEO.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
The Manufacturing User

To benefit from the features that SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for production engineering
and operations (PEO) provides, you must create and assign manufacturing users to the
people using the product. All users need a manufacturing user, regardless of their role.
With SAP S/4HANA, a business user is defined as a natural person, who is represented by a
business partner and a link to a user in the system. Business users interact with the software
in the context of a business process, for example, in the role of a production engineer, a
production supervisor, or a production operator. To create manufacturing users, you first
have to create business partners that are then used as manufacturing users.
Note:
The user ID for the manufacturing user to be added corresponds to the user's
business partner ID created in the back-end system using transaction PA30. For
more information about how to create business partners in SAP S/4HANA, see
the online help.
SAP S/4HANA PEO Applications that Require Manufacturing User

To be able to use the following SAP S/4HANA PEO applications, you must create
manufacturing user and assign it to default work center and plant:

● Assign Work:
When assigning production operator to operation activities, the system displays a dialog
box of all operators that have a corresponding manufacturing user defined in the system
and whose default work center is identical to the one defined for the operation activity.
● Manage Work Center Queue:
To even open this application, the system needs to know the default work center assigned
to the manufacturing user. The list of operations displayed in the application is filtered by
the default work center to which the user is assigned. If the user is assigned to several
work centers, the system initially shows the operations available in the default work center,
but the user can switch the work center to display the operations of other work centers to
which he is assigned.
● Manage Teams and Responsibilities

Unit 1
Exercise 2
Create a Manufacturing User and Assign it to a
Simulation: Create a Manufacturing User and Assign it to a Default Work Center

and Plant
For more information on Create a Manufacturing User and Assign it to a Default
Work Center and Plant, please view the simulation in the lesson Setting Up
Manufacturing Users for SAP S/4HANA PEO in your online course.
Business Example
Note:
1. Create a manufacturing user by selecting an existing business partner that corresponds to

your name.
2. Assign HULL-## as the default work center and 1020 as the default plant to the selected
user.

Unit 1
Solution 2
Create a Manufacturing User and Assign it to a
Simulation: Create a Manufacturing User and Assign it to a Default Work Center

and Plant
For more information on Create a Manufacturing User and Assign it to a Default
Work Center and Plant, please view the simulation in the lesson Setting Up
Manufacturing Users for SAP S/4HANA PEO in your online course.
Business Example
Note:
1. Create a manufacturing user by selecting an existing business partner that corresponds to

your name.
a) Open the SAP Fiori launchpad using the link provided by the instructor.
b) Navigate to the Manage User Settings app in the Production Execution Process Setup
group on the SAP Fiori launchpad.
c) Above the table on the right, choose Add.
d) Next to the Business Partner field, choose the value help button.
e) Search for the business partner that corresponds to your user name.
2. Assign HULL-## as the default work center and 1020 as the default plant to the selected
user.
a) In the Default Work Center field, enter HULL-##.
b) In the Default Plant field, enter 1020.
c) Choose Save.

Lesson: Setting Up Manufacturing Users for SAP S/4HANA PEO
LESSON SUMMARY


Unit 1
Learning Assessment
1. What does PEO stand for?

Choose the correct answer.
X A Production Engineering and Operations
X B Product Environment and Organization
X C Professional Enterprise Organization
2. Applications are grouped into business catalogs in the SAP Fiori launchpad. Match each
app to the correct business catalog.
Match the item in the first column to the corresponding item in the second column.
Apps Business Catalog

Manage Shop Floor Routings Production Engineering
Manage Production Opera- Shop Floor Control and Manu-
tions facturing Execution
Product Genealogy Production Execution Monitor-
ing
3. In PEO, BOMs and routings are version controlled.

Determine whether this statement is true or false.
X True
X False

Unit 1: Learning Assessment

UNIT 2 Production Engineering
Lesson 1
Handing Over the Engineering Snapshot from PLM to Production Engineering 32
Exercise 3: Monitor Engineering Snapshots 35
Lesson 2
Preparing MBOM Creation (Based on Snapshot) 39
Exercise 4: Prepare MBOM Creation (Based on Snapshots) 55
Lesson 3
Creating MBOMs based on EBOM using Visual Enterprise Manufacturing Planner (VEMP) 59
Exercise 5: Create MBOMs with the Visual Enterprise Manufacturing Planner 63
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Understand the purpose of Snapshot revisions

● Monitor Engineering Snapshots
● Understand the difference between classical BOM and version-controlled BOM
● Manage unassigned EBOMs
● Explain the planning scope and change record concepts
● Prepare MBOM creation based on Snapshots
● Use the Visual Enterprise Manufacturing Planner for EBOM to MBOM conversion

Unit 2
Lesson 1
Handing Over the Engineering Snapshot from
PLM to Production Engineering
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Production Engineering Process Flow

The Engineering Snapshot is a new concept which has been introduced with SAP S/4HANA
PEO 2020. It vastly facilitates the handover of complex major assemblies from PLM to PEO by
packaging multi-layer engineering BOM structures along with their 3D visuals and supporting
artifacts like documents and other product manufacturing information (PMI) to so-called
Engineering Snapshots.
Figure 8: EBOM to MBOM Handover Process
Animation: EBOM to MBOM Handover Process

For more information on EBOM to MBOM Handover Process, please view the
animation in the lesson Handing Over the Engineering Snapshot from PLM to
Production Engineering, in your online course.
Previously, new eBOMs and changes were transferred on a one-by-one basis. This new
concept ensures that the original engineering intent is completely and consistently
transferred to the production system. All artifacts and single eBOMs which belong together
are maintained in the same package respectively, Engineering Snapshot.

Lesson: Handing Over the Engineering Snapshot from PLM to Production Engineering
Any change to one or multiple eBOMs of a dedicated Engineering Snapshot causes the
release of a new revision, which is automatically transferred through the TDMI interface from
the PLM to the ERP system. The production engineer is instantly informed about the arrival of
such a new revision by the dynamic SAP Fiori app Monitor Engineering Snapshots. This app
displays the content of a specific revision and indicates in detail where a particular change has
been performed.
From here the production engineer launches the follow-up process steps such as creation of a
manufacturing change record and conversion of engineering BOMs to manufacturing BOMs.
Alternative BOM Creation

Besides the use of Engineering Snapshots, it is also possible to transfer single 3D engineering
BOMs one-by-one to SAP S/4HANA PEO. In that case, a document info record containing the
3D visual file (.VDS) is created and can be converted to a materialized version controlled
engineering BOM by means of the Visual Enterprise Manufacturing Planner (VEMP). If a visual
is not available, you can create a version controlled EBOM or MBOM directly in SAP S/4HANA
PEO with the Maintain Bill of Material app. Subsequently the Manage unassigned EBOMs app
is used to launch the VEMP for EBOM to MBOM conversion if required.

Unit 2: Production Engineering

Unit 2
Exercise 3
Simulation: Monitor Engineering Snapshots

For more information on Monitor Engineering Snapshots, please view the
simulation in the lesson Handing Over the Engineering Snapshot from PLM to
Production Engineering in your online course.
Business Example
Eric is a production engineer in the low-volume A&D Company focusing on the final assembly
of complex products. The company would like to start modeling its production process in SAP
S/4HANA PEO. The company has implemented the TDMI interface for automatic transfer of
engineering data form a PLM system to SAP S/4HANA PEO. To view the arrival of new or
changed engineering data he uses the Monitor Engineering Snapshots app. He examines the
Snapshot content and chooses the follow-up process steps.
Note:
1. Search for new or changed Engineering Snapshots and view 3D visuals and other
supporting data. Use the following filter criteria:
● Material: LEGOBOAT-##
● Snapshot Revision: All
2. Find EBOMs contained in Engineering Snapshot also in the Maintain Bill of Material app.

Unit 2
Solution 3
Simulation: Monitor Engineering Snapshots

For more information on Monitor Engineering Snapshots, please view the
simulation in the lesson Handing Over the Engineering Snapshot from PLM to
Production Engineering in your online course.
Business Example
S/4HANA PEO. The company has implemented the TDMI interface for automatic transfer of
engineering data form a PLM system to SAP S/4HANA PEO. To view the arrival of new or
changed engineering data he uses the Monitor Engineering Snapshots app. He examines the
Snapshot content and chooses the follow-up process steps.
Note:
1. Search for new or changed Engineering Snapshots and view 3D visuals and other
supporting data. Use the following filter criteria:
b) Navigate to the Monitor Engineering Snapshots app in the Production Engineering

group.
c) Enter the following data in the filter section and choose Go:
The system finds the available Snapshot Revisions that matches your entered filter
criteria.
2. Find EBOMs contained in Engineering Snapshot also in the Maintain Bill of Material app.
a) Navigate to the details page of Snapshot Revision 1 by selecting the corresponding
line.

Lesson: Handing Over the Engineering Snapshot from PLM to Production Engineering
b) Turn on the visual display by choosing the Show Visual button on the top-right corner
of the Engineering BOM tab.
c) In the list of EBOMs, choose any of the light bulb buttons to highlight that assembly in
the 3D visual.
d) Select the radio button next to an EBOM and select the Display Engineering BOM link at
the top of the list.
The system navigates to the Maintain Bill of Material app where you can view
components and other details about the selected EBOM.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 2
Lesson 2
Preparing MBOM Creation (Based on
Snapshot)
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Classical Versus Version-Controlled Bills of Material

In manufacturing, a bill of material (BOM) is a list of all the materials required in a process
together with the necessary quantities. The list contains the description, the quantity, and the
unit of measure. The components are known as BOM items.
In SAP S/4HANA PEO, BOMs (like shop floor routings) are version-controlled. "Version-
controlled" means that a BOM is not dependent on time but on its version and status. Each
version represents an instance of the BOM. Any changes made in a new BOM version do not
affect a previous version.
Which MBOM version is to be used for production is determined by the production version.
There is no further determination of the BOM components according to the production date.
BOM Version Statuses

● In Process: You can make any changes to a BOM version in this status.
● Released: No changes are allowed. The only way to modify such a BOM is to create a new
version.
Further differences between classical BOMs and version-controlled BOMs are described in
the table below.
Attributes Classical BOM Version-Controlled BOM

Identification Identified by material, plant, Identified by material, plant,
usage, and alternative. usage, alternative, and ver-
sion.

Attributes Classical BOM Version-Controlled BOM

Change States For BOMs with a change his- No change states exist for
tory, the change states are BOM header or BOM item.
identified using engineering Each version represents an
change numbers (ECNs). instance of the BOM. Any
changes made in a new BOM
version do not affect a previ-
ous version.
Edit Control The BOM alternative is al- Once released, a BOM ver-
ways open for editing. Engi- sion is frozen and cannot be
neering change numbers are changed. If changes are re-
used to ensure the date ef- quired, a new version of the
fectivity of change states. BOM alternative is created by
copying the previous version.
BOM Determination for Pro- Which MBOM alternative is to Which MBOM version is to be
duction be used for production is de- used for production is deter-
termined by the production mined by the production ver-
version but which compo- sion. There is no further de-
nents to be used are deter- termination of the BOM com-
mined based on the produc- ponents according to the pro-
tion date. duction date.
App Access Can be accessed using the Can be accessed using the
SAPGUI transaction in the new Manage Unassigned
SAP Easy Access menu as EBOMs and Manage Unas-
well as the new Maintain Bill signed MBOMs apps only.
of Material app.
The Prepare MBOM Creation App

As a production engineer, you use this app to prepare for the EBOM to MBOM conversion of a
particular EBOM that is part of a new or updated Engineering Snapshot.
Each MBOM that you are going to plan needs to be assigned to a specific production plant and
manufacturing change record. If there are several or all MBOMs to be manufactured in the
same production plant you could also assign them all to the same manufacturing change
record. In addition, the app automatically creates a new planning scope to facilitate the
subsequent creation of the MBOM with the Visual Enterprise Manufacturing Planner (VEMP).
This concept is described in more detail in the following sections.

Lesson: Preparing MBOM Creation (Based on Snapshot)
Figure 11: Concept and Use of Engineering Snapshots in SAP S/4HANA PEO
To Prepare MBOM Creation

The Prepare MBOM Creation app guides you through the preparation process and validates
your entries after each step.
1. Enter the EBOM/Production details.

Select the EBOM you want to convert to one or more MBOMs. Then determine the
production plant and usage (should be V for version-controlled BOM). If a change record
and planning scope already exists for this EBOM, it displays as an option.
2. Select Engineering Snapshot.

EBOM is displayed in detail as part of complete Engineering Snapshot. You can view the
attached 3D visual linked to the Engineering Snapshot or filter only on selected EBOMs.
3. Choose Change Record.

You may assign the EBOM to an existing manufacturing change record or create a new
one for this particular EBOM to MBOM conversion. The app then creates a planning scope
which is automatically added to the change record.
The Manage Unassigned EBOMs App

The Manage Unassigned EBOMs app is used for new or changed EBOMs which are separately
imported or created in SAP S/4HANA PEO and not contained in an Engineering Snapshot.
As a production engineer, you use this app to view the status of all the EBOMs. Uou can assign
EBOMs to a planning scope and a change record so that the correct manufacturing engineers
and departments can work on them. You must hand over any new versions of the EBOMs or
status changes to manufacturing so that the corresponding MBOMs, routings, and so on can
be updated, created, or deleted according to the change.
In the app, you can set the assignment status filter to Unassigned to view the unassigned
EBOMs only or to All to display both the assigned and unassigned EBOMs in your queue.

Figure 12: Display All EBOMs
Animation: Display All EBOMs

For more information on Display All EBOMs, please view the animation in the
lesson Preparing MBOM Creation (Based on Snapshot), in your online course.
For each new version of an EBOM, you can determine the planning scope for the incoming
EBOMs and assign them to the relevant manufacturing change record to initiate the
manufacturing handover process.
If the relevant planning scope and change record are already available, they are displayed in
the Recommended Planning Scope and in the Open Change Records sections
correspondingly.
Figure 14: Assign EBOM to Planning Scope
Animation: Assign EBOM to Planning Scope

For more information on Assign EBOM to Planning Scope, please view the
animation in the lesson Preparing MBOM Creation (Based on Snapshot), in your
online course.
You can also assign an EBOM to an existing planning scope (using the View All button to
search for all available planning scopes) or you can create a new one. You can also assign an
EBOM to an existing change record or create a new one to be included in the planning scope.

You can preset filters to search for the EBOMs based on multiple criteria available in the app
and then save it as a customized tile. In this case, in the tile on the SAP Fiori launchpad, the
system displays the real-time count number of EBOMs based on the predefined search
criteria.
Figure 16: Manage Unassigned EBOMs
Animation: Manage Unassigned EBOMs

For more information on Manage Unassigned EBOMs, please view the animation
in the lesson Preparing MBOM Creation (Based on Snapshot), in your online
course.
Caution:
You must configure the app settings to define the production plant(s) for the
version-controlled BOMs for which you are responsible.
To Manage Unassigned EBOMs
1. Launch the Manage Unassigned EBOMs app.
2. Choose your user icon in the top-left corner.
Figure 18: User Icon
3. Choose App Settings.
4. Enter the plant 1020 and choose Ok.

Figure 19: App Settings
The Planning Scope

A planning scope is a concept that has been developed in the context of the Visual Enterprise
Manufacturing Planner (VEMP) which is a 3D-oriented application for assembly planning. The
planning scope is the object that is used to control which source structure(s) are used in
planning and that stores the result of the planning session. The source is either a 3D model or
a non-visual BOM created by the design department. The target is a hierarchical, ordered set
of components making up a multi-level manufacturing BOM of the product.
The conversion of an EBOM to an MBOM is done using the planning scope. The planning
scope is a logical organizational segment of a product which is planned as one unit and which
is defined by a set of manufacturing BOMs and respective routings. It defines an area of
responsibility for production engineers by grouping all MBOMs that are typically planned
together.
Figure 20: Multi-Level BOM Management
Using planning scopes, you can slice large products into segments for practical (size) and
organizational reasons. The figure below illustrates how the large sections of an aircraft could
be segmented. Different engineering teams will work on the planning of the aircraft sections
such as forward fuselage, wings, engines, and so on. That is, you can create multiple planning
scopes for different teams of engineers to plan complex products efficiently.

Figure 21: Aircraft Segmentation
Animation: Aircraft Segmentation

For more information on Aircraft Segmentation, please view the animation in the
lesson Preparing MBOM Creation (Based on Snapshot), in your online course.
You initiate a planning session from SAP S/4HANA by using either the transaction
VMP_MAINTAIN or the Cockpit for VMP app. You can also launch it from the change record to
perform an EBOM to MBOM handover.
The Manufacturing Change Record

The change record is used to orchestrate the whole production engineering process. It keeps
track of all changes made to manufacturing objects when incorporating a new EBOM version.
The change record is used to analyze, plan, and execute the changes required in a change
cycle. It is an integrated environment that provides visibility and access to all artifacts
involved in the change cycle. Production engineers can plan and execute the changes to
MBOMs, shop floor routings, production orders, and so on directly from the Manage
Engineering Changes SAP Fiori app.
In SAP S/4HANA PEO, you create the change record in the Manage Unassigned EBOMs app
during the EBOM assignment process. Here, you can also update the change record by
adding the EBOM and planning scope to it. You can also create the change record in the
Manage Engineering Changes app. This app enables you to manage all engineering changes.
For example, you can use it to monitor the change progress on a regular basis and create new
changes in response to certain events. You can search for change records, maintain them,
start change processes, and assign attachments. You can configure the entry screen of the
Manage Engineering Changes app so that the system only shows the open change records for
which you are responsible.

Figure 23: Manage Engineering Changes
The app provides the following business values:

● Workflow-driven change management process along with ad-hoc stakeholder
communication with Copilot
● Single source of truth (centralized change data, for example, scopes, processes, and
responsible persons)
● Predefined process templates to accelerate the process setup in daily business
● Determination of the correct responsible persons for the process from predefined teams
to save the efforts of team setup
The change record header provides filtering, sorting, and grouping features. You can navigate
from the change record workbench to create new or display existing change records. You can
add BOMs (engineering and manufacturing), planning scopes, routings, production orders,
purchase orders, attachments, and URLs to change records manually. In certain processes,
these objects are also added to the change record automatically. For example, the MBOM is
automatically assigned to the change record after EBOM to MBOM handover in VEMP.
Hint:
In Customizing (SPRO), you can add additional objects to the change record type
such as materials, BOM items, and documents.

Figure 24: Change Record
As production engineer you can use the change record as a single point of entry. From here,
you can access all the relevant objects for the change cycle. That is, you can navigate to the
corresponding apps to view or manipulate the objects:
● Launch VEMP for BOM incorporation.
● Trigger impact analysis.
● Navigate to standalone apps to view and/or update artifacts such as the BOM, routing,
production order, and so on.
Figure 25: Change Record

Figure 26: Manufacturing Change Record: Navigation
The Interaction Between Planning Scope and Manufacturing Change Record

You define the scope of a change in the change record. That is, one or more BOMs that are
subject to change. The change record passes this information on to the planning scope that
then limits the changes to the BOMs that require changes. Note that the planning scope may
contain more BOMs than those that are subject to change. The planning scope may overrule
this constraint and may add other BOMs to the change record.
For example, if you are in the VEMP and are performing an EBOM to MBOM handover, the
EBOM may contain several subassemblies that are not included in the current change record.
However, these subassemblies are also visible in the VEMP as they exist in the planning
scope. You can also load them in the VEMP to perform changes. The BOMs of these
subassemblies are then automatically included in the change record. That is, the system
automatically records the additional BOMs in the change record.
Settings for Change Records

You configure the change record type as required in Customizing (SPRO) under Logistics -
General → Product Lifecycle Management (PLM) → Change Records → Settings for
Engineering Changes → Define Engineering Change Record Types.
You should create the new change record type MFG.
Record Type Description Number Range Status Profile Scenario

MFG Manufacturing Q2 SMP WS02000394
Engineering
S01 Product Engi- Q1 WS00800208
neering Record

You should add the following pre-delivered object types:
Object Type Object Type Text

EBM Engineering Bill of Material
MBM Manufacturing Bill of Material
PLS Planning Scope
ROU Routing
PRN Production Order
PO Purchase Order
SNP Engineering Snapshot
DOC Document
You should add the following relevancies:
Relevance Object Type Relevance Descrip- Object Type Text

tion
CHG Change
CRE Create
CTR EBM Change Trigger Engineering Bill of
Material
CTR MBM Change Trigger Manufacturing Bill of
Material
CTR PLS Change Trigger Planning Scope
CTR ROU Change Trigger Routing
CTR SNP Change Trigger Engineering Snap-
shot
DEL Delete
NEW EBM New Version Engineering Bill of
Material
NEW MBM New Version Manufacturing Bill of
Material
NEW ROU New Version Routing
REF
This change record type appears in the dropdown list of Create Change Record in the Manage
Engineering Changes app and in the Create Change Record dialog box of the Manage
Unassigned EBOMs app. The reference objects maintained in Customizing also display in the
Items tab of the app.
Settings for User Status in Manufacturing Change Record

You can configure the lifecycle status of the change record type. You should create a new
status profile SMP for the change record MFG in Customizing under Logistics -

General → Product Lifecycle Management (PLM) → Change Records → User

Statuses → Define User Status Profiles.
Appl. Status Profile Status Profile Text Business Object

CR SMP Simple Status Profile /IAM/ISSUE
You should define the following actions for the status profile SMP:
Int-No. Target Action Type UsrStat Action Status Action Test

20 User Status Action ZA01 Send Change Re-
quest
30 User Status Action YA06 Complete Change
Note:
You can configure your own status profile as necessary in Customizing under
Logistics - General → Product Lifecycle Management (PLM) → Change
Records → User Statuses.
Change Record Workflow

You can leverage change record workflow capabilities to coordinate work between the
different contributors and stakeholders of the change process to support your business
processes as necessary. These may be simple release or approval procedures or more
complex business processes.
Figure 27: Typical Manufacturing Change Management Flow
The workflow can be defined using the Process Routes tab in the Change Record. You can load
predefined processes and adopt the roles as required or add one or multiple steps to the
process routes manually. The steps define the task details and the agent property that is used
to determine the recipient of the task when the workflow runs.

Figure 28: Process Routes Tab
Figure 29: Define Workflow
You can also select the change record status that should be triggered when the step is
invoked. This enables the automatic transition of the change record status with workflow step
completion.
When the workflow is running, the recipient is determined, and the task is delivered to the
engineer’s inbox. From the inbox, the agent can navigate to the Manage Engineering Changes
app to view or make changes to the change record. Also, the available actions can be
performed for the task itself.

Figure 30: Task in Inbox
To work with the change record workflow, the workflow scenario definition WS02000394 is
provided in the standard system. In addition, you should fulfill the following prerequisites:
● Activate the scenario definition by maintaining the scenario definition number and the
activation checkbox in Customizing under SAP NetWeaver → Application
Sever → Business Management → SAP Business Workflow → Flexible
Workflow → Scenario Activation.
● The workflow scenario definition has been assigned to the change record type MFG in
Customizing under Logistics - General → Product Lifecycle Management (PLM) → Change
Records → Settings for Engineering Changes → Define Engineering Record Types.
Note:
You can define your own workflow scenario as necessary using transaction
SWDD_SCENARIO.
With this app, you can define and manage workflow templates for change records according
to different scenarios.
You can use this app to perform the following tasks:
● Search process templates of a certain scenario.
● Define a new process template.
● Define a process template based on an existing template.
● Edit a process template.

Figure 31: Manage Workflow Templates
Figure 32: Workflow Templates
Managing Unassigned MBOMs

If changes are made directly to the MBOM and are not passed on from a changed EBOM, a
handover is not required. In this case, the MBOM triggers the changes. Use the Manage
Unassigned MBOMs app to assign the MBOMs to a change record to start the change
process.
The Manage Unassigned MBOMs app works similarly to the Manage Unassigned EBOMs app
but because the EBOM to MBOM handover is not required, the planning scope is not used.
You can simply select the MBOMs and assign them to an existing change record or create a
new change record.

Figure 33: Manage Unassigned MBOMs
Figure 34: Assign MBOMs

Unit 2
Exercise 4
Prepare MBOM Creation (Based on Snapshots)
Simulation: Prepare MBOM Creation (Based on Snapshots)

For more information on Prepare MBOM Creation (Based on Snapshots), please
view the simulation in the lesson Preparing MBOM Creation (Based on Snapshot)
Business Example
S/4HANA PEO. Eric has been given the task of preparing the MBOM creation based on newly
received or updated Engineering Snapshots. He has to decide in which production plant a
MBOM is going to be manufactured and which MBOMs are going to be bundled to the same
change record and planning scope for organizational reasons.
Note:
1. Create a change record and planning scope for material Hull (HULL-##) as preparation for
the MBOM creation.

Unit 2
Solution 4
Prepare MBOM Creation (Based on Snapshots)
Simulation: Prepare MBOM Creation (Based on Snapshots)

For more information on Prepare MBOM Creation (Based on Snapshots), please
view the simulation in the lesson Preparing MBOM Creation (Based on Snapshot)
Business Example
S/4HANA PEO. Eric has been given the task of preparing the MBOM creation based on newly
received or updated Engineering Snapshots. He has to decide in which production plant a
MBOM is going to be manufactured and which MBOMs are going to be bundled to the same
change record and planning scope for organizational reasons.
Note:
1. Create a change record and planning scope for material Hull (HULL-##) as preparation for
the MBOM creation.
b) Navigate to the Monitor Engineering Snapshots app in the Production Engineering

group.
c) Enter following data in the filter section and choose Go:
The system returns an Engineering Snapshot for the LEGOBOAT-## with Revision 1.
d) To navigate to the details screen, select the found record.
e) Select the radio button for Hull (HULL-##) and choose the Prepare MBOM Creation
link.
f) Enter the following production information:
● Production Plant: 1020

● Production Usage: V
g) Choose the Validate Entries button and then choose Continue.

The app navigates to step 2 - Select Engineering Snapshot. The Hull (HULL-##)
engineering BOM is marked in blue.
h) Choose Continue to navigate to Step 3 - Select Change Record.
i) Select the New Change Record radio button and enter following data:
● Record Type: MFG
● Change Record Description: Free form text, such as HULL-## creation
● Change Responsible: Your business user ID
j) Choose the Review button.
k) Verify the data and choose the Prepare MBOM Creation button to open the newly
created change record.
The change record contains the Engineering Snapshot, the EBOM, and planning scope
for the EBOM to MBOM conversion.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 2
Lesson 3
Creating MBOMs based on EBOM using Visual
Enterprise Manufacturing Planner (VEMP)
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Visual Enterprise Manufacturing Planner

The Visual Enterprise Manufacturing Planner (VEMP) supports you in creating and
maintaining manufacturing structures (manufacturing bill of materials (MBOMs) and
routings) by using engineering structures (engineering BOMs (EBOMs)) as input through a
visually guided planning process. It supports the handover process of BOMs associated with
3D model and non-visual BOMs.
Since the VEMP is not exclusively used in context of SAP S/4HANA PEO, it supports different
scenarios of BOM conversion based on the given input data. Instead of using EBOMs from an
Engineering Snapshots it is also possible to start the planning process based on an
engineering structure given in form of a document. In that case the document shall contain
the relevant RH or VDS file which is used for 3D model and source structure visualization.
Figure 36: Visual Enterprise Manufacturing Planner
VEMP Cockpit
The VEMP cockpit consists of three main panels, each of which consists of a tree or list and an
associated graphics viewport. These are referred to as the Source Panel, Working Panel, and
the Target Panel:

● The Source Panel contains the source bill of materials and geometry contained within the
loaded file. From here, you can make your selections for planning and transferring the
components either to the Working Panel or directly to the Target Panel if no changes are to
be made to the structure.
● The Working Panel contains the currently selected material structure. From here, you can
work on a single level MBOM, associate a routing to the manufacturing structure, allocate
components to the routing operations and commit your changes to the Target Panel.
Structure editing is allowed only in this panel.
● The Target Panel contains the geometry that has been planned. From here, you can locate
any unplanned instances of parts and, if required, move parts back to the Working Panel
for editing.
Each panel contains a header area with standard icons to control the display. You can swap
the position of a panel with another by dragging the panel and dropping it on the target panel.
Closing the panel removes it from the screen and the other panels automatically resize to fill
the vacant display area. The final panel cannot be closed. Each panel can be detached from
the main application panel by dragging it outside of the application, with the exception of the
last remaining panel. The other panels then automatically resize to fill the vacant display area.
A detached panel can be returned to the main application panel by dragging it in the
application. During the drag operation, a blue overlay panel shows the location where the
panel will be docked.
Figure 37: VEMP Cockpit
VEMP allows you to perform the following tasks:

● Visualize a source structure in the Source Panel using DBOM and maintain the EBOM in the
Working Panel.
● Edit an EBOM by adding it back to the Working Panel and restructuring it.
● Save the completed engineering structure in the Target Panel, which also saves it to SAP
S/4HANA PEO where the EBOM is updated accordingly.
● Release the EBOM.

Lesson: Creating MBOMs based on EBOM using Visual Enterprise Manufacturing Planner (VEMP)
● Visualize an engineering structure in the Source Panel and maintain the MBOM (and
routing) in the Working Panel.
● Create, edit, or remove a routing from an MBOM.
● Allocate or deallocate components from the routing operations (component allocation).
● Edit an MBOM by adding it back to the Working Panel and restructuring it.
● Save the completed manufacturing structure in the Target Panel which also saves it to SAP
S/4HANA PEO where the MBOM and routing are updated accordingly.
● Release the MBOM.
Note:
SAP 3D Visual Enterprise Structure Manager supports only VDS and RH file
formats generated from SAP 3D Visual Enterprise Generator.
Before you can work with VEMP in SAP S/4HANA PEO, you must install (locally) the recent
versions of:
● Visual Enterprise Viewer
● Visual Enterprise Structure Manager
● SAP Business Client 6.5 or 7.0
You must also complete the following tasks:

● Configure the SAP Content Server.
● Ensure that the BOM usage assigned for the planning scenario 05 is the one relevant for
versioned production in Customizing (SPRO) under Logistics - General → Product Lifecycle
Management (PLM) → Visual Enterprise Planner → Visual Manufacturing
Planner → Configure Planning Scenario.


Unit 2
Exercise 5
Create MBOMs with the Visual Enterprise
Simulation: Create MBOMs with the Visual Enterprise Manufacturing Planner

For more information on Create MBOMs with the Visual Enterprise
Manufacturing Planner, please view the simulation in the lesson Creating MBOMs
based on EBOM using Visual Enterprise Manufacturing Planner (VEMP) in your
online course.
Business Example
S/4HANA PEO. Eric has been given the task to perform the EBOM to MBOM handover.
Starting from the planning scope which he prepared in a previous step, he launches the Visual
Enterprise Manufacturing Planner (VEMP) to create the MBOM based on a 3D visual
representation of the source EBOM. In the same step he can also release the MBOM in VEMP
or do it later in the Maintain Bill of Material or Manage Shop Floor Routings apps.
Note:
You must perform this exercise in the SAP Business Client.
Note:
1. Perform an EBOM to MBOM handover in VEMP for material HULL-##.

Unit 2
Solution 5
Create MBOMs with the Visual Enterprise
Simulation: Create MBOMs with the Visual Enterprise Manufacturing Planner

For more information on Create MBOMs with the Visual Enterprise
Manufacturing Planner, please view the simulation in the lesson Creating MBOMs
based on EBOM using Visual Enterprise Manufacturing Planner (VEMP) in your
online course.
Business Example
S/4HANA PEO. Eric has been given the task to perform the EBOM to MBOM handover.
Starting from the planning scope which he prepared in a previous step, he launches the Visual
Enterprise Manufacturing Planner (VEMP) to create the MBOM based on a 3D visual
representation of the source EBOM. In the same step he can also release the MBOM in VEMP
or do it later in the Maintain Bill of Material or Manage Shop Floor Routings apps.
Note:
You must perform this exercise in the SAP Business Client.
Note:
1. Perform an EBOM to MBOM handover in VEMP for material HULL-##.

a) Open the SAP Fiori launchpad in the SAP Business Client.
b) Navigate to the Manage Engineering Changes app in the Change Record group.
c) Find the change record you created in the previous exercise for the material HULL-##
and navigate to the change record details.
d) In the Planning Scopes section, select the radio button next to the planning scope that
you created in the previous exercise.
e) Choose Launch VEMP to open the Visual Enterprise Manufacturing Planner where you
perform the EBOM to MBOM handover.

Lesson: Creating MBOMs based on EBOM using Visual Enterprise Manufacturing Planner (VEMP)
Note:
You can launch the VEMP only from SAP Business Client or from SAP GUI
using transaction VMP_MAINTAIN. The VEMP cannot be started within a
browser.
Note:
In the Source Panel, the sub-assemblies Base Hull (BASE_HULL-##) and
Spoiler (SPOILER-##) are locked because they are not yet included in the
change record.
f) In the Source Panel, select the sub-assembly Base Hull (BASE_HULL-##) and from the
context menu, select Extend EBOM to Change Record.
g) Repeat sub-step f for sub-assembly Spoiler (SPOILER-##).
h) Select the main node Hull (HULL-##) and choose the Plan as Designed button from the
toolbar of the Source Panel to copy the complete BOM structure to the Target Panel.
i) In the Target Panel, select the Hull (HULL-##) and add it to the Working Panel using
drag and drop or by using the corresponding button in the toolbar.
j) In the Working Panel, expand the Floor Panel and choose the first Floor Panel.
k) Choose the Manage Reference Designator button, select the Add/Edit Reference
Designator option, and enter the reference location, for example, left.
l) Choose the second Floor Panel and enter the reference location, for example, right.
m) Repeat sub-steps j, k, and l for the component Railing.
n) Move the Hull back to the Target Panel by choosing Move to Target Panel.
o) In the Target Panel, select the BOMs HULL-##, BASE_HULL-## and SPOILER-## and
choose the Mark for release button.
p) Choose the Save and Exit option from the main toolbar and check the message box
that appears.
q) Choose Continue.
The system navigates back to the Change Record app.
r) Refresh the app to see the newly created MBOM in the change record.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 2
Learning Assessment
1. What is the purpose of Engineering Snapshots?

Choose the correct answers.
X A Hand over complex major assembly from PLM to PEO
X B Display specific revisions
X C Collect PMI and Engineering BOMs belonging to the same scope into one package
2. In what status are PEO BOMs and Routings editable?

X A Initial
X B In Process
X C Released
3. Put the steps to create an MBOM based on a Snapshot in the Prepare MBOM Creation app
in the correct order.
Arrange these steps into the correct sequence.
0 Select Change Record
0 Enter EBOM and Production Details
0 Select Engineering Snapshot

4. Which of the following statements about the planning scope, used in the context of the
Visual Enterprise Manufacturing Planner (VEMP), are correct?
X A It is a 3D-oriented application for assembly planning
X B You can assign operators to several planning scopes
X C You can control the source structure(s) for handover process (DBOM-EBOM-
MBOM)
X D One planning scope can have multiple scenarios
X E You can divide complex assemblies into units and distribute to different teams
5. Match the three main panels to the correct definition.

Panel Definition
Source Panel This panel contains the cur-
rently selected material struc-
Working Panel
ture. From here, you can work
Target Panel on a single level MBOM, asso-
ciate a routing to the manufac-
turing structure, allocate com-
ponents to the routing opera-
tions and commit your
changes to the Target Panel.
Structure editing is allowed
only in this panel.
This panel contains the source
bill of materials and geometry
contained within the loaded
file. From here, you can make
your selections for planning
and transferring the compo-
nents either to the Working
Panel or directly to the Target
Panel if no changes are to be
made to the structure.
This panel contains the geom-
etry that has been planned.
From here, you can locate any
unplanned instances of parts
and, if required, move parts
back to the Working Panel for
editing.

6. Which PEO features can help you find the different manufacturing-related objects that
may be affected by a change to an existing object, such as an engineering BOM,
manufacturing BOM, or shop floor routing?
X A Production Order Management
X B Work Assignment and Work Queues
X C Change Record and Change Impact Analysis


UNIT 3 Setup of Shop Floor Routing
Lesson 1
Creating a Simple Shop Floor Routing and Assigning it a Manufacturing BOM 72
Exercise 6: Create a Simple Shop Floor Routing and Assign it a Manufacturing MBOM 81
Lesson 2
Assigning Components, PRTs, and Documents to Operation Activities 88
Exercise 7: Assign Components, PRTs, and Documents to Operation Activities 95
Lesson 3
Defining Simple Work Instructions for Operation Activities 99
Exercise 8: Define Simple Work Instructions for Operation Activities 103
Lesson 4
Releasing Shop Floor Routing and Creating a Production Version 107
Exercise 9: Release Shop Floor Routing and Create a Production Version 109
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Create a simple shop floor routing and assign it a manufacturing BOM

● Assign manufacturing BOM components to operation activities
● Define simple work instructions for operation activities
● Use the error log to solve inconsistencies or errors
● Release the shop floor routing and create a production version

Unit 3
Lesson 1
Creating a Simple Shop Floor Routing and
Assigning it a Manufacturing BOM
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to create a new shop floor routing along with its basic structure in
SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for Production Engineering and Operations (PEO) product. You
also learn about the purpose of grouping operation activities into any-order and simultaneous
types of groups, and the flexibility that this gives to production operators when running
production on the shop floor. Finally, you learn how to assign manufacturing BOM to the
newly created shop floor routing.
Business Example
complex products. The Company would like to start modelling their production process in
SAP S/4HANA PEO. John is tasked with creating a basic routing structure and assigning
components from manufacturing BOM to its operation activities.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Shop Floor Routings in SAP S/4HANA PEO

In manufacturing, a routing typically describes in detail how the product will be produced. In
SAP S/4HANA PEO, shop floor routings are version-controlled. Version-controlled means
that routings are not dependent on time, but on the version and its status.
Shop Floor Routing Version Statuses

● In Process:
You can make any changes to a routing version is this status.
● Released:
No changes are allowed. The only way to modify such a routing is to create a new version.
A routing version determines the sequence of individual operations that are necessary to
produce a product. It also contains information on where the work is performed, component
requirements, and the work center’s resources that will be consumed with all the necessary
technical specifications such as the standard times, capacity requirements, and work
instructions.
Shop floor routing operations in SAP S/4HANA PEO consist of operation activities that
describe the production process in more detail.

Lesson: Creating a Simple Shop Floor Routing and Assigning it a Manufacturing BOM
Note:
Each operation must have at least one operation activity.
Shop Floor Routing Workspaces

The shop floor routing in SAP S/4HANA PEO is divided into the following workspaces:
● Entry Screen Workspace:
This is the entry screen of the Manage Shop Floor Routings application. By specifying the
appropriate filters, you can search for the routing that you are interested in. You can save
your filter settings using variants.
Figure 39: Manage Shop Floor Routings
● Structure Workspace:
The Structure Workspace displays the structure of the routing version. In the first row of
the table, you can see the routing group, group counter, and version information, as well as
the version description. You can expand the operations to view the groups and operation
activities. In the table, the icons show you what has been assigned to the operations and
operation activities such as components, work instructions, or PRTs.
In this workspace, you focus on the maintenance of the routing structure, that is, you
maintain the required operations, operation activities, and their groups. In the Structure
Workspace, there is an option to use Favorites. Favorites represent a library of pre-defined
operations, groups, or operation activities. You can copy and paste already existing
objects from favorites into various routings that you maintain.

Unit 3: Setup of Shop Floor Routing
Figure 40: Structure Workspace
● Details Workspace:
The content of the Details Workspace changes depending on which row you have selected
in the routing structure. When in Change mode, you can create and change the
information. When the Details Workspace is open, you can no longer make any changes to
the structure of the routing. Here, you can only use the structure to navigate your way
through the Details Workspace. When you click the routing header, you see the routing
header details. If you click an operation or operation activity, you see all the information for
the selected object subdivided into various tabs.
Figure 41: Details Workspace
● Component Assignment Workspace:

On the left-hand side of this screen, the system displays all the components of the
manufacturing BOM, and you can see the routing structure on the right-hand side of the
screen. In this workspace, you can assign the components or their instances to the
operation activities. Indicators in the Status column show the assignment status such as
Assigned, Partially Assigned, and so on.

Figure 42: Component Assignment Workspace
Shop Floor Routing Structuring Objects

● Operations:
Operations are one of the central objects in routings. The system uses operation data to
determine dates, capacity requirements, and costs for a production process. Therefore,
you have to assign a control key to the operation when creating it. Also, operations contain
the information about the work center assignment. Work centers are assigned to
operations and not to individual operation activities.
Figure 43: Shop Floor Routing Structuring Objects - Operations
● Operation Activities:
They are used to model the production process in more detail. As well as component
assignment, you can also assign objects such as PRTs, inspection characteristics,
qualifications, buyoffs, or work instructions to the operation activity. You can create
operation activities for the segments setup, produce, and teardown. Status and action
schemas are assigned to operation activities that define the statuses and possible
transitions that are allowed for the operation activity.
● Grouping Operation Activities:

Shopfloor routing in SAP S/4HANA PEO offers a possibility to place operation activities
into two types of groups:
- Any-Order
- Simultaneous
Such grouping provides a flexibility to production operators when they select the work to
start on the shop floor.
Any-Order Groups
You can use any-order groups to define a set of operation activities that can be started in
any sequence. Once started though, the selected operation activity shall be completed
before selecting the next operation activity to start. Any-order group allows the processing
of one operation activity at a time. All the operation activities in the any-order group must
be completed before you can commence processing the next operation activity. You can
create any-order groups in the segments setup, produce, and teardown.
For example: A production operator will perform two types of tests – Visual Test and
Functional Test. For the production engineer, it is not important in which sequence those
tests will be performed – the only requirement is that both are completed before moving to
the next operation. This is when any-order group of operation activities – Visual Test and
Functional Test – can be created in the shop floor routing.
In addition, within any-order group, you have an option to define dependencies – link an
operation activity to the previous one.
Simultaneous Groups
You can use simultaneous groups to define a set of operation activities that can be started
and executed in parallel for one serialized product. This is the case when instead of the
product moving from one production step to another, the production operators move
around the product, performing various operation activities. Such types of groups are
typical to complex assembly scenarios. All the operation activities in the simultaneous
group must be completed before you can commence processing the next operation
activity. You can create simultaneous groups in the segments setup, produce, and
teardown.
For example: There are several production operators working simultaneously on the same
serialized product (in this case, an airplane engine). One operator will fix the pipes on one
side of an engine, while another one tightens the bolts on the other side. This is when
simultaneous group of operation activities – Fixing Pipes and Tightening Bolts – can be
created in the shop floor routing. Then, when starting one operation activity on the
serialized product, it is still available in the queue for the other operation activity to be
started.

Caution:
The following restrictions exist for simultaneous groups.
- Routings for serialized materials:
The status and action schemas assigned to the operation activities in a
simultaneous group must not contain the action Scrap as this could cause
discrepancies in the confirmation of work done.
- Routings for non-serialized materials:
You cannot create simultaneous groups for routings for non-serialized
materials. This is because within a simultaneous group, you cannot keep
track of the individual quantities as they cannot be uniquely identified.
Flexible Execution of Production Operations

In addition to the any order and simultaneous group, a routing can be set up to allow even
more flexibility during production execution by eliminating dependencies between operations.
This means that the sequence of operations defined in the shop floor routing is used for
planning and scheduling purposes only but consistency checks on operation sequence are
not carried out during execution.
In complex assembly manufacturing, it is important that work is performed in the most
optimal and efficient way. Sometimes, this requires elimination of dependencies between
operations, especially since a strict sequence makes confirmation inflexible and blocks people
from moving forward in the process. This applies not only to serialized production but also to
non-serialized production - in which subassemblies (such as bolts, turbine housing, and so
on) often need to be produced without any quantity tracking during the production process.
To enable this flexible mode of processing, production engineers can enable Flexible
Processing in the header data when creating the shop floor routing. If required, they can also
define precedence relationships between operation activities of different operations. It is
important to note that relationships between operation activities within the same operation
are always checked, even if Flexible Processing is enabled.
Figure 44: Flexible Execution of Production Operations
Routing Creation Capabilities

To speed up and simplify the creation of new routing versions, you can use the following
options:
● Favorites
● Copy to New Routing:

You can create a new routing by copying an existing one.
Figure 45: Copy to New Routing
● Copy Operations and Operation Activities:

You can select a complete operation or one of its operation activities and copy it to a new
routing or routing version or versions. When pasting such a copy into a different routing or
version, the system will ask whether or not to also copy all the operation activity
assignments. Simply clear the checkbox next to an object that you do not want to be
copied.
Figure 46: Copy Operations and Operation Activities
Figure 47: Copy Operations and Operation Activities 2

Shop Floor Routing Version Profile

The version profile is maintained in Customizing (SPRO) under Production → Manufacturing
for Production Engineering and Operations → Production Engineering → Shop Floor Routing
→ Define Version Profile and contains various default values that are preset when you create
the new routing.
Figure 48: Shop Floor Routing Version Profile
The values may include, for example:

● Successive:
Specifies that you can only create new versions using the version of the routing that still
has the status Last Released. This means that only the last version of the routing to be
released can be copied and used in a new version. You cannot choose any released version
of the routing to copy to a new version.
● Numeric:
Specifies that you can only use numeric values to name your versions.
● Upgrade:
Instructs the system to search for a new MBOM version when you create a new routing
version. If a new MBOM version exists, it is automatically updated in the new routing
version.
● Single:
If selected, specifies that only one MBOM can be assigned to one shop floor routing.
● Usage:
Specifies the area for which the routing is to be valid, such as production or engineering/
design.
● Status:
Specifies the overall status to be used for the routing such as created (1) or released
(general) (4).
Note:
These settings are all default settings that you can change as necessary when
creating a new routing, except for the upgrade setting. If the upgrade checkbox is
selected in the profile, the system always checks to see whether a new version for
the MBOM exists and automatically uses the new version.

Version-Controlled Manufacturing BOM

There is a new type of MBOM specially developed for SAP S/4HANA PEO, where every MBOM
version has its own release status. A released MBOM version is a consistent model of a
product's components that can be used in production execution and that cannot be changed.
If you want to change the MBOM, you can create a new MBOM version. You can make
changes to a new MBOM version until it is released. However, it cannot be used in production
execution while still in the status In Process. This guarantees consistent MBOMs in production
execution.

Unit 3
Exercise 6
Create a Simple Shop Floor Routing and
Assign it a Manufacturing MBOM
Simulation: Create a Simple Shop Floor Routing and Assign it a Manufacturing

MBOM
For more information on Create a Simple Shop Floor Routing and Assign it a
Manufacturing MBOM, please view the simulation in the lesson Creating a Simple
Shop Floor Routing and Assigning it a Manufacturing BOM in your online course.
Business Example
complex products. The Company would like to start modeling their production process in SAP
S/4HANA PEO. John is tasked with creating a basic routing structure and assigning
Note:
1. Using the table below, create a new shop floor routing with two operations, Assembly
(0010) and Inspection (0020):
Routing Values
Routing Description Hull ##
Description HULL-##
Flexible Processing Select

Plant 1020
UoM (Lot Size) EA
Material MBOM HULL-##
Operation 0010 Values
Operation 0010
Description Assembly

Control Key PP01
Operation Activity OA10
Description Prepare Workplace
Description Assemble Components
Operation 0020
Description Inspection
Operation 0020
Control Key PP01
Description Visual Test
Description Functional Test
Operation 0020
2. Create a simultaneous group SMGR (Parallel Tests) within the operation Inspection
(0020) and add Functional Test and Visual Test operation activities to it.
3. Switch to the Details Workspace and assign a work center to the operations.

Unit 3
Solution 6
Create a Simple Shop Floor Routing and
Assign it a Manufacturing MBOM
Simulation: Create a Simple Shop Floor Routing and Assign it a Manufacturing

MBOM
For more information on Create a Simple Shop Floor Routing and Assign it a
Manufacturing MBOM, please view the simulation in the lesson Creating a Simple
Shop Floor Routing and Assigning it a Manufacturing BOM in your online course.
Business Example
complex products. The Company would like to start modeling their production process in SAP
S/4HANA PEO. John is tasked with creating a basic routing structure and assigning
Note:
1. Using the table below, create a new shop floor routing with two operations, Assembly
(0010) and Inspection (0020):
Routing Values
Routing Description Hull ##
Description HULL-##
Flexible Processing Select

Plant 1020
UoM (Lot Size) EA
Material MBOM HULL-##
Operation 0010
Description Assembly

Control Key PP01
Description Prepare Workplace
Description Assemble Components
Operation 0020
Operation 0020
Control Key PP01
Description Visual Test
Description Functional Test
Operation 0020
b) Navigate to the Manage Shop Floor Routings app in the Production Engineering group
on the SAP Fiori launchpad.
c) Above the table on the left, choose the Create button and then select the New Routing
option.
d) Enter the following data on the entry screen:

Routing Description: Free form text (for example, Hull ##)
Description for the routing version: HULL-##
Flexible Processing: Select
Lot Size UoM: EA
Plant: 1020
Material: HULL-##
Bill of Material: Use value help and search for HULL-## MBOM with usage V
Change Record: Select from the previous exercise

e) Choose Execute.
The system creates a new routing.
f) Above the table on the left, choose Add → Operation and enter following data:
Operation: 0010
Description: Assembly
Control Key: PP01
Operation Activity: OA10
Description (activity): Prepare Workspace
g) Choose OK.
A new operation and operation activity is added to the routing structure.
h) Above the table on the left, choose Add → Operation Activity (Sub- Level) and enter
the following data:
Description: Assemble Components
i) Choose OK.
The system adds another operation activity to the routing.
Note:
Move the operation activity OA10 up so that it is the first one in the list and
OA20 is the second one in the list.
j) Above the table on the left, choose Add → Operation and enter the following data:
Operation: 0020
Description: Inspection
Control Key: PP01
Description (activity): Visual Test
k) Choose OK.
The system adds a new operation with one operation activity to the routing.
2. Create a simultaneous group SMGR (Parallel Tests) within the operation Inspection
(0020) and add Functional Test and Visual Test operation activities to it.
a) Above the table on the left, choose Add → Add Group (Sub-Level) and enter the
following data:
Group: SMGR
Description: Parallel Tests
Type: Simultaneous
b) Choose OK.
The system creates a group within the selected operation 0020.

c) Drag and drop the operation activity OA10 (Visual Test) into the group.
d) Select the group and choose Add Operation Activity (Sub-Level) from the context
menu. Enter the following data:
Description (activity): Functional Test
Note:
Make sure you have assigned the correct SAS for serialized products
(SAP_SAS_SFI_OA_WO_SCRAP) to both operation activities in
simultaneous group.
e) Choose OK.
Note:
Move the operation activity OA10 up so that it is the first one in the list and
OA20 is the second one in the list.
f) To save your routing, choose Save.
3. Switch to the Details Workspace and assign a work center to the operations.
a) On the left, select operation 0010 and in the Work Center field on the right, enter
HULL-##.
b) On the left, select operation 0020 and in the Work Center field on the right, enter
HULL-##.
c) Choose Save.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 3
Lesson 2
Assigning Components, PRTs, and Documents
to Operation Activities
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to assign various manufacturing-related objects, such as
components of the assigned manufacturing BOM, production resources and tools (PRTs) and
documents to operation activities. You also learn how to define assembly sequence of
components within an operation activity, which will make production operators adhere to it
during execution.
Business Example
complex products. The Company would like to enrich their production steps with additional
information about components, PRTs, and process specifications. John is tasked with
assigning manufacturing-related objects to operation activities of the shop floor routing in
SAP S/4HANA PEO.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Component Assignment
In SAP S/4HANA PEO, shop floor routing components come from the manufacturing BOM
assigned to the routing header. The ability to assign one or several manufacturing BOMs to
the shop floor routing is controlled via Routing Version Profile in Customizing (SPRO).
Figure 50: Component Assignment
To view, assign, re-assign, or unassign components to or from operation activities in the shop
floor routing, use the Component Assignment Workspace. Use the Assign and Unassign
buttons in the button bar above the components list on the left to perform the desired action.

Lesson: Assigning Components, PRTs, and Documents to Operation Activities
Figure 51: Assign and Unassign in Component Assignment Workspace
Animation: Assign and Unassign in Component Assignment Workspace

For more information on Assign and Unassign in Component Assignment
Workspace, please view the animation in the lesson Assigning Components,
PRTs, and Documents to Operation Activities, in your online course.
The shop floor routing structure on the right allows you to view which components have been
already assigned to which operation activities. For this, choose the Show Components button
above the hierarchy view on the right.
During component assignment to an operation activity, you can:
● Split component quantity across several operation activities (if the quantity is greater than
1)
● Monitor the progress of component assignment using the graphical indicator in the Status
column
● Set backflushed indicator to components
● Change the sequence of components
Using the Layout button above the hierarchy view on the right, you can define the amount and
sequence of columns shown in the Component Assignment Workspace. The customized
layout can be saved for future use.

Figure 53: Change Layout
Finally, you can use the Print button above the hierarchy view on the right to print the entire
hierarchy of the shop floor routing with its assignments.
Figure 54: Print Layout
Component Assembly Sequence

When assigning components to the operation activities, the system automatically saves the
assembly sequence and displays this information in the Assembly Sequence column of the
assigned components table. The system saves the order in which you assign the components
to the activities as the sequence. However, you can also change the sequence manually, if
necessary.
The assembly sequence saved by the system is only relevant to execution if you have also
selected the Assembly Sequence checkbox in the Main Properties section of the General tab
for the operation activity in the Details Workspace. If this checkbox is not selected, the
assembly sequence is not relevant for production and the components can be assembled in
any order.

Figure 55: Component Assembly Sequence
Production Resources and Tools (PRTs)

Production Resource/Tool (PRTs) are moveable operating resources used in production or
plant maintenance. The SAP S/4HANA system differentiates between the following types of
production resources/tools:
● Materials that are accounted for in materials management, for instance in inventory
management, requirements planning and procurement.
● Equipment, for example, measuring instruments or valuable tools, which are serviced.
You can assign PRTs to operation activities of the segment types segment, produce, and
teardown. In the Details Workspace, in the PRTs tab for each operation, you can view all PRTs
that have been assigned to all the operation activities of the operation. In this tab, you can
only view this information and delete the PRTs – you cannot assign new PRTs.
Note:
To be able to assign a PRT to an operation activity, it must be predefined in the
system in the corresponding transaction.
To assign a new material or equipment, change, delete, or copy the existing one, use the PRTs
tab of the operation activity.
Figure 56: PRTs Tab
Documents
The production engineer can now assign various files to an operation activity in the shop floor
routing to pass on documents (such as specifications, drawings, or programs) that may be
important or necessary for viewing to production operators. A list of these linked documents
is displayed on the right-hand side in the Instructions section of production operator's
dashboard. The production operators can then open and view these documents when
working at the operation activity.

Note:
To be able to assign a Document to an operation activity, it must be predefined
and saved in the document management system. Use transaction CV01N to create
and release document records. Documents that are defined centrally can be used
across different routings and orders.
You can assign documents to operation activities of the segment types segment, produce,
and teardown. In the Details Workspace, in the Documents tab for each operation, you can
view all the documents that have been assigned to all the operation activities of the operation.
In this tab, you can only view this information and delete the documents – you cannot assign
new documents. To assign a new document, change, delete, or copy existing documents, use
the Documents tab of the operation activity.
Figure 57: Documents Tab
Reference Designator
As a production engineer, you know best where a component should be assembled. For this
reason, an indicator or an installation location can already be specified in the shop floor
routing. Reference designators are the best way to mark this in a complex product. The
Reference designators are displayed in the Component Assignment Workspace next to the
BOM item instances and are simply assigned to an operation activity by drag and drop.
Reference designators can be linked in the work instructions, which helps the production
operator to locate each BOM item uniquely in the given 3D model. That ensures a correct
assembly of similar parts.

Figure 58: Reference Designator in Component Assignment Workspace


Unit 3
Exercise 7
Assign Components, PRTs, and Documents to
Simulation: Assign Components, PRTs, and Documents to Operation Activities

For more information on Assign Components, PRTs, and Documents to
Operation Activities, please view the simulation in the lesson Assigning
Components, PRTs, and Documents to Operation Activities in your online
course.
Business Example
assigning manufacturing-related object to operation activities of the shop floor routing in SAP
S/4HANA PEO.
Note:
1. Assign components from HULL-## to the operation activity Assemble Components

(OA20).
2. Assign any PRT of the equipment type to operation activity Prepare Workplace (10).
3. Assign the S428-SAFETY document to operation activity Assemble Components (20).

Unit 3
Solution 7
Assign Components, PRTs, and Documents to
Simulation: Assign Components, PRTs, and Documents to Operation Activities

For more information on Assign Components, PRTs, and Documents to
Operation Activities, please view the simulation in the lesson Assigning
Components, PRTs, and Documents to Operation Activities in your online
course.
Business Example
assigning manufacturing-related object to operation activities of the shop floor routing in SAP
S/4HANA PEO.
Note:
1. Assign components from HULL-## to the operation activity Assemble Components

(OA20).
a) Open the SAP Fiori launchpad in the SAP Business Client.
b) Navigate to the Manage Shop Floor Routings app in the Production Engineering group
c) In the Search field, enter HULL-##.
d) Select your routing and choose the Change button.
e) Select Component Assignment Workspace.
f) Choose the Show 3D Image button from the Component tab to view the CAD model of
Hull.
Note:
This option is only available in transaction MSFR4.
g) Expand the FLOOR-00 and RAILING-00 components to view the reference designator.

h) Select all components and in the structure view, select operation activity OA20
Assemble Components from operation 0010.
Note:
Do not include sub-components of Floor and Railing in the selection.
i) Choose the Assign button from the component view.

The status of the BOM items is updated (green) and in the structure hierarchy, an icon
for component assignment is added.
j) To save the routing changes, choose Save.
2. Assign any PRT of the equipment type to operation activity Prepare Workplace (10).
a) Switch to the Details Workspace.
b) On the left, select the Prepare Workplace operation activity.
c) On the right, choose the PRTs tab.
d) Add any available PRT of the type Equipment to the operation activity.
e) Choose Save.
3. Assign the S428-SAFETY document to operation activity Assemble Components (20).

a) On the left, select the Assemble Components operation activity.
b) On the right, choose the Documents tab.
c) Add the S428-SAFETY document to the operation activity.

The document information is as follows:
Document: S4280-SAFETY
Type: DOC
Part: 000
Version: 01
d) Choose Save.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 3
Lesson 3
Defining Simple Work Instructions for
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to create simple work instructions for operation activities in SAP
S/4HANA PEO shop floor routing. You also learn how to embed links, images, and references
to components into work instructions.
Business Example
complex products. The Company would like to display work instructions to their production
operators that include references to components, links, and images. John is tasked with
creating such work instructions for operation activities in SAP S/4HANA PEO shop floor
routing.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Work Instructions in SAP S/4HANA PEO Shop Floor Routing

Work instructions are an important means to guide production operators during execution of
complex assembly steps. They contain relevant information on how to accomplish a specific
operation activity successfully and prompt the operator to confirm each step or enter
required quality data.
To maintain work instructions in SAP S/4HANA PEO shop floor routing, use the Work
Instructions tab in the Details Workspace of Manage Shop Floor Routing application.
Figure 60: Work Instructions Tab

Animation: Work Instructions Tab

For more information on Work Instructions Tab , please view the animation in the
lesson Defining Simple Work Instructions for Operation Activities, in your online
course.
Work instructions can be authored in different languages. During execution, the work
instructions are shown in the logon language of the production operator. Detailed work
instructions can be defined for operation activities in all segments; setup, produce, and
teardown.
Work Instructions authoring workspace allows you to:
● Perform different types of text formatting (fonts, sizes, background, and font colors)
● Insert links
● Upload images
● Include bulleted and numbered lists
● Copy and paste
● Undo actions
● Include references to components and PRTs
Figure 62: Work Instructions
Reference Designator in Work Instruction

The production engineer can even select components by their reference designators from the
components list and add them as a reference (hyperlink) into the work instruction. When the
operator selects that link during execution, the corresponding component is highlighted in the
attached 3D model.

Lesson: Defining Simple Work Instructions for Operation Activities
Figure 63: Reference Designator in Work Instructions


Unit 3
Exercise 8
Define Simple Work Instructions for Operation
Activities
Simulation: Define Simple Work Instructions for Operation Activities

For more information on Define Simple Work Instructions for Operation
Activities, please view the simulation in the lesson Defining Simple Work
Instructions for Operation Activities in your online course.
Business Example
routing.
Note:
1. Create a simple work instruction for the operation activity Assemble Components (20)
that includes component references, formatted text, links, and images.
2. Add component references to your work instruction.
3. Add pictures to your work instruction and format text.
Note:
Upload any image available on the training machine. If there is no image
available, you can Google any manufacturing-related image and save it to the
Pictures directory on the training machine.

Unit 3
Solution 8
Define Simple Work Instructions for Operation
Activities
Simulation: Define Simple Work Instructions for Operation Activities

For more information on Define Simple Work Instructions for Operation
Activities, please view the simulation in the lesson Defining Simple Work
Business Example
routing.
Note:
1. Create a simple work instruction for the operation activity Assemble Components (20)
that includes component references, formatted text, links, and images.
b) Navigate to the Manage Shop Floor Routings app under the Production Engineering
e) Select Details Workspace.
f) On the left, select the Assemble Components (OA20) operation activity.
g) Go to the Work instructions tab and choose the Create button.
2. Add component references to your work instruction.

a) Enter any free form text (for example, 1. Install Floor Panel).
b) Expand the component list and select an instance (for example, Floor Panel right).

Lesson: Defining Simple Work Instructions for Operation Activities
c) Choose Add Reference from the menu and select Reference Designator/Instance from
the pop-up window.
d) Enter another line (for example, 2. Install Floor Panel) and add the reference
to the second component (for example, Floor Panel left).
3. Add pictures to your work instruction and format text.
Note:
Upload any image available on the training machine. If there is no image
available, you can Google any manufacturing-related image and save it to the
Pictures directory on the training machine.
a) Choose Done.
b) To save the routing changes, choose Save.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 3
Lesson 4
Releasing Shop Floor Routing and Creating a
Production Version
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to check the consistency of the newly created shop floor routing
and use the message log to solve any issues. You also learn how to release the routing and
create a production version.
Business Example
complex products. The Company would like to start using new shop floor routing defined in
SAP S/4HANA PEO. However, the Company would like to make sure that the routing is
consistent and released with production version to the shop floor. John is tasked with
checking shop floor routing consistency and releasing it with new production version.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Extended Error Log

The extended error log is displayed when releasing the routing or when checking consistency.
It is designed to provide you with targeted support when preparing to release. All errors and
inconsistencies displayed in the error log must be solved before you can release the routing.
The checks for releasing the routing are stricter than the checks performed when just saving
the routing. The error log is displayed in the form of a to do list. You can click the errors and
the system navigates to the error source where you can fix the problem. Once you have
corrected all the errors, the routing can be released.

Figure 65: Extended Error Log
Production Version
A production version combines a manufacturing MBOM version with a shop floor routing
version and therefore determines which MBOM version is used together with which shop floor
routing version to produce a material. When releasing the routing version, if the system does
not find a production version for the MBOM and shop floor routing, the system creates a
production version in which it records the versions of the MBOM and the routing.
Figure 66: Maintain Production Version
If the system finds a production version for the MBOM and the shop floor routing in which
either the version of the MBOM or the routing version is not recorded, then it changes the
production version and inserts a new row in the version details table in the Manage Production
Versions app containing the new combination of versions. Use this application to maintain
production versions and their details.

Unit 3
Exercise 9
Release Shop Floor Routing and Create a
Production Version
Simulation: Release Shop Floor Routing and Create a Production Version

For more information on Release Shop Floor Routing and Create a Production
Version, please view the simulation in the lesson Releasing Shop Floor Routing
and Creating a Production Version in your online course.
Business Example
Note:
1. Release the HULL-## shop floor routing and create a production version PV01.

Unit 3
Solution 9
Release Shop Floor Routing and Create a
Production Version
Simulation: Release Shop Floor Routing and Create a Production Version

For more information on Release Shop Floor Routing and Create a Production
Version, please view the simulation in the lesson Releasing Shop Floor Routing
and Creating a Production Version in your online course.
Business Example
Note:
1. Release the HULL-## shop floor routing and create a production version PV01.
b) Navigate to the Manage Shop Floor Routings app under the Production Engineering
e) If you have made changes, save your routing.
f) Choose the Save and Release button.

The system performs a consistency check and, if there are no errors, releases the
routing.
g) In the Production Version field, enter PV01.
h) Enter any text in the Description field for the production version.
i) Choose OK.
The system creates a production version.

Lesson: Releasing Shop Floor Routing and Creating a Production Version
LESSON SUMMARY


Unit 3
Learning Assessment
1. In which routing status are changes not allowed?

X A Initial
X B In Process
X C Released
2. How do you make a routing editable if a change is required?

X A Create a new BOM
X B Create a new version
X C Create a new routing
3. In which Workspace can you assign components, PRTs, or documents?

X A Structure Workspace
X B Details Workspace
X C Component Assignment Workspace
4. The Shop Floor Routing app navigates you to Create Production Version after the system
performs the consistency check (released shop floor routing)?
X True
X False

5. In which Workspace can you maintain/include work instructions in the Shop Floor Routing
app?
X A Component Assignment Workspace
X B Structure Workspace
X C Details Workspace
6. Which objects can be included in work instructions?

X A Reference designators
X B Videos
X C Images
7. What function is called when you try to release a routing, or when you perform a
consistency check in case of inconsistencies?
X A As-Built Report
X B Product Genealogy
X C Extended Error Log

UNIT 4 The Basic Production Process
Lesson 1
Releasing and Managing Shop Floor Orders in SAP S/4HANA PEO 117
Exercise 10: Release and Manage Shop Floor Orders in SAP S/4HANA PEO 125
Lesson 2
Executing Serialized Production Process and Monitoring Production Results 129
Exercise 11: Execute Serialized Production Process and Monitor Production Results 147
Lesson 3
Disassembling Components in Various Scenarios 155
Exercise 12: Disassemble Components Triggered by Engineering Change 169
Lesson 4
Recording Defects 176
Exercise 13: Record a Defect for Serialized Material and View Defect Information in 189
Monitoring Apps
Lesson 5
Executing Non-Serialized Production Process and Monitoring Production Results 195
Exercise 14: Execute Non-Serialized Production Process and Monitor Production 201
Results
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Explain the difference between classical production order and a new shop floor order in
SAP S/4HANA PEO
● Create and release new shop floor orders
● Manage shop floor orders using SAP Fiori apps
● Assign work to individual production operators
● Explain how production operators can select the work to start in SAP S/4HANA PEO
● View and analyze production results using SAP S/4HANA PEO out-of-the-box reports

Unit 4: The Basic Production Process
● Execute serialized production process by collecting component data, confirming individual

operation activities, and viewing order confirmation
● Describe how to disassemble components in various scenarios
● Disassemble components triggered by engineering change
● Record a defect in SAP S/4HANA PEO
● Record a defect for serialized material and view defect information in monitoring apps
● Take non-serialized materials through the production process

Unit 4
Lesson 1
Releasing and Managing Shop Floor Orders in
SAP S/4HANA PEO
LESSON OBJECTIVES
SAP S/4HANA PEO
Shop Floor Orders in SAP S/4HANA PEO

SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for production engineering and operations (PEO) works with
shop floor orders. A shop floor order is assigned to a production version which is built from a
version-controlled MBOM and version-controlled shop-floor routing (the data is copied into
the order).
A shop floor routing is created in the new transaction MSFR4 in SAP S/4HANA, or with the
Manage Shop Floor Routing app. It uses operations just like in classical PP routings, but it
adds another level of detail for better control and guidance of the operator during production
execution. Steps on this level are called operation activities. It is similar in structure to the
process industry, where this level is described by so-called phases.
While shop floor orders are executed at the operation activity level, the confirmation is still
recorded at the operation level.
Figure 68: Shop Floor Orders
Further differences between the classic production order and the shop floor order are
described in the following table.

Functionality Classic Production Order PEO Shop Floor Order

Define due date, priority, and X X
quantities
Re-schedule the order (be- X X
fore and after production
start)
Explode updated BOM and X X
Routing on Read Master Data
Applicable to orders in Creat- Applicable to orders in the
ed and Released statuses. Created status only. Read
Master Data after release,
Further changes to orders in
but before start as well as
work are possible via the Or-
further changes to orders in
der Change Management
work are available in
functionality.
S/4HANA PEO 1909 OP re-
lease.
Editing of BOM and Routing X Limited edit allowed for BOM

data is allowed in the order it- and Routing. Adding of new
self components and operations
is not allowed. It is still possi-
ble to delete components or
change their quantity, delete
operations, as well as change
conversion factor between
header quantity and opera-
tion quantity.
Handover to MES N/A X
New status exists HAOP
Release X X
Generation of Serial Number N/A X
on Order Release
Controlled via serial number
profile assigned to a material.
Production data collection X X

(component data, quality da-
At order level At serial number or order lev-
ta)
el
Confirmation X X
Order/Operation level Serial number at operation
activity level (serialized)
Order quantity at operation
activity level (non-serialized)
Prerequisites for Shop Floor Orders

The prerequisites for shop floor orders are as follows:

Lesson: Releasing and Managing Shop Floor Orders in SAP S/4HANA PEO
● For the plant of each operation, the feature EPO (Extended Production Operations) is
active.
● Production version with version-controlled routing and MBOM is used during creation of
production order.
Creation and Release of Shop Floor Orders in SAP S/4HANA PEO

To create and release shop floor orders in SAP S/4HANA PEO, use either transactions CO01/
CO02 in the SAP Easy Access menu or the Create Production Order and Change Production
Order visually harmonized UIs in the SAP Fiori launchpad.
During the creation of a new shop floor order, you must specify the material, plant, and order
type values as usual, and then select a production version if more than one is valid for the
selected period of time.
Figure 69: Select Production Version
The production version plays an important role in SAP S/4HANA PEO, as it not only defines
that MBOM and routing are version controlled, but also which exact version of MBOM and
routing will be picked for the production order. The production version name can be found in
the Master Data view of the Create Production Order screen.
Figure 70: Production Version (1/2)

The details of the production version, especially the current valid version of the routing and
MBOM, can be found in the Manage Production Versions app. You can change the production
version details as long as the production version is not released.
Figure 71: Production Version (2/2)
After you have created, scheduled, and selected a production version for the order, an
additional value appears in the Status field of the order header – MPE. The MPE status
designates that this order is a shop floor order.
Figure 72: MPE Status
In order to view the shop floor order later in the Manage Production Orders app, it is required
to define the area of responsibility (AOR).
AOR can be set as either production supervisor or work center. If you decide that your AOR is
a production supervisor, then all orders must have the Production Supervisor value to be
filled.
This can be done manually per each production order in the Assignments view of the Create/
Change Production Orders app or per material in the Work Scheduling view of the MM01/MM02
transactions launched via the SAP Easy Access screen.
Figure 73: Production Supervisor (1/2)

Figure 74: Production Supervisor (2/2)
If you decide that your AOR is a work center, then all order operations must have a work
center assigned to be viewed and managed in the Manage Production Operations app.
Finally, to release a shop floor order, you can use the following options:
● Release the order in the standard CO01/CO02 transaction
● Release the order in the Manage Production Orders app
Management of Production Orders

The Manage Production Orders app is a place where you (as production supervisor) can view
and check all the production orders within your area of responsibility. Here, you have access
to detailed information that shows you production progress and you can receive notifications
about issues such as missing components, production holds, or inspection characteristics
that are out of range. Issues are determined dynamically, supporting early detection.
Therefore, you have the chance to solve any problems before execution has started.
Note:
On the initial launch of the Manage Production Orders app, the system prompts
you to specify an area of responsibility for the app. Later, this value can be
changed using the App Settings option accessible via the user settings of the SAP
Fiori launchpad.
Figure 75: User Settings

Figure 76: Area of Responsibility
Multiple values are possible for each option. You can have more than one production
supervisor as well as more than one work center assigned as your area of responsibility. Use
the plus icon to add more values.
Figure 77: Supervisor
To facilitate the search for an order, narrow down the list of values or save your preferred
search criteria for later, use the filter bar, and save as variant options in the header of the
Manage Production Orders app.
Figure 78: Filter and Save As
If a shop floor order is in the status Created, the table buttons Release, Hold, and Read Master
Data are available for it.
If a shop floor order is in the status Released, the table buttons Change Dates and Quantities
and Hold become active.

Figure 79: Change Dates and Quantities and Hold
The Change Dates and Quantities function allows you to change order quantity and
reschedule the order within this app without calling transaction CO02.
The Hold function allows you to block a shop floor order from being executed by production
operators. When applying a Hold, the production supervisor can specify a reason code and
note why this Hold is being required. The reasons may vary, for example, missing or unclear
work instructions, missing components, incorrect production steps, and so on. You will learn
how to define reason codes for hold actions further in this course. A Hold can be released only
by authorized individuals. For this, in SAP S/4HANA PEO, a new authorization object has been
introduced, called C_MPE_HOLD (Production Hold).
Note:
Hold functionality is only available for shop floor orders.
The Order Details view also has extensions which are specific to SAP S/4HANA PEO product:
● Serial Numbers view – available only for shop floor orders if the main material is defined for
serialized processing via serial number profile. The chevron icon at the end of the line
provides navigation to the Product Genealogy report for the selected serial number.
Figure 80: Serial Numbers View
● Defects view – available only if the main material has inspection type (03) defined in the
Quality Management view of the material master and lists all defects recorded for an order
or serialized product.
Management of Production Operations

With the Managing Production Operations app, you can monitor the progress of individual
production operations which belong to your area of responsibility. You have an overview of
the current situation with all the information you need to solve any issues. If, for example, a
particular operation is delayed, you can navigate to the details to see at a glance why the
operation is delayed – perhaps there are missing components, the resource may be occupied
by another operation, or the previous operation is still not finished. You have the information
you need to take immediate action to resolve the issue and to keep your production
processes running as smoothly as possible. If necessary, you can also temporarily block

production by placing an order, material, or operation on Hold. You can specify a reason code
and note for the delay. Then, once the issue has been solved, you can release the Hold.
Figure 81: Manage Production Operations
The Operation Details view also has extensions which are specific to SAP S/4HANA PEO:
● Operation Activities view – available only for shop floor orders. The chevron icon at the end
of the line provides navigation to Operation Activity Details, where you can explore what
serial numbers are currently available for the selected operation activity (if any), as well as
what has been specified for the selected operation activity, for example, which
components, inspection characteristics, documents, PRTs, work instructions, and so on,
are assigned.
Figure 82: Operation Activities View

Unit 4
Exercise 10
Release and Manage Shop Floor Orders in SAP
S/4HANA PEO
Simulation: Release and Manage Shop Floor Orders in SAP S/4HANA PEO
For more information on Release and Manage Shop Floor Orders in SAP S/
4HANA PEO, please view the simulation in the lesson Releasing and Managing
Shop Floor Orders in SAP S/4HANA PEO in your online course.
Business Example
John is a consultant with the low-volume A&D company focusing on the final assembly of
complex products. The company wants to understand how shop floor orders are being
created and managed in SAP S/4HANA PEO and how they differ from classic production
orders that the company has been used to. John needs to explain how to create and release
production orders, how to easily differentiate them from classic orders, and what can be
changed for shop floor orders at various stages during production execution.
Note:
1. Create and release a shop floor order for the HULL-## serialized material at plant 1020.
Note down the order number.
2. View and note down the created serial numbers for the order.
3. Put the current shop floor order on hold using the Manage Production Orders app.

Unit 4
Solution 10
Release and Manage Shop Floor Orders in SAP
S/4HANA PEO
Simulation: Release and Manage Shop Floor Orders in SAP S/4HANA PEO
For more information on Release and Manage Shop Floor Orders in SAP S/
4HANA PEO, please view the simulation in the lesson Releasing and Managing
Shop Floor Orders in SAP S/4HANA PEO in your online course.
Business Example
complex products. The company wants to understand how shop floor orders are being
created and managed in SAP S/4HANA PEO and how they differ from classic production
orders that the company has been used to. John needs to explain how to create and release
production orders, how to easily differentiate them from classic orders, and what can be
changed for shop floor orders at various stages during production execution.
Note:
b) Navigate to the Create Production Order app in the Shop Floor Control and
Manufacturing Execution group on the SAP Fiori launchpad.
c) On the initial screen, enter the following data and choose Continue:
● Material: HULL-##
● Order Type: PP01
d) In the Total Qty field, enter 2.
e) In the Scheduling Type dropdown list, select Current date.
f) In the Production Supervisor field in the Assignment view, enter DMO.

g) Make sure that the correct production version has been picked for the order in the
Master Data view.
h) Choose Release.
i) In the dialog box, choose the Release Order button.
j) Choose Save.
Note:
If an error message displays about an error in calculating costs, ignore it
and choose Yes to save the order.
k) Note down or copy the order number.
a) Navigate to the Manage Production Orders app in the Shop Floor Control and
Note:
If the Area of Responsiblity pop-up window displays, select Production
Supervisor, search for DMO in Plant 1020, and select it. Choose OK and
proceed with the next step.
b) In the Order field on the header filter bar, enter the number that you have noted down.
c) Choose Go.
Note:
If the order does not display, make sure that you have defined the Area of
Responsibility (AOR) for the app that is selected for the order. To check
this, go to the Change Production Order app, enter the order number you
have worked with, and check the Production Supervisor field on the
Assignment tab. Then come back to the Manage Production Orders app,
choose User - App Settings in the upper-left corner of the screen, and
specify the same supervisor.
d) Choose the chevron icon at the end of the line to open the order details. Note down the
serial numbers available in the Serial Numbers view.
3. Put the current shop floor order on hold using the Manage Production Orders app.
a) Choose Hold on the upper-right corner of the screen.
b) Choose the Put on Hold button.

The hold message is displayed in the Issues view of the order details screen, and the
Hold icon is activated in the Issues column of the order list.

LESSON SUMMARY
SAP S/4HANA PEO

Unit 4
Lesson 2
Executing Serialized Production Process and
Monitoring Production Results
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Management of Work Assignment

After the planning and release of production orders, the production supervisor assigns shortly
due operation activities to single or multiple operators to ensure that the planned delivery
dates are met. If an assignment is not possible due to overtime, work conditions, skills,
vacation, and/or sick leaves, in the worst case scenario, it might affect the promised
customer delivery dates.
There are two apps available for the production supervisor to manage work assignments. One
app starts with an overview of the operation activities and the other on the production
operators.
Assign Work
The Assign Work app starts from a list of operation activities with an overview of their current
assignment status. From this list, the supervisor can assign or unassign single or multiple
operators to a selected operation activity.

Figure 84: Assign Work
Animation: Assign Work

For more information on Assign Work, please view the animation in the lesson
Executing Serialized Production Process and Monitoring Production Results, in
your online course.
The functionality provided in the Assign Work app allows you to perform the following tasks:
● Assign one or more operators to one or more operation activities
● Choose an execution priority for each operation activity
● Filter by matching work centers and qualifications during an assignment (the system by
default proposes users who have the same work center and qualifications assigned that
are required by an operation activity)
● Display a number of current user assignments and qualifications assigned to a user
● Specify target duration for an operation activity during an assignment
● Add/edit target time at any time
● Unassign users from an operation activity
Note:
To be able to use the Assign Work app, your user in the front-end system must be
assigned the SAP_BR_PRODN_SUPRVSR_DISC_EPO Production Supervisor –
Discrete Manufacturing (EPO) PFCG role.
Caution:
To be able to find, view, and assign operators to operation activities, they must
be defined as manufacturing users in the SAP S/4HANA PEO system.

Lesson: Executing Serialized Production Process and Monitoring Production Results
Figure 86: Assign Operators
Figure 87: Operator
Manage Production Operators

The Manage Production Operators app starts from a list of operators showing their work
status. By selecting an operator, the details are provided and the supervisor can assign or
unassign operation activities based on qualifications, like in the Assign Work app. If an
operator is assigned to more than one operation activity, which is very likely, then the
supervisor can even assign different priorities to each assignment to enforce the order of
execution.

Figure 88: Manage Production Operators
Management of Personal Queues and Selection of the Work to Start

SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for production engineering and operations (PEO) provides the
following SAP Fiori apps for production operators to start work:
● My Work Queue
● Manage Work Center Queue
● Perform Work (Material/Serial Number)
Note:
All the apps listed require that your user in the front-end system is assigned the
SAP_BR_PRODN_OPTR_DISC_EPO Production Operator – Discrete
Manufacturing (EPO) PFCG role.
My Work Queue
This app provides a single place where an individual production operator can find operation
activities assigned to his/her manufacturing user. From this queue, the operator can directly
proceed to execute the selected operation activity.
The app only displays operation activities that have the following statuses:
● Initial
● In Process
● Paused

Figure 89: My Work Queue
The functionality provided in the My Work Queue app allows you to perform the following
tasks:
● View who else is assigned to an operation activity
● Group, sort, and filter the list of assigned operation activities
● Search in the list by entering, for example, an order number
● Change the number of displayed columns by using the Settings button above the table
● Proceed to executing the selected operation activity by choosing Execute
● View operation activity details by using chevron icon at the end of the line
Manage Work Center Queue

With this app, supervisors and operators likewise can view and manage the operations that
are assigned to a specific work center. The app uses the default work center assigned to the
manufacturing user who is using this app. Thus, you only see the operations that are to be
performed on the work center to which you are assigned.
To assign your manufacturing user to a work center, use the Manage User Settings SAP Fiori
app.
Figure 90: Assign Work Centers to User
It is possible to assign a user to multiple work centers in the Manage User Settings app. If this
is the case, in the Manage Work Center Queue app, you will be able to choose a work center.

However, when launching the app, the system will always display operations of the work
center which has been defined as default for this user in Manage User Settings app.
Figure 91: Manage Work Center Queue
The operations are displayed in the following sections, according to their status:
● In Progress
● Not Started
● Finished
With the help of a graphical progress bar, you can view the quantities that are ready, not
ready, or that have been processed per operation. You can also see whether there are any
problems that may prevent you from starting work on a particular operation such as holds,
missing components, or delays. You can use the information available here to decide which
operation you should work on next.
Figure 92: Operations
Animation: Operations
For more information on Operations, please view the animation in the lesson
Executing Serialized Production Process and Monitoring Production Results, in
your online course.

The functionality provided in the Manage Work Center Queue app allows you to perform the
following tasks:
● View a table of operations according to your selection criteria.
● Select which columns are displayed and sort the table entries.
● Open a popover for each order, material, and operation and navigate to related apps.
● View the progress of each production operation.
● View current issues for each operation (for example, a particular operation is on hold or
delayed) and determine the cause of the issue.
● Access a detail screen for each production order operation.
● Navigate to the Perform Operation app.
Figure 94: Operations in Progress
Perform Work (Order/Operation)

This app serves as an entry screen to the main execution apps, Perform Operation and
Perform Operation Activity. The purpose of this app is to specify the values to be worked on –
Order and Operation – which in a typical manufacturing environment can be scanned from
the traveler document or a barcoded label.
Figure 95: Perform Work (Order/Operation)
Perform Work (Material/Serial Number)

This app serves as an entry screen to the main execution apps, Perform Operation and
Perform Operation Activity. The purpose of this app is to specify the values to be worked on –

Material and Serial Number – which in a typical manufacturing environment can be scanned
from the traveler document or a barcoded label.
Execution of Serialized Production Process

All of the SAP Fiori apps listed in the previous section are used to start work eventually lead
the user to the app where an operation activity is actually executed – the Perform Operation
Activity app. In the SAP S/4HANA PEO system, this is the main dashboard for the production
operator.
Note:
All the apps listed above require that your user in the front-end system is assigned
the SAP_BR_PRODN_OPTR_DISC_EPO Production Operator – Discrete
Manufacturing (EPO) PFCG role.
Perform Operation Activity

This app provides detailed information for a serialized material or an operation activity and
allows the production operator to record the execution progress, collect traceability
information about components being consumed into the main material, report results of
quality checks, add attachments, view PRTs and documents attached, as well as confirm
operation activities.
Furthermore, in this app, production operators are checked for having the required
qualification assignment or blocked from further processing of an operation activity if there is
a deviation from the planned process checked by the action type handler framework or an
active hold available for the object to be processed.
Everything that production engineers assign to an operation activity using the Manage Shop
Floor Routings app, such as components, inspection characteristics, work instructions,
buyoffs, qualifications, action type handlers and so on, are shown to the production operator
in the Perform Operation Activity app.
Hint:
For more information about what the action type handler framework is and how it
is defined in SAP S/4HANA PEO, see Unit 16 of this course.
The app is logically split into two parts, as follows:

● Left – where the production operator is supposed to act. This includes collecting
component data, recording values for inspection characteristics, adding attachments.
● Right – where the production operator is supposed to learn how to do the task (for
example, by reading instructions, interacting with 3D model, viewing attached documents
from the production engineer, and so on).

Figure 96: Perform Operation Activity
The production operator can perform various actions for the serialized material or an
operation activity such as start, complete, or pause by calling them from the footer bar. The
actions available for each status are determined by the status and action schema (SAS) that
is assigned to the operation activity.
Hint:
For more information about what a Status and Action Schema (SAS) is and how
it is defined in SAP S/4HANA PEO, see Unit 16 of this course.
The system performs checks to determine whether it is possible to start the operation
activity, for example, whether the predecessor activity has been completed, no holds exist, or
that the user has the required qualification. The features available in this app enable a smooth
processing of production tasks, increased visibility of tasks to be performed at an operation
activity, and greater efficiency due to the faster reaction time to issues in production. Due to
the interaction between the component list and the 3D image, the operator can easily identify
required parts and where to assemble them. Also, the 3D image displays components to be
assembled at the current operation activity as transparent, in comparison to previously
assembled components that are displayed in solid color.
Consumption of Different Types of Components

In SAP S/4HANA PEO, production operators can report assembly for various types of
components such as serialized, batch- managed, batch/serialized, manual, and backflushed.
● Serialized, serialized/batch, and batch-managed components:
For these components, SAP S/4HANA PEO records and stores traceability data in the
form of serial and/or batch numbers. The system provides the ability to scan or type in a
traceable ID for a component in the Perform Operation Activity app. This ID is stored in the
as-built record of the main serial number and the assembly action is recorded in the
production action log report.

Figure 97: Serial/Batch Number
If a mistake has been made, for example, the production operator scanned a wrong serial
number, the system allows you to correct the values or add a new serial/batch number
using the Action button.
Figure 98: Edit Details
Figure 99: Action Log
Assembly of serialized/batch-managed components posts immediate goods issue to

make those serial numbers unavailable for consumption by others. Batch numbers will be
available unless the quantity is not fully consumed.
● Manual components:

In SAP S/4HANA PEO, components are assigned to the type Manual when they do not
have a serial/batch number and the Backflushed indicator is not set. For such
components, the system prompts the production operator to record the quantity and then
stores the component ID and the entered quantity in the traceability reports.
Figure 100: Post Quantity
If a mistake has been made, for example, the production operator entered a wrong
quantity or overconsumed, the system allows you to correct the values or add a more
using the Action button.
● Backflushed components:
Backflushed components are shown in the Perform Operation Activity app only for display
and information purposes. The production operator cannot change them, but can filter
them out using the Traceable segmented button above the Components view on the left.
When the last operation activity of an operation has been completed, this sets the
operation status to Confirmed and sends (classical) PP confirmation for the operation
where confirmation for backflushed components is sent automatically.
Addition of an Attachment
In SAP S/4HANA PEO, we differentiate between documents linked by the production
engineer to an operation activity in a shop floor routing and files added by the production
operator as attachments to an operation activity in the Perform Operation Activity app.
Figure 101: Attachments and Documents
Documents
It may be important for production engineer to add certain documents to an operation
activity, such as specifications, safety instructions, or other files that explain how the work or

process shall run and what the production operator shall be aware of. Production operators in
their turn can view and open those documents while working at the operation activity in the
Perform Operation Activity app, but cannot change or delete them.
Hint:
To add a document, you have to create it in the system using transaction CV01N
in the SAP Easy Access menu and then assign it to an operation activity as a PRT
of the type Document on the Documents view in the Manage Shop Floor Routings
app. You can also attach a document to a complete order or to an operation in
the CO01/CO02 transactions. To do this, choose the Documents button in the
menu, and perform one of the following tasks:
● Populate the Activity field to assign a document to an operation.
● Leave the Activity field empty to assign a document to a complete order.
Figure 102: Activity Field
Attachments
It may happen that during production execution, a production operator needs to share some
information with either a supervisor, a quality engineer or a follow-up shift. This can be done in
the Perform Operation Activity app by attaching any type of file to a serialized material at an
operation activity (serialized scenario) or to an operation activity of production order (non-
serialized scenario). The attachment service takes care of document handling and either
associates the newly uploaded file to the existing document which is not closed, or if the latter
has not been found, creates a new document (DIR).
The document is created with the following keys:
● Serialized scenario: Order/Operation – Operation Internal ID - OAN Segment Type – S –
OA External ID – Serial Number
● Non-serialized scenario: Order/Operation – Operation Internal ID – OAN Segment Type –
A – OA External ID

Figure 103: Attachments (1/2)
Figure 104: Attachments (2/2)
Only the production operator who has added an attachment can edit or delete it. Then, the
attached file is displayed on the right in the Attachment view and becomes read-only.
The attachment functionality enables the production operator to add any type of file at any
time during production process. This allows the production operator to perform the following
tasks:
● Share additional details about the condition of the main part, its components, or the
process in general.
● Pass valuable information (for example, shift notes) to other users who will be working on
the same part.

After the operation activity has been completed, the attachment becomes available for
viewing at all follow-up operation activities of a serialized material or an order.
The functionality provided in the Perform Operation Activity app allows you to perform the
following tasks:
● View a 3D image of what is to be assembled.
● Choose the individual components to see exactly where they are to be assembled in the 3D
image.
● View work instructions and receive change alerts in case of an engineering change.
● Collect inspection characteristics as necessary.
● View assigned PRTs.
● Perform actions for a serialized material such as start, complete, skip, or pause, depending
on the status and action schema assigned.
● Put the order, material, operation, work center, or serial number on hold.
● Release a hold for an order, material, operation, work center, or serial number.
● View an action log for an operation activity.
● Post yield and scrap quantities and perform actions for a non-serialized material.
Monitoring of Production Results

Product Genealogy
In a manufacturing environment, it is very important to have centralized visibility for produced
parts. It simplifies tracing the origination of component materials, issues that happened
during production process and circumstances that led to those issues. It provides an entire
manufacturing history for a serialized material.
Product genealogy supports both forward and backward traceability of the product from the
main material to its sub-assemblies and vice versa. The display of operation activity history
helps to identify what happened at a certain operation activity, for example, what components
were assembled, what data was collected and what defects were recorded, as well as what
actions were performed by production operator during various operation activities. This all
helps supervisors and quality engineers in tracking critical quality issues during the
manufacturing processes and stay compliant to the quality standards.
Note:
To be able to use the Product Genealogy app, your user in the front-end system
must be assigned the SAP_BR_PRODN_SUPRVSR_DISC_EPO Production
Supervisor – Discrete Manufacturing (EPO) PFCG role.
In SAP S/4HANA PEO, the Product Genealogy app displays the following information:
● List of holds that happened when a serialized material has been processed
● List of operation activities defined and/or executed for the serialized material
● List of assembled components with the corresponding serial numbers, batch numbers,
and/or quantities

● Defects recorded for the serialized product

● Result recordings for individual inspection points
● Documents linked to an operation activities in the shop floor routing for the serialized
material
● Attachments added by production operators when processing operation activities
● List of disassembled serial/batch numbers
● Major assembly or parent serial number where the current serialized material has been
assembled into (where-used list)
Figure 105: Product Genealogy (1/2)
Figure 106: Product Genealogy (2/2)
Production Action Log

The existing Production Action Log report lists all actions performed by various users during
production execution activities, while working on a serialized or non-serialized product. The
data that can be retrieved in this report is collected and stored against either a serial number

or a production order. To search for the required details, the user can use fields in the filter
bar of the report.
Note:
To be able to use the Production Action Log app, your user in the front-end
system must be assigned the SAP_BR_PRODN_SUPRVSR_DISC_EPO Production
Supervisor – Discrete Manufacturing (EPO) PFCG role.
The Info column highlights a corresponding icon if there is a reason code or a note provided
for an action. Choose the chevron icon to view the details of the action.
Figure 107: Production Action Log (1/2)
Animation: Production Action Log (1/2)

For more information on Production Action Log (1/2), please view the animation
in the lesson Executing Serialized Production Process and Monitoring Production
Results, in your online course.
The Production Action Log report can be launched from the Perform Operation Activity app.
The difference from the standard Production Action Log report is that it shows only actions
that have been performed for (in other words, during the execution of) a specific operation
activity. This action log is launched from the Perform Operation or Perform Operation Activity
apps.
Figure 109: Production Action Log (2/2)

As-Built Report
For complex assemblies, it is important to have a centralized overview where components are
used and how a product was built. The final assembly of a product can include one or more
sub-assemblies in a serialized product. After the confirmation of a production order, the as-
built bill of material can be reviewed in the As-Built app.
In SAP S/4HANA PEO, the As-Built Report app displays the following information:
● Order number related materials
● Built hierarchy
● Assembled serial numbers and batches
● Consumed quantities
● Assembly types
● Related order numbers
● Used equipment
● Reference Designators
For all serialized and batch-managed components, you can navigate from the As-Built
hierarchy to the Product Genealogy app of the assembled components to get more details.
For batch components only, there is a possibility to drill down into a Where Used List report to
find other main assemblies using components from the same batch.
Figure 110: As Built Report


Unit 4
Exercise 11
Execute Serialized Production Process and
Simulation: Execute Serialized Production Process and Monitor Production

Results
For more information on Execute Serialized Production Process and Monitor
Production Results, please view the simulation in the lesson Executing Serialized
Production Process and Monitoring Production Results in your online course.
Business Example
complex products. The company wants the ability to distribute tasks between individual
production operators, so that they can start work from their personal queues. Also, the
company would like to understand what the other ways are to start production, as well as the
way production activities are executed in SAP S/4HANA PEO. It is also important for the
company to understand what data can be collected for serialized materials and their
components and how to report and monitor production progress. John needs to explain how
to assign work to individual production operators and what applications in SAP S/4HANA
PEO are available to start production activities. Also, John must demonstrate the execution of
serialized production process, collection of component data, and confirmation of operation
activities.
Finally, once a production order has been confirmed, John needs to explain where production
data can be viewed and analyzed.
Note:
1. As a production supervisor, assign operation activities of the newly created production

order (from the previous exercise) to a production operator (use your own manufacturing
user).
2. As a production operator, start the first operation activity Prepare Workspace (OA10) of
the first operation using the My Work Queue app.
3. Check if there are any attachments or work instructions before you start the operation
activity.
4. Confirm the first operation activity (OA10).

5. Start the second operation activity, Assemble Components (OA20), and check the
attached documents and work instructions before you start the assembling of
components. Interact with the 3D model by selecting components in the components list
and work instruction.
Note:
If there is no 3D model in the viewer section, please ignore the steps relating to
the 3D model.
6. Start the Visual Test (10) operation activity, add an attachment, and without completing
the Visual Test (10) operation activity, in parallel, start the Functional Test (20) operation
activity.
7. Complete the Visual Test (10) and Functional Test (20) operation activities.
8. Review the As-built Report and process step documentation for processed serialized
materials.

Unit 4
Solution 11
Execute Serialized Production Process and
Simulation: Execute Serialized Production Process and Monitor Production

Results
For more information on Execute Serialized Production Process and Monitor
Production Results, please view the simulation in the lesson Executing Serialized
Production Process and Monitoring Production Results in your online course.
Business Example
complex products. The company wants the ability to distribute tasks between individual
production operators, so that they can start work from their personal queues. Also, the
company would like to understand what the other ways are to start production, as well as the
way production activities are executed in SAP S/4HANA PEO. It is also important for the
company to understand what data can be collected for serialized materials and their
components and how to report and monitor production progress. John needs to explain how
to assign work to individual production operators and what applications in SAP S/4HANA
PEO are available to start production activities. Also, John must demonstrate the execution of
serialized production process, collection of component data, and confirmation of operation
activities.
Finally, once a production order has been confirmed, John needs to explain where production
data can be viewed and analyzed.
Note:
1. As a production supervisor, assign operation activities of the newly created production

order (from the previous exercise) to a production operator (use your own manufacturing
user).
a) Navigate to the Assign Work app in the Shop Floor Control and Manufacturing
Execution group on the SAP Fiori launchpad.
b) In the Order field, enter the order number and choose Go.
The system displays all operation activities of the selected order.
c) Select all operation activities and then choose the Assign Operators button above the
table on the right.

d) Select your manufacturing user in the list and choose the Assign button in the dialog
box.
Your user is assigned to the selected operation activities and is visible in the Assigned
To column.
e) Open the Manage Production Operators app in the Shop Floor Control and
f) Find and select the production operator from the previous step to view the details.
g) Set different priorities to the assigned operation activities by choosing the Change
Priority link above the assigned operation activities.
Note:
Setting priorities is rather meaningful when the operator is assigned to
multiple orders. The sequence of operation activities within one order is
normally determined by the shop floor routing.
2. As a production operator, start the first operation activity Prepare Workspace (OA10) of
the first operation using the My Work Queue app.
a) Navigate to the My Work Queue app in the Shop Floor Control and Manufacturing
Execution group on the SAP Fiori launchpad.
b) Choose the Settings icon above the list and add the Execution Priority column before
you choose Go.
By default, the system displays Assigned To Me operation activities and you can now
sort by Execution Priority.
c) Choose the Execute button next to the operation activity Prepare Workspace (OA10).
The system displays a dialog box prompting you to select a serial number, as the order
has two serial numbers created based on the requested total quantity.
d) Select any serial number.

The system navigates to the Perform Operation Activity app.
3. Check if there are any attachments or work instructions before you start the operation
activity.
a) Review the status information in the header bar on the left.
The serial number status is In Queue and attachments are still grayed out. The 3D
model is already available in the embedded viewer.
Note:
The 3D model should be available in the embedded viewer. If there is no 3D
model available, the system is not able to create the PEO document during
the transformation process. The SAP development team is working on a
solution for this.
b) Release the order from hold status. Select the Release Hold link.
c) Choose the Start button in the footer bar to start the operation activity.
The system changes the status of the serialized material in the operation activity from
In Queue to In Process. The PRT tab is now active and shows the attached equipment.

4. Confirm the first operation activity (OA10).

a) Choose Complete to confirm the operation activity.
5. Start the second operation activity, Assemble Components (OA20), and check the
attached documents and work instructions before you start the assembling of
components. Interact with the 3D model by selecting components in the components list
and work instruction.
Note:
If there is no 3D model in the viewer section, please ignore the steps relating to
the 3D model.
a) Read the work instruction on the right and select the embedded references to the
components.
The component is highlighted in the 3D model.
b) Select any component in the component list on the left and see that the corresponding
component is highlighted in the 3D model.
c) Select the Document tab on the right and open the attached document by selecting the
link.
The document is downloaded and can be opened for reading.
d) Select the BASE_HULL-## component in the Components table.
e) Open the value help in the Serial/Batch Number field in the upper-right corner above
the Components table.
Note:
If there are no serial numbers available in the value help, use the
transaction code MIGO and perform goods receipt for the material
BASE_HULL-## into the plant 1020, storage location 101A. Select the
checkbox to generate serial numbers automatically.
f) Select any available serial number for the BASE_HULL-## component from the list.
g) Repeat sub-step e for all other serialized components.

The value in the Consumed Qty column for the component increases and the green
sidebar appears next to the line with the component. This indicates that the
component has been consumed as planned.
h) Select the FLOOR-## component (Assembly Type: Manual) in the Components table.
i) Open the Action column to see the Reference Designators for this component (for
example, left and right). Select the checkbox for Consumed Quantity.
The value in the Consumed Qty column for the component increases and the green
sidebar appears next to the line with the component. This indicates that the
component has been consumed as planned.
j) Choose the Pause button in the footer bar.

The system changes the status of the operation activity to Paused. Some buttons
become hidden in the footer bar for the actions that are not possible in the status
Paused, for example, Complete.
k) Choose the Resume button in the footer bar.

The system changes the status of the operation activity back to In Process.
l) Consume the RAILING-## component in the same way as FLOOR-##.
m) Select the FRONT-## component (Assembly Type: Manual) in the Components table.
n) Open the Action column. A pop-up window appears. In the Post Quantity field, enter 1.
o) Choose Post.
The value in the Consumed Qty column for the component increases. You have
assembled all components.
p) Choose the Complete button in the footer bar.

The system navigates to the next operation, 0020 Inspection, and prompts you to
select the next operation activity. Since both Visual Test and Functional Test belong to
the same simultaneous group, you are free to select any one to start first.
6. Start the Visual Test (10) operation activity, add an attachment, and without completing
the Visual Test (10) operation activity, in parallel, start the Functional Test (20) operation
activity.
a) Choose the Start button in the footer bar.
b) Choose the Attachments view on the left and then choose the Upload link above the
table.
c) Browse for and add any local document as an attachment.
d) Choose the Navigate to icon in the footer bar and select the Show operation details
option.
The system displays the Perform Operation screen.
e) Choose the Execute button next to the Functional Test (20) operation activity.
f) Choose the Start button in the footer bar.

The system allows you to start the next test activity without completing the previous
visual test. This is because both belong to the simultaneous group of activities and can
be processed in parallel.
7. Complete the Visual Test (10) and Functional Test (20) operation activities.
a) Select the Functional Test (20) operation activity.
b) Choose the Complete button in the footer bar.

The system navigates to the open operation activity Visual Test (10).
c) Choose the Complete button in the footer bar.

The system sets the status of the operation activity Visual Test (10) to Completed and
because this is the last operation activity for the serialized material, it asks what you
want to do next.
d) Choose any option from the dialog box.
8. Review the As-built Report and process step documentation for processed serialized
materials.

a) Navigate to the As-built Report app in the Production Execution Monitoring group on
the SAP Fiori launchpad and open it.
b) In the Order field on the header filter bar, enter the order number that you have noted
down.
c) Choose Execute.
d) Choose the chevron icon at the beginning of the line to expand the material number
HULL-##.
e) The table shows you which serial numbers or reference designators are assembled:
● Order number related materials
● Built hierarchy
● Assembled serial numbers and batches
● Consumed quantities
● Assembly types
● Related order numbers
● Used equipment
● Reference Designators
f) Select the header material HULL-## and select Genealogy at the top of the screen.
The system displays the Product Genealogy report for the selected serial number.
g) View the list of operation activities, the assembled serial number, and quantity for the
components.
h) Choose any of the operation activities in the Operation Activities view.

The system navigates to the Serialized material at operation activity view. Here, you
can see the action log for the selected operation activity.
i) Navigate to the Production Action Log app in the Production Execution Monitoring
j) In the Production Order field on the header filter bar, enter the order number that you
have noted down.
k) Choose Go.
The system displays a complete log of actions performed for the selected production
order.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 4
Lesson 3
Disassembling Components in Various
Scenarios
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Disassembly Use Cases Overview

Complex assembly production is usually long running and non-repetitive. This increases the
need for disassembly of parts in several scenarios. Disassembly primarily means you are
removing certain parts from assembly. This would be applicable in several cases, for example,
you may need to disassemble a part because you have an engineering change that requires a
part to be replaced with another part. Or sometimes, you may have a defective part that
needs to be replaced with something else. There are also scenarios where you have
temporary parts like locking and fixtures which are added to the assemblies but they are not
part of the original engineering bill of material – they were added in manufacturing to basically
safeguard or protect the assemblies for transportation. Therefore, these parts will be
disassembled when the transportation or safety requirements are no longer needed.
Similarly, you may have cases where you disassemble certain parts from a stock assembly in
order to reuse those parts in another production order.
Figure 112: Disassembly Use Cases

Engineering Change
Engineering changes may affect an order at any time during production execution. The
impacted order may include parts that have been already installed at operations and
operation activities that have been already completed or partially processed. Using SAP
S/4HANA PEO, the production engineer can incorporate such engineering changes of
components with or without predefined stock type and storage location for return and
regardless of whether it is for temporary or permanent disassembly.
Figure 113: Disassembly Process for Engineering Change
An order change for the in-process order can be triggered from the Manage Production
Orders app using the Change Order button. The system will create an order-specific routing
and puts all or selected operations on hold.
In the order-specific routing, it is possible to run a comparison between a new version of the
MBOM and the current order BOM and then upgrade the MBOM as required.
The changes may include the following:
● A component exists in the new MBOM and is not available in the order BOM
● A component exists in the order BOM and is not available in the new MBOM
● Component quantity in the new MBOM is either increased or decreased
After getting an overview of all changes which are highlighted in the comparison screen, you
can either transfer them individually or use the Transfer All button to automatically transfer all
changes to components from the new version of MBOM into the current order BOM.

Lesson: Disassembling Components in Various Scenarios
Figure 114: Transfer of MBOM Changes between MBOM Versions
Animation: Transfer of MBOM Changes between MBOM Versions

For more information on Transfer of MBOM Changes between MBOM Versions,
please view the animation in the lesson Disassembling Components in Various
Scenarios, in your online course.
Having done changes to the components, it is still possible to perform further changes to
operation activities or the structure of the order-specific routing:
● Add/delete operations and operation activities (they will not be started though)
● Change assignments to not started operation activities such as qualifications, work
instructions, buyoffs, PRTs, action type handlers, inspection characteristics, and so on
After changes from the new MBOM are incorporated into the order-specific routing, you can
see them in the Component List Workspace.
For those components that need to be disassembled, here you can select and specify whether
the component will be temporarily or permanently disassembled. If it is for permanent return
to stock, you could additionally determine the pre-define stock type (blocked, inspection,
general use, or undefiled) and storage location for the return.
In case the stock type for a component is set to Undefined in the order-specific routing, the
operator will be asked where to return the component and will have to pick the stock type
from the drop-down list during disassembly action.
If there were new components added or some components marked for disassembly (they will
have “-” negative qty), they will also be listed in the Component Assignment Workspace and
must be assigned to existing or new operation activities.

Figure 116: Disassembly Details
Figure 117: Assignment of Disassembly Components
Components that are to be disassembled are presented in an additional list in the Perform
Operation Activity app where it also indicates whether the component will be permanently or
temporarily removed.
In case of temporary disassembly, the same component will appear under the Components
view at the same or different operation activity as it must be reassembled back.
Every assembly, disassembly, and reassembly is recorded into the Production Action Log
report with the stock type and storage location for return.
Product Genealogy allows you to track the history of component disassembly and reassembly
including serial, batch numbers, quantities, as well as stock type and storage location
information for returns.

Figure 118: Perform Operation Activity App for Disassembly
Figure 119: Production Action Log for Disassembled Components
Defective Parts Replacement

In manufacturing, it happens that parts get damaged or its function test fails after the
assembly is already completed. In that case, the production operator would probably record a
defect and the affected assembly would be routed to a rework work center for repair.
Assuming that the part itself cannot be fixed, it would have to be disassembled and replaced
by a new material. The defective part would be sent to the quality stock and a new part would
be issued from warehouse stock.

Figure 120: Disassembly Process for Rework
The quality task triggers a change order for the creation of an order-specific routing to
incorporate the necessary disassembly steps. Depending on the process requirements, the
change order can be triggered in the following three different ways:
● Change order without change record
● Change order with exiting change record
● Change order with new change record
Figure 121: Quality Task – Follow-Up Actions
Animation: Quality Task – Follow-Up Actions

For more information on Quality Task – Follow-Up Actions, please view the
animation in the lesson Disassembling Components in Various Scenarios, in your
online course.

When the quality task is saved and executed in the background, it is possible to open the
order-specific routing from the Manage Production Order app by selecting the affected order
and choosing the Manage Order Change button.
Figure 123: Manage Order Change
Animation: Manage Order Change

For more information on Manage Order Change, please view the animation in the
lesson Disassembling Components in Various Scenarios, in your online course.
In the order-specific routing, the production engineer can then adjust the routing as required
by the process:
● Perform changes to the component list of the in-process order, such as:
- Adding a new component
- Deleting an existing component
- Increasing or decreasing component quantity
- Temporarily or permanently disassemble a component that has been fully or partially
consumed
● View the existing as-built of the order and copy the component to be disassembled from
the as-built
● Pre-define stock type and storage location for components to be disassembled.

Figure 125: Disassembly Options
Figure 126: Component Structure with Disassembly
The changes of the order-specific routing are presented to the production operator in the
Perform Operation Activity app with the following capabilities:
● Ability to view the Components to Disassemble list with the disassembly type – permanent
or temporary. If the disassembly happens within the same order, the user will be proposed
to pick from the list of previously assembled components.
● Record disassembly and reassembly actions with the stock type and storage location
information.

Figure 127: Disassembly and Reassembly Operation Activity
Animation: Disassembly and Reassembly Operation Activity

For more information on Disassembly and Reassembly Operation Activity, please
view the animation in the lesson Disassembling Components in Various
Scenarios, in your online course.
All actions regarding the disassembly and reassembly of components performed in the
Perform Operation Activity app are also recorded for traceability reasons and can be viewed in
the Production Action Log. The details stored for each action contain information about the
action itself (that is, action, timestamp, operator), as well as about the processed materials
(that is, serial, batch numbers, quantities, stock type, and storage location).
Figure 129: Production Action Log for Disassembly and Reassembly
Animation: Production Action Log for Disassembly and Reassembly

For more information on Production Action Log for Disassembly and
Reassembly, please view the animation in the lesson Disassembling Components
in Various Scenarios, in your online course.

Disassembly for Reuse

This scenario describes the case where an assembly has been returned back into stock,
maybe because of a customer claim, and you would like to disassemble it in order to return
the expensive parts back to stock and make them available for other production orders.
To do this, you create a disassembly MBOM that only contains the parts that you want to
disassemble – it is not simply a copy of the original MBOM that was used to produce the
product. The following figure shows an example of a finished product from which you want to
recover all the parts that do not contain an "X". You can send these parts to quality inspection
stock first to undergo a quality inspection before being sent back to unrestricted-use stock
where they become generally available again.
Note:
To decide where the costs will be allocated, there is a new method,
SET_SETTLEMENT_RULE_RECEIVER, provided within the
EX_MPE_EXEC_SHOP_FLOOR_ORDER BADI implementation.
Figure 131: Disassembly for Reuse
The disassembly BOM is similar to a recursive BOM, which contains itself as a component (for
consumption) plus all components which are to be disassembled with a negative quantity (by-
products). However, the header material, which is used for this disassembly BOM, is a so-
called process material (artificial header material) that is not MRP relevant.
The creation of the disassembly BOM requires the following two steps:
1. Using VEMP to create an MBOM with the new usage type D (Disassembly). This MBOM
will still contain positive quantities for the reusable components.
2. Using the Creating Disassembly BOM app to convert the MBOM with the usage type D into
the disassembly MBOM with the usage type V to be used in production. During the
creation of disassembly MBOM, the system will also create a new header material of the
type PROC (process) and moves the original header material as an output material to the
MBOM (with positive qty). The quantities of the other components will be converted from
a positive into a negative (-) quantity.
Alternatively: Instead of using VEMP and the Create Disassembly BOM app, the MBOM can be
initially created using the Maintain Bill of Materials app. Components that have to be removed
and returned are defined as by-products and have a negative (-) qty.

Figure 132: Create MBOM with Usage Type ‘D’
Figure 133: Create Disassembly BOM App
After the disassembly MBOM has been created, the production engineer can proceed to
create a shop floor routing that is capable of handling by-products.
Figure 134: Shop Floor Routing for Disassembly

Animation: Shop Floor Routing for Disassembly

For more information on Shop Floor Routing for Disassembly, please view the
animation in the lesson Disassembling Components in Various Scenarios, in your
online course.
When the disassembly order is executed, the production operator has the ability to view the
list of components planned for disassembly (by-products) in the Components to Disassemble
tab in the Perform Operation Activity app and to record the return action for planned
disassemblies (by-products).
Transport Locks/Fixtures Removal

This use case covers additional components, which are only temporarily in use during
transportation, such as locks and fixtures. These items are not part of the original
manufacturing BOM and are therefore also not included in the production order.
In this case, you would create a new MBOM version either with the VEMP or the Maintain Bill
of Material app, where you add non-visual components with positive and negative quantities
(by-products). Afterwards, this MBOM version gets incorporated into the production order by
using the order change capability already described previously.
Disassembly for Transportation

This scenario is relevant if, for example, you have a product that has been assembled, tested,
and is ready to be delivered to the customer. However, it may not be possible to ship the
product in its assembled state and therefore, to avoid damage during transportation, you
have to split it up into more transportable units.
Such units are referred to as chunks and most likely they have a different structure than the
source EBOM. The chunks can already be pre-defined in a PLM system and transferred via an
engineering snapshot into SAP S/4HANA PEO. However, the chunks are to be disassembled
from the finished product and therefore they will be assigned with a negative (-) quantity.
The conversion from the EBOM (containing the chunks) into the MBOM follows the normal
procedure as described in unit 2. However, since the header material is an end item or major
assembly, we would break down the disassembly into several de-installation kits (in the
contrary to installation kits, which is further explained in the follow-up units).
Figure 136: Disassembly into Chunks for Transportation
Additional Developments to Support Disassembly Scenarios

S/4HANA PEO provides the following developments to support the described disassembly
scenarios.
New Action Handlers

The following type handlers are delivered by default and can be viewed in the SPRO
customizing activity Define Action Handlers:

● CHECK_SERNR_FOR_MATERIAL_RETURN.
Use this action handler at PRE processing point in combination with the Material Return
action to check that the returned serial number exists in the system.
The following class is delivered as a sample action handler, which can be either enhanced or
used as is at the customer system:
● CL_MPE_OAC_TH_EQUIP_HIERACHY.
Use this class to create a new action handler to run at a POST processing point in
combination with the Component Assembly and Disassembly actions or the Material
Return action. The logic implemented in the class will take the recorded serial number with
or without reference designator information and send to update the equipment hierarchy
with the SN and reference designator information. The result can be viewed in the IQ03
transaction.
Hard-Coded Checks
There are also a couple of hard-coded checks provided in the system to support reassemblies
without goods movements (that is, reassembly of temporary disassembled parts). This check
on reassembly assures that nothing is reassembled that was not disassembled before. . On
completion of an operation activity, the system checks that for all reassemblies, exactly what
was disassembled is reassembled.
Enhancements to the 3D Viewer for Disassembly in the Perform Operation Activity App
Planned removals are displayed in transparent mode (same as how we show planned
assemblies). However, when components get disassembled, they are hidden completely in
the 3D viewer.


Unit 4
Exercise 12
Disassemble Components Triggered by
Engineering Change
Simulation: Disassemble Components Triggered by Engineering Change

For more information on Disassemble Components Triggered by Engineering
Change, please view the simulation in the lesson Disassembling Components in
Various Scenarios in your online course.
Business Example
complex products.
While production on major assemblies has already started, there are still late engineering
changes coming in from the engineering department that affect open production orders. John
is asked to identify such affected orders and incorporate the BOM change in an order-specific
routing. As part of that, he has to do a comparison between the existing and new MBOM and
transfer the changes where required. Along with the component change, he also needs to
create new operation activities for the disassembly and reassembly of components. After
execution of the order-specific routing, he checks the product genealogy and action report to
view the performed changes.
Note:
1. Create and release a new MBOM version for material HULL-## using the Maintain Bill of
Material app. Make the following changes to the component list:
● Replace RAILING-## with RAILING_NEW-##
● Add LOCKING-## with quantity 4
4. Use the Perform Work (Order/Operation) app to start the second operation activity,
Assemble Components (OA20).

Note:
For steps 4 and 5, see the exercise Create a Simple Shop Floor Routing and
Assign it a Manufacturing MBOM for detailed steps.
5. Assemble the listed components by collecting their serial numbers or quantities.
6. Go to the Manage Production Orders app and initiate the order change (at the top right)
for the order in use.
7. Go to the Perform Work (Order/Operation) app and complete the second operation
activity, Assemble Components (OA20). Refresh your browser.
8. Start the next operation activity, Disassembly and Reassembly (OA10).
9. Disassemble components listed in the Components to Disassemble section.
10. (Re-)Assemble all components listed in the Components section.
11. Complete the operation activity Disassembly and Reassembly (OA10).
12. Continue with the next operation activity from the next operation, Inspection (0020).
Since the inspection activities are contained in a simultaneous group, the activities can be
started in any order and executed in parallel.
13. Go to the Production Action Log and check the performed steps.
14. Check stock for the returned components by using the MMBE transaction.

Unit 4
Solution 12
Disassemble Components Triggered by
Engineering Change
Simulation: Disassemble Components Triggered by Engineering Change

For more information on Disassemble Components Triggered by Engineering
Change, please view the simulation in the lesson Disassembling Components in
Various Scenarios in your online course.
Business Example
complex products.
While production on major assemblies has already started, there are still late engineering
changes coming in from the engineering department that affect open production orders. John
is asked to identify such affected orders and incorporate the BOM change in an order-specific
routing. As part of that, he has to do a comparison between the existing and new MBOM and
transfer the changes where required. Along with the component change, he also needs to
create new operation activities for the disassembly and reassembly of components. After
execution of the order-specific routing, he checks the product genealogy and action report to
view the performed changes.
Note:
1. Create and release a new MBOM version for material HULL-## using the Maintain Bill of
Material app. Make the following changes to the component list:
● Replace RAILING-## with RAILING_NEW-##
● Add LOCKING-## with quantity 4
a) Search for HULL-## at the top of the screen and choose Go.
b) Select the material HULL-## with BOM Usage V and choose Create Version (NOT
Create Version BOM).
c) Confirm the pop-up window.

The selected BOM was copied to a new version and the BOM details screen opens in
edit mode.
d) In the Component column, replace RAILING-## with RAILING_NEW-##.

e) Select an empty row and enter LOCKING-## with Quantity 4.
f) Save the BOM.
g) Choose the Release button at the top right of the screen.

The new MBOM is released and can no longer be maintained.
c) On the initial screen, enter the following data and choose Continue:
● Material: HULL-##
d) In the Total Qty field, enter 1.
e) In the Scheduling Type dropdown list, select Current date.
f) In the Production Supervisor field in the Assignment view, enter DMO.
g) Make sure that the correct production version has been picked for the order in the
Master Data view.
h) Choose Release.
i) Choose Save.
Note:
j) Note down or copy the order number.
b) In the Order field on the header filter bar, enter the number that you have noted down.
c) Choose Go.
4. Use the Perform Work (Order/Operation) app to start the second operation activity,
Assemble Components (OA20).
Note:
For steps 4 and 5, see the exercise Create a Simple Shop Floor Routing and
Assign it a Manufacturing MBOM for detailed steps.

5. Assemble the listed components by collecting their serial numbers or quantities.
6. Go to the Manage Production Orders app and initiate the order change (at the top right)
for the order in use.
a) Select your order and choose the Change Order button at the top of the list.
b) In the pop-up window, select Without Change Record and choose Create.
The Order Change button switches to Manage Order Change.
c) Choose the Manage Order Change button.

The app navigates to the Order Specific Routing app and opens the Structure
Workspace.
d) Choose the Structure Workspace button and select Component List Workspace in the
pop-up window.
e) Choose the Compare MBOM button at the top of the screen.

The current version (A) and the latest MBOM version (B) are displayed.
f) Choose Apply to start the comparison.

The system shows you several differences between A and B.
g) Select RAILING-## and choose the Differences button at the top of the table. Select
the checkbox and choose Transfer.
Two sub-assemblies have been created under the RAILIN-## component: One for
disassembling RAILING-## and one for assembling RAILING_NEW-##.
h) Transfer all other components in the same way. Review and confirm the changes for
each affected component.
i) Select the SPOILER-## component and choose the Disassembly button.
j) In the pop-up window, choose the following settings in the Disassembly section:
● Temporary Disassembly: Select
● Stock Type: Undefined
Under the SPOILER-## component, two new groups for temporary disassembly and
reassembly are added.
k) Switch to the Structure Workspace and add a new operation 0015 for Disassembly and
Reassembly with one activity (OA10).
l) Switch to the Component Assignment Workspace and assign all new and unassigned
components to the newly created operation activity Disassembly and Reassembly
(OA10).
m) Save and Release the Order-Specific Routing.
Note:
7. Go to the Perform Work (Order/Operation) app and complete the second operation
activity, Assemble Components (OA20). Refresh your browser.

8. Start the next operation activity, Disassembly and Reassembly (OA10).
9. Disassemble components listed in the Components to Disassemble section.
10. (Re-)Assemble all components listed in the Components section.
11. Complete the operation activity Disassembly and Reassembly (OA10).
12. Continue with the next operation activity from the next operation, Inspection (0020).
Since the inspection activities are contained in a simultaneous group, the activities can be
started in any order and executed in parallel.
a) Start any of the operation activities and then go back to the Perform Operation app to
also start the other one in parallel.
b) Complete both operation activities under the Inspection operation.
c) Go to the As-Built Report and check the final assembled product.
13. Go to the Production Action Log and check the performed steps.
14. Check stock for the returned components by using the MMBE transaction.
a) Go to SAP Logon Pad → Access and log in to T41.
b) Use the MMBE transaction.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 4
Lesson 4
Recording Defects
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Defects in SAP S/4HANA PEO

Deviations that relate to the production execution process or product quality may happen any
time, no matter how well and precisely the production has been initially planned. If this
happens, production operators or quality engineers typically report a problem by recording
defect or nonconformance information in their shop floor system.
A defect represents a symptom or an observed root cause that led or may lead to a failure. By
reporting a defect, the responsible users describe a set of reasons or select a defect code
indicating that the product or process does not meet the approved quality definition and has
been selected to undergo special processing.
When a defect is recorded in SAP S/4HANA PEO, the following tasks can be added to resolve
it:
● Serialized product can be fully scrapped
● Serialized product can be processed further as is
● Serialized product can be dispositioned to the generic rework operation
● Defective order quantity can be scrapped
● Defective order quantity can be processed further as is
Recording a Defect
Before recording a defect, the Record Defect action has to be configured in the Manage Action
Settings app. There, you define whether the defect reason code and a note are mandatory,
optional, or not needed during the defect creation. The defect code group which contains a
group of reason codes, must belong to catalog 9 – Defects in SAP S/4HANA QM. This code
group determines the reason codes which the operator can select when recording a defect in
the Perform Operation Activity app.

Lesson: Recording Defects
Figure 138: Code Group
The production operator working in the Perform Operation Activity app can record a defect
using the Record Defect button in the footer bar at any time during production process.
Figure 139: Recording a Defect in Perform Operation Activity for Serialized Material

Figure 140: Recording a Defect in Perform Operation Activity for Non-serialized Material
In the Record Defect dialog box, the production operator specifies a defect code and a
description (note), if configured, and can decide whether an object such as serial number,
operation activity, material, work center, order and so on, will be put on hold. If the Put on
Hold checkbox is selected, the system proposes again to specify a reason and a note for the
hold, if configured.
Note:
The configuration comes from the Manage Action Settings app for the respective
object. For example, if a serial number is selected to be put on hold, then the
object to be selected in the Manage Action Settings will be Serialized Material and
the action will be Apply Serial Number Hold. For more information about action
settings and possible configurations, see Unit 16.
Figure 141: Action Configuration in Manage Action Settings
Once the defect has been recorded, it becomes visible to the production operator and all
further users who will process the same serialized material or the order in the Perform
Operation Activity app. If the hold has been applied, then the system disables the ability to
collect component data and inspection characteristic information until the defect is resolved
and hold is released.

Figure 142: Defects
Note:
When we record a defect in SAP S/4HANA PEO, we store data in the QMFE table,
and not in QMEL.
The defect also becomes available to the quality engineer in the Process Defects app, where it
shows the defect code and comments provided by the production operator.
● In the serialized process, the defect is linked to the defective serial number.
● In the non-serialized process, the defect is linked to the defective quantity of a production
order.
Figure 143: Defect Code

Animation: Defect Code

For more information on Defect Code, please view the animation in the lesson
Recording Defects, in your online course.
The quality engineer processes the defect further by adding a quality task to the defect.
Depending on the recorded defect, an appropriate task code has to be selected:
● Use as Is
● Scrap
● Apply Hold (individual task for each object type)
● Release Hold (individual task for each object type)
● Rework
Figure 145: Task Code
Caution:
Refer to the SAP PEO Implementation guide for instructions how to configure
decisions for the workflow step types Review, Perform Task, and Rework
Request.
Once the quality task has been selected and saved, the follow-up action is executed that
sends the defect decision back to the Perform Operation Activity app and removes the hold (if
applied during defect creation) by allowing the production worker to proceed.
Note:
When we record a quality task in SAP S/4HANA PEO, we store data in the QMSN
table.

Scrapping Serialized and Non-serialized Materials via Defect

If the quality task Scrap has been recorded for a serialized material, the production operator
cannot complete the serialized material anymore. It must be scrapped. If the production
operator chooses Complete, an error message appears with a prompt to scrap the serial
number.
Figure 146: Error Caused by Scrapped Material
Animation: Error Caused by Scrapped Material

For more information on Error Caused by Scrapped Material, please view the
animation in the lesson Recording Defects, in your online course.
If the quality task Scrap has been recorded for a non-serialized material, the production
operator must scrap at least some quantity for the production order before completing it.
Rework Serialized Material via Defect

The prerequisites for rework in SAP S/4HANA PEO are as follows:
● Rework operations must be created with control key that has the Rework checkbox
selected.

Figure 148: Rework Checkbox
● At least one rework routing has been created and released in the Manage Shop Floor
Routings app, having one or multiple operations with the rework control key associated.
Figure 149: Process Flow Diagram
Rework Process Steps
1. The production operator working in the Perform Operation Activity app records a defect
with or without hold using the Record Defect button.
2. Once the defect is recorded, it becomes available to the quality engineer in the Process
Defects app.
3. The quality engineer edits the defect and adds a task of type Rework (015).

Figure 150: Quality Task with Follow-Up Action
4. The quality engineer chooses a follow-up action that best fits to the recorded defect by
selecting an appropriate rework routing (assuming that several rework routings have been
created and released for a specific defect code).
5. Saving the defect with the associated quality task triggers the immediate execution of the
follow-up action in the background and inserts the rework operation and its operation
activities (as defined in the rework routing) into the production order. This information is
visible in the Manage Production Orders app in the Order Schedule view.
Figure 151: Order Schedule
The rework operation of the rework routing is inserted in the production order directly
after the operation in which the defect was recorded. Or, if no hold was placed at the time
that the defect was recorded and processing has advanced to the next operation, the
rework operation is inserted directly after the operation that is currently in process. The
defective part is then automatically forwarded to this rework operation on completion of
the last operation activity in this operation. If you are processing several serial numbers,
all the others for which no defect was recorded are forwarded directly to the next
operation.
6. The production operator completes the current operation and is automatically navigated
to an operation activity of the rework operation.
7. The rework operation activity has the As-Built view that shows all components that have
been previously assembled. The operator has a chance to exchange the serial/batch
number of components.

Figure 152: As-Built View
Figure 153: Status Details
8. In addition to replacing a defective part, the operator may also choose to add another
unplanned material to the list of components.
Figure 154: Adding Unplanned Materials

After completion of the rework step, the material is moved back to the next operation activity
of the original routing.
Example
Two serial numbers are being processed and in one of the operation activities in operation
0010 a defect was recorded for the serialized product 2 (without hold). This resulted in the
rework operation 0011 being inserted immediately after operation 0010. On completion of
operation 0010, the serialized product 1 proceeds to operation 0020.
However, the serialized product 2 first has to be reworked in rework operation 0011. When it is
finished here, it proceeds to operation 0020.
Figure 155: Processing of Defective Serialized Material
Animation: Processing of Defective Serialized Material

For more information on Processing of Defective Serialized Material, please view
the animation in the lesson Recording Defects, in your online course.
Monitoring Defect Information in SAP S/4HANA PEO

To view and analyze defect information recorded during the production process, you can use
the following apps:
● Product Genealogy (only for serialized materials)
● Manage Production Orders (for both serialized and non-serialized materials)
In the Manage Production Orders app, there is a Defects view on the Order Details page that
shows information about recorded defects. The Quality Issue icon in the Issues column will
become active if there is any scrap recorded for the production order.

Figure 157: Manage Production Orders App – Defect Details for Serialized Material 1
Figure 158: Manage Production Orders App – Defect Details for Serialized Material 2
Figure 159: Manage Production Orders App – Defect Details for Non-serialized Material
The Product Genealogy app shows the same defect details when the defect was recorded for
a specific serial number.

Figure 160: Product Genealogy App – Defect Details for Serialized Material
Animation: Product Genealogy App – Defect Details for Serialized Material

For more information on Product Genealogy App – Defect Details for Serialized
Material, please view the animation in the lesson Recording Defects, in your
online course.


Unit 4
Exercise 13
Record a Defect for Serialized Material and
View Defect Information in Monitoring Apps
Simulation: Record a Defect for Serialized Material and View Defect Information
in Monitoring Apps
For more information on Record a Defect for Serialized Material and View Defect
Information in Monitoring Apps, please view the simulation in the lesson
Recording Defects in your online course.
Business Example
complex products. The company needs to understand how to record defect information for a
serialized material or production order in SAP S/4HANA PEO. It is also important for the
company to know what the possible options are for resolving defects and what reports can be
used to monitor and analyze defect data. John needs to explain how to record, process, and
view defect information in SAP S/4HANA PEO for both serialized and non-serialized
production processes.
Note:
1. Record a defect for the serialized material you are working with in the production order.
Note:
If you have completed the previous exercise, please create a new production
order for HULL-## (see the exercise Disassemble Components Triggered by
Engineering Change, step 2 e - j), then proceed with step 1 e of this exercise.
2. Add the task 015 (Rework) to the recorded defect.
3. Execute the rework operation activity in the Perform Operation Activity app, remove one of
the assembled serial numbers, and replace it with another one.
4. Use the Product Genealogy app to view defect information.

Unit 4
Solution 13
Record a Defect for Serialized Material and
View Defect Information in Monitoring Apps
Simulation: Record a Defect for Serialized Material and View Defect Information
in Monitoring Apps
For more information on Record a Defect for Serialized Material and View Defect
Information in Monitoring Apps, please view the simulation in the lesson
Recording Defects in your online course.
Business Example
complex products. The company needs to understand how to record defect information for a
serialized material or production order in SAP S/4HANA PEO. It is also important for the
company to know what the possible options are for resolving defects and what reports can be
used to monitor and analyze defect data. John needs to explain how to record, process, and
view defect information in SAP S/4HANA PEO for both serialized and non-serialized
production processes.
Note:
1. Record a defect for the serialized material you are working with in the production order.
Note:
If you have completed the previous exercise, please create a new production
order for HULL-## (see the exercise Disassemble Components Triggered by
Engineering Change, step 2 e - j), then proceed with step 1 e of this exercise.
a) Navigate to the Perform Work (Order/Operation) app in the Shop Floor Control and
b) In the Order field, enter the order number that you have worked with.
c) In the Operation field, enter 0010.
d) Choose Go.
e) Skip the first operation activity and start the next operation activity, OA20 Assemble
Components.

f) Choose the Base_Hull-## component in the list and search for an available serial
number to assemble.
g) Choose the Record Defect button in the footer bar.
h) Select the Put on Hold checkbox.
i) In the Hold Type dropdown list, select Serial Number.
j) In the Description field, enter Scratch found.
k) Choose the Record button in the dialog box.

The system creates a defect and displays it in the Defects view on the right in the
Perform Operation Activity screen. Note down the defect code. Also, the system puts
the serial number on hold and displays the corresponding message on the left in the
Issues view. Click on the right side at the number of the created defect – the system
navigates to the Process Defects app.
2. Add the task 015 (Rework) to the recorded defect.

a) Go to the Defects app.
b) Choose the Edit button in the upper-right corner of the screen.
c) In the Description field, enter any free form text.
d) In the Process Defect app, select the Defect Code field and search for the defect code
32 Damaged Material.
e) Scroll down to the Tasks section and choose Create.

The system navigates to the Process Quality Task app.
f) In the Task Code field, enter 015 (Rework) and choose Enter.
g) In the Description field, enter any free form text.
h) Scroll down to the Follow Up Action section.
i) Choose Select Rework Routing on the right-hand side an choose Go.
j) Select any available routing.

Note:
If no routing is available, create a rework routing with the Manage Shop
Floor Routing app with at least one operation activity.
a) Go to the Manage Shop Floor Routing app.
b) Choose Create → Rework Routing.
c) Enter Routing Description: For Rework Routing, Lot Size UoM: EA,
and Plant: 1020. Choose Execute.
d) Enter Operation: 0010, Description: For rework routing, Control

Key: RW01, Operation Activity OA10, Description: For rework
routing.
e) Save and Save and Release Routing.
k) Select the Routing placement section, where the system has to include the rework
operation (-activity). Select the operation with the status In Process.
l) Choose Insert.
m) Choose Save in the footer bar.

The system records the defect decision, executes a follow-up action to insert the
rework operation into the production order, and releases the hold.
n) Navigate to the Manage Production Orders app in the Shop Floor Control and
o) In the Order field on the header filter bar, enter the order number that you have noted
down.
p) Choose Go.
q) Choose the chevron icon at the end of the line to open the order details.
r) Choose the Order Schedule view.

The system shows the newly inserted rework operation. Use the Settings button above
the table on the right to add the Source column. The source for the newly added
operation is Rework Routing.
3. Execute the rework operation activity in the Perform Operation Activity app, remove one of
the assembled serial numbers, and replace it with another one.

The system navigates to the Assembly Components OA20. On the right side of the
screen, the Defects view shows the defect decision Rework.
d) Choose the Complete button in the footer bar.

The system navigates to the Repair (10) operation activity of the rework operation.

e) Choose the Start button in the footer bar.
f) Choose the Action button in the As-Built view for the component Base_Hull-##.
g) Choose the Remove icon in the dialog box.
h) Select Quality Inspection in the Stock Type pop-up dialog box.

The system disassembles the selected component's serial number.
i) Choose any another available serial number for the Base_Hull -## component.
j) Choose Complete.
4. Use the Product Genealogy app to view defect information.

a) Navigate to the Product Genealogy app in the Production Execution Monitoring group
c) Choose Go.
d) Choose the chevron icon next to the line with the second serial number of the order.
The system navigates to the Genealogy Report for the selected serial number.
e) Choose the Components view to see the assembled serial number.

The system displays the latest assembled one.
f) Choose the Issues view.

The system displays the holds that have been recorded for the serial number.
g) Choose the Defects view.

The system displays the defects recorded for the serial number.
h) Choose the Operation Activities view.

The system displays the list of activities that the serial number have been to. You can
navigate to the details of each operation activity and view its action log.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 4
Lesson 5
Executing Non-Serialized Production Process
and Monitoring Production Results
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Non-Serialized Production Process

In the area of complex assembly manufacturing, serialization is typically applied to the
following:
● Final assemblies (that is, engine, aircraft).
● Expensive or hazardous parts, parts that have to be properly recycled or maintained
further (that is, gears are serialized as they may come apart during the usage and they
want to trace how the part was treated, manufactured with what temperature).
● Time sensitive materials (that is, parts that are allowed to run a certain amount of time
(15000 hours) and then the part shall be removed/replaced). These removed parts can be
then added to a different main part (repurpose).
However, there are many sub-assemblies that have been produced in non-serialized mode,
without any quantity tracking during the production process, but relying on the final quantities
confirmed at the very last operation of the order. Without the need to serialize, business can
run more easily, as manufacturers do not have to monitor and confirm individuals but process
a bulk of materials together. This mainly refers to sub-assemblies, such as bolts, turbine
housing, and so on.

Figure 163: Example of a Non-Serialized Product
The difference between serialized and non-serialized production lies in the way the production
data is collected and stored, and later viewed.
● Serialized production envisions the creation of an individually tracked serial number for
each instance of a production order. For example, if the production order quantity is 3, the
system creates three serial numbers. Execution and yield/scrap confirmation is done
separately for each of them. The production data, such as inspection results, defect
information, and component consumption, is stored and viewed per serial number using
the Product Genealogy app.
● Non-serialized production allows you to process the quantities without uniquely identifying
them. If the production order quantity is 3, the production worker can report 2 as yield and
1 as scrap accordingly. Production data such as inspection results and defect information
is recorded and stored against production order. Consumption of components happens
based on the BOM item quantity assigned to an operation activity with respect to the order
header quantity to be produced at the operation activity.
To start non-serialized production, it is required that the following steps are completed:
● The main material (without serial number profile assignment) has been defined in the
system
● The material components have been defined and added to the manufacturing BOM
● The routing for non-serialized production process has been created in the system and the
corresponding material with the MBOM has been assigned to it
● The production order for non-serialized material has been created and released in SAP S/
4HANA PEO
To process a non-serialized production order, you can use the following apps:
● Manage Work Center Queue
● My Work Queue

Lesson: Executing Non-Serialized Production Process and Monitoring Production Results
In the Perform Work (Order/Operation) app, when you enter a production order and operation
name, the system navigates to the Perform Operation app and displays all operation activities
of the selected operation.
In the header of the screen, the system displays planned operation quantity, confirmed, as
well as the scrapped quantity, if any.
Figure 164: Quantities
Animation: Quantities
For more information on Quantities, please view the animation in the lesson
Executing Non-Serialized Production Process and Monitoring Production
Results, in your online course.
In SAP S/4HANA PEO, for an operation, along with Produce, it is possible to define Setup and
Teardown operation segments. If there is a setup segment defined for an operation in the
shop floor routing, its operation activities must be executed prior to an operation activity of
the produce segment to be started. Operation activities of the Teardown segment will not
block the production operator to start the next operation activity of the Produce segment,
however, all operation activities of the Teardown segment must be completed to close the
production order.
The Setup and Teardown segments are independent of a quantity, however they take part in
scheduling for the operation and duration is tracked for them.
To start processing an operation activity, use the Execute button. The system navigates to the
Perform Operation Activity screen.
Use the Components view enter serial/batch number for a component or scan icon in the
Action column to defined consumed quantity in case component is non-serialized.
To report yield and/or scrap for an operation activity, use the Post button available in the
footer bar. The system displays the Post Quantity dialog box. As default, the system enters
the planned quantity as yield. Adjust the quantities if necessary.

Figure 166: Post Quantity
● Choose Post if you need to go on working on the current operation activity or if a buyoff
has to be performed.
● Choose Complete if you can complete the operation activity with the posting of yield and
scrap.
In the action log for the operation activity, you can display the posted quantities. To open the
operation activity action log, choose the Action Log icon in the footer bar.
Note:
You can also use the Production Action Log app to view this information; there,
you need to specify order number and start search to view the results.
Figure 167: Action Log
If you can complete the operation activity, you can continue working on the next operation
activity.

An operation activity can be skipped if allowed by status and action schema (SAS) assigned
to an operation activity.
Note:
For more information about defining and using status and action schemas, see
unit 16.


Unit 4
Exercise 14
Execute Non-Serialized Production Process
and Monitor Production Results
Simulation: Execute Non-Serialized Production Process and Monitor Production

Results
For more information on Execute Non-Serialized Production Process and
Monitor Production Results, please view the simulation in the lesson Executing
Non-Serialized Production Process and Monitoring Production Results in your
online course.
Business Example
complex products. The company wants the ability to execute production in a non-serialized
way, but still have the possibility to collect quality data, record defects, and report produced
yield and scrap. It is also important for the company to be able to view the production
progress and history for non-serialized materials. John needs to explain how to release
production orders for non-serialized materials in SAP S/4HANA PEO, execute production,
collect inspection data, as well as report yield and scrap quantities for them. Finally, John
needs to explain where production data can be viewed when the production process has been
completed and the order has been confirmed.
Note:
1. Create an MBOM for the non-serialized material BLCON-## using the Maintain Bill of
Material app. Add two components to it: ABS Granules and Macrolex R Polymer Dye.
2. Create a shop floor routing for the non-serialized material BLCON-## using the following
data:
Table 4: New Routing Data

Routing Values
Routing Description BLCON-##
Description Blue Console ##
Flexible Processing Deselect

Plant 1020

Routing Values
UoM (Lot Size) EA
Material MBOM BLCON-##
Table 5: Structure Workspace Data

Operation 0010
Description Produce Console
Control Key PP01
Description Add ABS Granules
Description Heat Granules
3. Create and release a shop floor order for the BLCON-## (Blue Console) non-serialized
material.
4. Execute the production order for the non-serialized material BLCON-##, post 4 yield.
5. Record a defect for the non-serialized material BLCON-## and scrap 2 pieces via defect
recording.

Unit 4
Solution 14
Execute Non-Serialized Production Process
and Monitor Production Results
Simulation: Execute Non-Serialized Production Process and Monitor Production

Results
For more information on Execute Non-Serialized Production Process and
Monitor Production Results, please view the simulation in the lesson Executing
Non-Serialized Production Process and Monitoring Production Results in your
online course.
Business Example
complex products. The company wants the ability to execute production in a non-serialized
way, but still have the possibility to collect quality data, record defects, and report produced
yield and scrap. It is also important for the company to be able to view the production
progress and history for non-serialized materials. John needs to explain how to release
production orders for non-serialized materials in SAP S/4HANA PEO, execute production,
collect inspection data, as well as report yield and scrap quantities for them. Finally, John
needs to explain where production data can be viewed when the production process has been
completed and the order has been confirmed.
Note:
1. Create an MBOM for the non-serialized material BLCON-## using the Maintain Bill of
Material app. Add two components to it: ABS Granules and Macrolex R Polymer Dye.
b) Navigate to the Maintain Bill of Material app in the Production Engineering group on the
SAP Fiori launchpad.
c) Choose Create Version BOM.
d) In the Material field, enter BLCON-##.
e) In the Plant field, enter 1020.
f) In the BOM Usage field, enter V.
g) Choose OK.

h) In the Component field, enter ABS-##.
i) In the Quantity field, enter 10.
j) In the Component field, enter MARPD-##.
k) In the Quantity field, enter 1.
l) Choose Save.
m) In the upper-right corner of the screen, choose Release.
n) Choose OK in the dialog box to confirm.
2. Create a shop floor routing for the non-serialized material BLCON-## using the following
data:
Table 4: New Routing Data

Routing Values
Routing Description BLCON-##
Description Blue Console ##
Flexible Processing Deselect

Plant 1020
UoM (Lot Size) EA
Material MBOM BLCON-##
Table 5: Structure Workspace Data

Operation 0010
Description Produce Console
Control Key PP01
Description Add ABS Granules
Description Heat Granules
a) Navigate to the Manage Shop Floor Routings app on the SAP Fiori launchpad.
b) Choose the Create button and select New Routing.
c) On the entry screen, enter the data provided in the table, New Routing Data.
d) Choose Execute.
e) In the Structure Workspace, create one operation with two activities using the data
provided in the table, Structure Workspace Data.

f) Choose Save.
g) Select the Component Assignment Workspace in the upper-left corner.
h) Assign the component ABS Granules to the operation activity Add ABS Granules
(OA10).
i) Assign the component Macrolex R Polymer Dye to the operation activity Heat Granules
(OA20).
j) Choose the Save and Release button.

The system performs a consistency check and if no errors exist, the routing is
released.
k) In the Routing Version field, enter PV##.
l) In the Description field, enter any text for the production version.
m) Choose OK.
The system creates the routing with the production version.
3. Create and release a shop floor order for the BLCON-## (Blue Console) non-serialized
material.
c) In the Material field, enter BLCON-##.
d) In the Plant field, enter 1020.
e) In the Order Type field, enter PP01.
f) Choose Continue.
g) In the Total Qty field, enter 10.
h) In the Scheduling Type dropdown, select Current date.
i) In the Production Supervisor field in the Assignment view, enter DMO.
j) Make sure that the PV## Production Version has been picked for the order in the
Master Data view.
k) Choose Release.
l) Choose Save.
Note:
Note down or copy the order number!
4. Execute the production order for the non-serialized material BLCON-##, post 4 yield.
b) In the Order field, enter the order number that you have noted down.

d) Choose Go.
The system navigates to the Perform Operation Activity app.
f) Search and enter the batch number from the available list for components ABS-## in
OA10 and MARPD-## in OA20.
g) Choose the Post button in the footer bar.
h) In the Yield field, enter 7.
i) Choose the Post button in the dialog box.
j) Refresh your browser.
k) Choose the Post button in the footer.

The system proposes the remaining yield quantity to post.
l) Choose the Complete button in the dialog.

The system posts the remaining yield quantity and it becomes available to process at
the next operation activity.
m) Choose the Complete button only for the component ABS-## in OA10.
Note:
Do not complete OA20 before finishing the record a defect section in the
next step, step 5.
n) Choose the Navigate to icon in the footer bar and select the Show operation details
option.
o) The system navigates back to the Perform Operation Activity app.
Note:
The completed quantity at the first operation activity becomes the ready
quantity at the next operation activity.
5. Record a defect for the non-serialized material BLCON-## and scrap 2 pieces via defect
recording.
a) Choose the Execute button in the row with the next operation activity, Heat Granules
(20).
b) Choose the Record Defect button in the footer bar for the MARPD-## material.
c) In the Defective Quantity field, enter 2.
d) Choose the Create button in the dialog box.

The system creates a defect and displays it in the Defects view on the right in the
Perform Operation Activity screen. Note down the defect number.

Note:
Normally, the system should display the defect code on the right. At the
moment, this is not showing due to a bug.
e) Go to the Process Defects app in the Defect Recording group on the SAP Fiori
launchpad, or by clicking the defect number on the left side.
f) In the Process Defect app, in the Defect Code field, search for defect code 31 Wrong
Material.
g) Choose Go.
h) Choose the chevron icon next to the line with the defect.
The system navigates to the details of the selected defect.
i) Choose the Edit button on the upper-right corner of the screen.
j) Choose the Tasks view and then choose the create icon.
k) In the Task Code field, enter Scrap and choose Enter.
l) Choose Save in the footer bar.

The system records the defect decision and executes a follow-up action to mark
quantity for scrap.
m) Navigate to the Perform Work (Order/Operation) app in the Shop Floor Control and
n) In the Order field, enter the order number that you have worked with.
o) In the Operation field, enter 0010.
p) Choose the Execute button next to the operation activity Heat Granules (OA20).
The system navigates to the Perform Operation Activity screen. On the right side of the
screen, the Defects view shows the defect decision Scrap.
q) Choose the Complete button in the footer bar.

The system displays the error message because some quantity has to be scrapped.
r) Choose the Post button in the footer bar.
s) Enter some yield quantity and some scrap quantity.
t) Choose the Complete button in the dialog.

The system completes the operation activity and records yield and scrap for the order.
u) Navigate to the Manage Production Orders app in the Shop Floor Control and
v) In the Order field on the header filter bar, enter the order number that you have noted
down.
w) Choose Go.
The system finds the order. The Issues column shows the quantity issue, because
scrap quantities have been reported.
x) Choose the chevron button at the end of the line to view the order details.

y) Choose the Defects view to see the defect details.
z) Choose the Order Schedule view and then choose any operation to view its details.

LESSON SUMMARY


Unit 4
Learning Assessment
1. How can you create a shop floor order in SAP S/4HANA?

X A With transaction MSRF4
X B With the Manage Shop Floor Routing app
X C With the Manage Bill of Material app
X D With transaction VMP_MAINTAIN
2. Which of the following functionalities are available in the Assign Work app?
X A Assign one or more operators to one or more operation activities
X B Display a number of current user assignments and qualifications assigned to a user
X C View the progress of each production operation
X D Specify the target duration for an operation activity during an assignment
X E Unassign users from an operation activity
X F View current issues for each operation (for example, a particular operation is on
hold or delayed) and determine the cause of the issue
3. Is it possible to consume serialized and non-serialized components in one operation

activity in the Perform Work app?
X A Yes
X B No

4. Which roles are included in the rework routing process flow?

X A HR Officer
X B Production Engineer
X C Production Operator
X D CEO
X E Logistic Manager
X F Quality Engineer
X G Production Supervisor
5. Which apps can be used for monitoring defect information during the production process
in SAP S/4HANA PEO?
X A Product Genealogy
X B Extended Error Log
X C Manage Production Orders
X D Recorded Defects
6. Is it possible to disassemble a component temporarily, permanently, or both?

X A Yes
X B No

7. The following functionalities are provided for managing the production process in either
the Product Genealogy app or the As-Built Report app. Match each functionality to the
correct app.
Functionality App
Display result recordings for Product Genealogy
individual inspection points
Product Genealogy
Display a list of operation ac-
Product Genealogy
tivities defined and/or execut-
ed for the serialized material As-Built Report
Display a list of disassembled As-Built Report
serial/batch numbers
As-Built Report
Display Built hierarchy
Display reference designators
Display used equipment
8. Which of the following are required to start a non-serialized production?

X A Main material (with assigned serial number profile) is defined in the system
X B Production order for non-serialized material is in the status In Process
X C Material components are defined and added to the MBOM
X D Routing for a non-serialized production process is created and the corresponding

material is assigned to the MBOM


UNIT 5 Unitized Products and the
Complex Assembly/Installation
Process
Lesson 1
Understanding the Complex Assembly Process 217
Lesson 2
Understanding the Concept of Parameter Effectivity 225
Lesson 3
Preparing MBOM Creation for a Unitized Product 235
Exercise 15: Prepare MBOM Creation for a Unitized Product for Shared Teams 237
Lesson 4
Handing Over EBOM to MBOM, Creating Related Planning Scopes, Creating Installation Kits, and 241
Maintaining Parameter Effectivity
Exercise 16: Hand Over EBOM to MBOM, Create Related Planning Scopes, Create 243
Installation Kits, and Maintain Parameter Effectivity
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Explain the different types of assemblies required to define the complex assembly process
and their distinguishing characteristics
● Understand the concept of parameter effectivity
● Create a change record and related planning scope for the EBOM to MBOM handover of a
unitized product
● Hand over EBOM to MBOM, create related planning scopes, creating installation kits, and
maintaining parameter effectivity

Unit 5: Unitized Products and the Complex Assembly/Installation Process

Unit 5
Lesson 1
Understanding the Complex Assembly Process
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Overview of the Complex Assembly Process in SAP S/4HANA PEO

The challenges faced by enterprises in manufacturing complex technical products such as
aircraft, ships, and power stations are significant. They include assembling thousands if not
millions of components, managing production processes over a long period of time, and
assembling all components in a feasible sequence and coordinated manner. Furthermore,
there is a need to consider engineering changes even if the assembly process has already
started.
SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for production engineering and operations (PEO) considers all
of these factors in complex assembly, which are difficult to realize in classic production
processes, and provides an effective and efficient way for you to plan, manage, and execute
your complex assembly processes.
To do this, SAP S/4HANA PEO distinguishes between the different types of assemblies in
complex assembly, which are represented in the SAP system by materials with different
material types, as illustrated in the following figure.

Figure 169: Assembly Types
Animation: Assembly Types

For more information on Assembly Types, please view the animation in the
lesson Understanding the Complex Assembly Process, in your online course.
Types of Assemblies
End Items
An end item is the final product, that is, the result of the complex assembly process. The end
item is the root node of a BOM hierarchy. Customers order end items and spare parts for
them.
Main Components of End Items

An end item is usually not represented by a single bill of material (BOM), but by a set of BOMs
– in other words, major assemblies, which allow you to divide the assembly process into
manageable pieces. The major assemblies of an end item are usually known well in advance.
For example, aircraft often consist of a fuselage section, left and right wing, and tail wings.
However, complex assembly allows you to break your end item into as many major
assemblies as you need.
Most of the engineering and assembly effort is required to design and build the major
assemblies. This allows early planning on a very high level. When you decide to build an end
item, you can start allocating resources to the engineering and assembly of the different
major assemblies. You can also start the procurement process for purchased parts with long
lead times, such as jet engines.

Lesson: Understanding the Complex Assembly Process
Distinguishing Characteristics of End Items

To distinguish them from spare parts, end items have a different material type. Every instance
of an end item usually has the same set of major assemblies. The major assemblies, however,
are often specially engineered or configured to meet engineering or customer requirements.
The special configuration of an individual end item instance is defined at end item level using
either parameter effectivity or variant configuration.
Major Assemblies
Major assemblies are the components of an end item and represent a large section of the
product (for example, the major assemblies of an aircraft are the wings, center fuselage
section, and so on). They often have thousands of parts. Product or design engineers design
major assemblies and create engineering BOMs (EBOMs) that contain a flat list of the many
components for each of them.
Main Components of Major Assemblies

The main components of major assemblies are installation kits, which are used to break the
major assembly into manageable pieces.
Distinguishing Characteristics of Major Assemblies

A major assembly does not have a routing or production order associated with it and is not
MRP relevant (unless it is part of installation kit). Major assemblies are specially engineered or
configured to meet engineering or customer requirements. In aircraft manufacturing, for
example, model and unit represent the special configuration of an individual major assembly.
Every EBOM item is valid for a certain model and a range of units. Product engineers make
sure the set of components of every model and unit is complete and consistent. For example,
dependencies can exist between the different major assemblies like the joins between two
major assemblies or symmetry constraints. If you have to replace a left-wing component for a
certain model and unit, you must also replace the corresponding right-wing component.
Installation Kits
All installation kits together contain the components of a major assembly. A major assembly
can have several hundred installation kits, each of which contains the components for the
specific part of the major assembly. For example, the installation kits for one major assembly
of an aircraft could be the skeleton of a wing, the fuel system, or the electrical system. Each
installation kit usually contains components that can be assembled in the same area or at the
same time, by an operator who is qualified to assemble all the components in the installation
kit.
Main Components of Installation Kits

The production engineer selects components for a specific major assembly by moving
components from the engineering BOM (EBOM) of a major assembly to its manufacturing
BOM (MBOM). Within the major assembly’s MBOM, the production engineer groups
components into installation kits and the MBOMs of each installation kit group together
subsets of the EBOM components that are to be assembled together. This process allows the
production engineer to break the major assembly into manageable pieces.
The production engineer creates a routing for each installation kit, which explains how
production operators assemble the different components of the installation kit into the major
assembly. For every installation kit, a special type of production order called an installation
order is created by exploding the installation kit’s BOM and routing. Installation orders
instruct production operators to assemble the components in an installation kit for a major
assembly.

Distinguishing Characteristics of Installation Kits

In SAP S/4HANA PEO, an installation kit is an artificial material and not an engineering
material. It is an organizational breakdown of the major assembly: Cutting the large BOM and
the immense work that needs to be done to produce the major assembly into portions that
are easier to be handled. It is MRP-relevant and MBOMs, routings, and planned and
production orders can be created for installation kits. However, they cannot be stored or
transported as single units. Installation kits are always assembled as part of a major
assembly.
Raw Materials and Inventory-Managed Subassemblies

Installation kits can contain raw materials and inventory-managed subassemblies, which are
either procured to stock, made to stock, or made to project. They are issued from inventory
by the installation kit’s production orders.
Raw materials are procured using the regular SAP S/4HANA purchasing processes. The
inventory-managed subassemblies can be manufactured using either the regular SAP S/
4HANA manufacturing processes or SAP S/4HANA PEO.
Example: Major Assembly

The following example illustrates how a major assembly can be sliced down into manageable
pieces (installation kits).
Figure 171: Right Wing (Major Assembly)
Installation Kits of Right Wing

Assembly of the right wing (or any other major assembly) must be divided into manageable
tasks such as assembling the frame (white parts), the hinges for the flaps (orange parts), the
electronics (blue, green, and red parts) and the hydraulic system (brown parts). These
colored parts are the components of the different installation kits.

Figure 172: Installation Kits of Right Wing
Installation Kits
Figure 173: Installation Kits
The installation kits shown above (hydraulic system and electronics) have to be assembled
into an existing frame. They are not a typical subassembly that can be manufactured, put into
a warehouse, and issued when needed.
Installation kits can be defined in the Visual Enterprise Manufacturing Planner during EBOM to
MBOM handover.

Material Types Creation for Major Assembly Production

The material types that represent the different parts of the major assembly production
process can be defined in Customizing. The purpose of defining material types can be
summarized as follows:
● Material types define the BOM levels that are planned in the project system and the BOM
levels that are planned in production planning. End items and major assemblies are
planned in the project system, whereas the production or procurement of regular finished
materials, semi-finished materials, and raw materials is planned and executed in
production planning. Installation kits are the interface between the project system and
production planning. The project system creates component demand for installation kits
and production planning creates installation orders to cover the component demand.
● By defining material types, you can simplify material master maintenance, because it only
shows material views that you have defined in the material type. For example,
maintenance of sales and purchasing data is not required for installation kits.
● The definition of material types allows you to perform material-type-dependent
validations. For example, all installation kits must have the individual/collective
requirements indicator 1 and a serial number profile for automatic generation of serial
numbers on order release. You can use a BAdI implementation to validate material master
attributes.
● You can configure BOM maintenance to only allow installation kits as components of
manufacturing BOMs of major assemblies. Furthermore, you can configure BOM
maintenance to prevent installation kits from being specified as components of
engineering BOMs.
Caution:
SAP does not ship predefined material types for major assemblies and
installation kits.
In Customizing under Logistics – General → Material Master → Basic Settings → Material

Types → Define Attributes of Material Types, the following material types can be copied to
create material types for major assemblies and installation kits:
● Copy material type FERT to create material type MASS (Major Assembly).
● Copy material type FERT to create material type EITM (End Item).
● Copy material type FERT to create material type IKIT (Installation Kit).
- Set External Purchase Orders to 0.
- Warehousing, sales, purchasing, or forecasting data should be removed for the material
type.
● Copy material type HALB to create material type UNFR (Finished Unitized Materials).
● Copy material type HALB to create material type UNSF (Semi-Finished Unitized
Materials).

Additional Attributes for Material Types

The model-unit parameter effectivity should be assigned to complex assembly material types
to allow the system to recognize major assemblies, installation kits, and manufactured parts.
When processing major assemblies and installation kits, the system frequently has to
differentiate end items and major assemblies from installation kits and regular materials. The
differentiation is important in complex assembly, where the assembly of installation kits into
major assemblies is controlled by projects but manufactured parts are assembled using
production orders. The model-unit effectivity type is defined for this purpose.
The following entries should be added in Customizing under Production → Manufacturing for
Production Engineering and Operations → Cross-Applications → Unitized Product → Define
Additional Attributes for Material Type:
Material Type Effectivity Type AssyType

EITM MODELUNIT End Items
IKIT MODELUNIT Installation Kits
MASS MODELUNIT Major Assemblies
UNSF MODELUNIT Manufactured Parts
Note:
The material types and effectivity type in the table above are examples.
Set Up BOMs for Major Assembly Production

The settings could be configured to ensure that BOMs recognize and handle the material
types correctly. For example, to ensure the BOM of an end item consists of major assemblies
only, the engineering BOM of a major assembly consists of regular purchased or
manufactured parts, and the manufacturing BOM of a major assembly consists of installation
kits only.
You can also define which component material types are allowed in the BOM of a certain
parent material type. This is an optional activity, which is only required if you want BOM
maintenance to check the component material types.
Configure BOM Header

The following entries should be added in Customizing for Production Planning for Process
Industries → Master Data → Master Recipe → Material List → General Data → Define Allowed
Material Types for BOM Header:
BOM Usage Material Type Header Allowed

E * +
E IKIT -
V * +

Caution:
SAP does not ship BOM usages E and V by default.
Configure BOM Item

The following entries should be added in Customizing for Production → Basic Data → Bill of
Material → Item Data → Define Allowed Material Types for BOM Item:
BOM Usage Material Type Header Material Type BOM Allowed

Item
E * * +
E MASS EITM -
E MASS IKIT -
V EITM MASS +
V FERT * +
V FERT IKIT -
V HALB * +
V HALB IKIT -
V IKIT FERT +
V IKIT HALB +
V IKIT PIPE +
V IKIT ROH +
V MASS IKIT +
Hint:
If you want to nest major assemblies, add the following entry:
BOM Usage Material Type Material Type Allowed

Header BOM Item
V MASS MASS +
LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 5
Lesson 2
Understanding the Concept of Parameter
Effectivity
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Parameter Effectivity for Product Unitization

Product unitization is used to control the applicability of BOM items and routing operations/
operation activities in a BOM and routing respectively, based on parameters such as material,
serial number, model, unit, variant and so on. Using unitized parameter effectivity, you can
manage multiple configurations of an assembly and its production process plan (routing), so
that all the possible units can be modeled using the same super BOM and super routing.
When a particular unit is to be produced, the super BOM and related super routing are filtered
to retrieve the information relevant for that unit only. This information is then assigned to the
production order.
When a particular unit is to be produced, the super BOM and related super routing are filtered
to retrieve the information relevant for that unit only. This information is then assigned to the
production order.
Figure 174: Unitized Parameter Effectivity

Figure 175: Parameter Effectivity
Figure 176: Parameter Effectivity
Animation: Parameter Effectivity

For more information on Parameter Effectivity, please view the animation in the
lesson Understanding the Concept of Parameter Effectivity, in your online
course.
The classical parameter effectivity is used as a foundation for supporting the patterns for
product unitization.
Unitization (or model/unit pattern) is built on this classical parameter effectivity function to
make use of certain semantic patterns and rules to ensure:
● Accurate incorporation of version-controlled EBOMs into MBOMs
● Compatible match between BOM components and routing operation activities. For
example, only assign a component applicable for units 1 to 10 to operation activities which
are applicable for these units.
The user interface for specifying parameter effectivity for BOM and routing is simple so that
you can enter the effectivity values directly. There is no need to generate an engineering
change number (ECN) first. The system automatically assigns the ECN that matches the
assigned parameter effectivity, if available. If not, the system creates a new ECN for the
applied effectivity.
Parameter Effectivity – Basic Configuration

Parameter effectivity is a pre-existing functionality for managing product configuration. The
configuration of the parameters required for effectivity, their descriptions, and effectivity type
is done in Customizing (transaction SPRO) under Cross-Application
Components → Engineering Change Management → Parameter Effectivity.

Lesson: Understanding the Concept of Parameter Effectivity
Note:
SAP pre-delivers some parameters which can be used such as material and serial
numbers. You can also create new parameters, if required.
Create effectivity type using one or more effectivity parameters.
Note:
An effectivity type with only one numeric “range” parameter could be used for
unitization. All other parameters must be single value (type S).
Enable Effectivity Type for Unitization

Once you have enabled product unitization, you select the effectivity type to be used for
unitization and its parameters in Customizing (transaction SPRO) under
Production → Manufacturing for Production Engineering and Operations → Cross-
Applications → Unitized Product → Configure Parameter for Product Unitization. A unitization
parameter is a model, variant, or unit for which a component can be used.
Map Unitized Effectivity to Material Type

You can configure multiple effectivity types for unitization. In this case, it is necessary to
specify which effectivity type should be used for which material type. You define the
additional attributes for the material type in Customizing (transaction SPRO) under
Production → > Manufacturing for Production Engineering and Operations → Basic
Settings → Define Additional Attributes for Material Type.
Unitized and Non-Unitized Materials

Unitized materials are manufactured materials for which the bill of material (BOM) depends
on parameter effectivity. In contrast, non-unitized materials are manufactured materials for
which the BOM does not depend on parameter effectivity.
The engineering bill of material (EBOM) of a major assembly contains regular purchased or
manufactured materials. The BOMs of manufactured materials may or may not depend on
parameter effectivity (such as the finished material’s model and unit). Production planning
must separate the component demand of different units if the material is unitized, otherwise
BOM explosion might explode the BOM for a wrong unit. Unitized materials require a
production order for every unit and must also be serialized, which requires a serial number
profile to be specified in the material master.

Figure 178: Unitization Pattern Examples
Figure 179: Model, Variant, Unit
Parameter Effectivity in the EBOM to MBOM Handover Process

Parameter effectivity can be maintained for BOM items in the version-controlled BOMs in the
Maintain Bill of Materials app. If the header material type is unitized, the parameter effectivity
values shall be assigned to all its BOM components.

Figure 180: BOM Components List
Figure 181: Component Details
The effectivity of a BOM item can be changed like any other attribute from the BOM Item
Details page.
Hint:
You can copy the entire effectivity from one BOM item and paste it to other BOM
items using the Copy Effectivity option.
VEMP also supports the EBOM to MBOM incorporation and reconciliation using parameter
effectivity:
● The parameter effectivity for BOM items is transferred from the EBOM to the MBOM
during the handover process. It can be modified for MBOM components, if required.

Figure 182: Edit Effectivity
● The parameter effectivity is displayed in the tree table in condensed format and in the side
panel.
Figure 183: Effectivity Display
● EBOM components can be split and consumed by multiple MBOM assemblies based on
quantity and parameter effectivity.

Figure 184: Components Consumed by Multiple Assemblies
● The quantity and effectivity of EBOM components must match the overall quantity and
effectivity of all the corresponding MBOM splits. Any mismatches between the EBOM and
MBOM item due to quantity and/or effectivity are highlighted on both the EBOM and
MBOM component.
Figure 185: Mismatched Effectivity or Quantity
● The BOM Item Coverage report for any EBOM component can be triggered from the
source panel to show the exact inconsistency.

Figure 186: BOM Item Coverage
● VEMP allows you to allocate MBOM components to routing operations. (The more detailed
assignment of components to routing operation activities is done in the Manage Shop Floor
Routing app). The system validates the applicability of the operation for the BOM
component. The effectivity of the operation must cover the effectivity of the BOM item.
Figure 187: Allocate Components to Routing Operations
Hint:
In VEMP you can trigger creation of a new routing or load an existing one.

Figure 188: Create or Load Routing
Major Assembly Production Setup

Before you can use SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for production engineering and operations
for complex assembly, certain setup activities need to be performed once to ensure that you
can complete the process steps in major assembly production.
The following table lists the setup tasks required:
Activity Role(s) Description

Assign Necessary Roles to HR Specialist You assign the necessary
Users roles to users when employ-
ees are hired or take up a new
role.
Configure Model-Unit Effec- Production Process Special- You define parameter effec-
tivity ist tivity to implement model-
unit effectivity.
Create Material Types Production Process Special- You define material types
ist that represent the different
parts of the major assembly
production process. Material
types define the BOM levels
that are planned in the
project system and in pro-
duction planning.
Configure BOMS for Major Production Process Special- You make settings to ensure
Assembly Production ist that BOMs recognize and
handle the material types
correctly.
Set Up Routings for Major As- Production Process Special- You prevent the system from
sembly Production ist creating shop floor routings
for major assemblies and end
items.

Define Additional Attributes Production Process Special- You create a serial number
for Material Types ist profile that is used specifical-
ly for installation kits.
Create a Serial Number Pro- Production Process Special- You create a serial number
file for Installation Kits ist profile that is used specifical-
ly for installation kits.
Set Up Production Schedul- Production Process Special- You define a scheduling pro-
ing Profiles ist file to automatically deter-
mine the correct order type
when you create production
orders for installation kits
and to enable automatic
goods receipts when the last
operation of the production
order for an installation kit is
confirmed.
Configure Network Type for Production Process Special- This is only relevant if you
Manual Confirmation of Net- ist want to manually check that
work Activities components in an installation
kit have been assembled be-
fore adding them to the ma-
jor assembly’s BOM.
Define the Project Coding Production Process Special- You define a project coding
Mask ist mask, which specifies how
WBS element IDs are deter-
mined from the project ID.
Create a Project Profile Production Process Special- You create a project profile to
ist define defaults for various at-
tributes of a project, its WBS
elements, and its networks.
Assign Yourself to an Area of Production Process Special- To monitor the materials you
Responsibility ist are responsible for, you need
to assign yourself to an area
of responsibility.
Implement BAdIs Production Process Special- To ensure that major assem-
ist bly production works correct-
ly, you have to implement
Software Developer (ABAP)
certain Business Add-Ins
(BAdIs).
LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 5
Lesson 3
Preparing MBOM Creation for a Unitized
Product
LESSON OBJECTIVES
unitized product
Preparation of MBOM Creation for a Unitized Product

Before the handover from an unitized visual EBOM to an MBOM is complete, you must create
a change record and planning scope needs, as explained in detail in Unit 2. However, in this
scenario we want to split the planning of our mayor unitized assembly into two separate
planning scopes, one for each installation kit. To realize that, we need to create such planning
scopes as related planning scopes.
Related Planning Scopes

To distribute responsibilities between different teams and work on large complex assemblies,
you can create related planning scopes for the same source structure (EBOM).
For example, the major assembly aircraft wing is divided into planning scopes for planning the
skeleton, hydraulics, electronics, flaps, aileron and so on. The multiple related planning
scopes created for the major assembly allow you to distribute the work between different
teams and ensure single consumption of the source structure’s components across all the
related planning scopes: A component consumed in the first related planning scope is not
available for consumption in other related planning scopes.
The Related Planning Scope flag can be set when the planning scope is created either with the
transaction VMP_MAINTAIN or with the Manage Unassigned EBOM app.
Figure 189: Related Planning Scope


Unit 5
Exercise 15
Prepare MBOM Creation for a Unitized Product
for Shared Teams
Simulation: Prepare MBOM Creation for a Unitized Product for Shared Teams
For more information on Prepare MBOM Creation for a Unitized Product for
Shared Teams, please view the simulation in the lesson Preparing MBOM
Creation for a Unitized Product in your online course.
Business Example
of complex products. He is in charge of creating change records and planning scopes as
preparation for the EBOM to MBOM handover. Based on complexity and localization of
resources he decides whether there has to be only one or more related planning scopes to be
created.
Note:
1. Create a new planning scope and change record for material CABIN-## in plant 1020 and
select the Related Planning Scope checkbox. Use the Manage Unassigned EBOMs app.
The system navigates to the created change record.

Unit 5
Solution 15
Prepare MBOM Creation for a Unitized Product
for Shared Teams
Simulation: Prepare MBOM Creation for a Unitized Product for Shared Teams
For more information on Prepare MBOM Creation for a Unitized Product for
Shared Teams, please view the simulation in the lesson Preparing MBOM
Creation for a Unitized Product in your online course.
Business Example
of complex products. He is in charge of creating change records and planning scopes as
preparation for the EBOM to MBOM handover. Based on complexity and localization of
resources he decides whether there has to be only one or more related planning scopes to be
created.
Note:
1. Create a new planning scope and change record for material CABIN-## in plant 1020 and
select the Related Planning Scope checkbox. Use the Manage Unassigned EBOMs app.
b) Navigate to the Manage Unassigned EBOMs app in the Production Engineering group
c) When the Manage Unassigned EBOMs app opens, a dialog box appears. In the dialog
box, in the Production Plant field, enter 1020.
d) Search for the following material data and choose Go:
● Material: CABIN-##
● EBOM Type: Group EBOM
The system finds the available EBOM for the specified material.
e) Choose Assign.
The system displays the screen to create a new planning scope and change record.
f) Choose Create in the Planning Scope section.

Lesson: Preparing MBOM Creation for a Unitized Product
g) Enter the following data in the Create Planning Scope screen and choose Create:
● Description: For example, First Team of Engineers
● Related Planning Scope: Select
● BOM Usage: Execution Only
● Shop Floor BOM Usage: Versioned BOM
h) Choose the Create button on the Change Record screen.
i) Enter the following data in the Create Change Record screen and choose Create:
● Record Type: MFG
● Change Record Description: For example, CABIN-##
● Change Responsible: Your business partner ID
j) Choose the Assign and Navigate button.
Note:
If the system proposes additional unassigned EBOMs to include in the
same change record in a pop-up window, do not select any of those
materials, and choose OK.
The system navigates to the created change record.

LESSON SUMMARY
unitized product

Unit 5
Lesson 4
Handing Over EBOM to MBOM, Creating
Related Planning Scopes, Creating Installation
Kits, and Maintaining Parameter Effectivity
LESSON OVERVIEW
Business Example
Eric and Paul are production engineers in different teams in the low-volume A&D Company
focusing on the final assembly of complex products. They are responsible for the EBOM to
MBOM handover as well as the creation of MBOMs for major assemblies and installation kits.
They will hand over a major assembly to manufacturing using two related planning scopes.
They will also define installation kits in VEMP as required.
LESSON OBJECTIVES


Unit 5
Exercise 16
Hand Over EBOM to MBOM, Create Related
Planning Scopes, Create Installation Kits, and
Maintain Parameter Effectivity
Simulation: Hand Over EBOM to MBOM, Create Related Planning Scopes, Create
For more information on Hand Over EBOM to MBOM, Create Related Planning
Scopes, Create Installation Kits, and Maintain Parameter Effectivity, please view
the simulation in the lesson Handing Over EBOM to MBOM, Creating Related
Planning Scopes, Creating Installation Kits, and Maintaining Parameter
Effectivity in your online course.
Business Example
They need to hand over a major assembly to manufacturing using two related planning
scopes. They also need to define installation kits in VEMP as required.
Note:
Task 1: Hand Over EBOM to MBOM with Parameter Effectivity and Create Installation Kits
(First Team of Engineers)
1. In VEMP for the major assembly CABIN-##, create a new manufacturing structure for the
installation kit INSTCABIN-##.
2. Move the components STCON-##, WINDOW-##, BLROOF-##, and RDROOF-## from the
Source Panel to the newly created installation kit.
Note:
You can do this using drag and drop. Or, you can choose the components in
the Source Panel (use the Ctrl or Shift keys to choose multiple components)
and from the Source Panel toolbar or from the context menu, choose Add to
Working Panel. You can also use the Ctrl+Q keyboard shortcut to add
components to the Working Panel.

The system adds STCON-##, WINDOW-##, BLROOF-## and RDROOF-## to the Working
Panel as components of the new manufacturing structure for the installation kit (IK)
INSTCABIN-## with the effectivity that was defined for the EBOM.
3. Add the parameter effectivity information M1 1-25, M2 10-50, and M3 5-9 to the
4. Move the completed structure back to the Target Panel and choose Save and Exit to return
to the Change Record app.
(Second Team of Engineers)
1. In the Cockpit for VMP app, create a new related planning scope with the description
Second Team of Engineers for the major assembly CABIN-##.
2. In VEMP, create a new manufacturing structure for the installation kit INSTRADAR-##
with the description Install Radar.
The MBOMs created for the first team of engineers in the first planning scope are locked
and not available for editing. They are displayed with a lock icon in the Target Panel.
The components (STCON-##, WINDOW-##, BLROOF-## and RDROOF-##) that were
consumed in the first planning scope are grayed out in the Source Panel and are not
available for consumption in the current planning scope.
3. Move the remaining two components RADAR-## and BLCON-## from the Source Panel to
the newly created installation kit in the Working Panel.
4. Move the completed IK structure to the Target Panel and choose Save and Exit to return to
the Change Record app.
(First Team of Engineers Continued)
1. Open your change record in the Manage Engineering Changes app and navigate to the
Planning Scopes section. Launch VEMP and check that the MBOM created for the second
IK INSTRADAR-## is locked for editing in this planning scope.
2. Add the nodes CABIN-## and INSTRADAR-## to the Working Panel.
3. Add the parameter effectivity information M2 10-50 and M3 5-9 to the installation kit
INSTRADAR-##.
4. Move the CABIN-## structure back to the Target Panel and choose Save and Exit to return

Unit 5
Solution 16
Hand Over EBOM to MBOM, Create Related
Planning Scopes, Create Installation Kits, and
Maintain Parameter Effectivity
Simulation: Hand Over EBOM to MBOM, Create Related Planning Scopes, Create
For more information on Hand Over EBOM to MBOM, Create Related Planning
Scopes, Create Installation Kits, and Maintain Parameter Effectivity, please view
the simulation in the lesson Handing Over EBOM to MBOM, Creating Related
Planning Scopes, Creating Installation Kits, and Maintaining Parameter
Effectivity in your online course.
Business Example
They need to hand over a major assembly to manufacturing using two related planning
scopes. They also need to define installation kits in VEMP as required.
Note:
(First Team of Engineers)
1. In VEMP for the major assembly CABIN-##, create a new manufacturing structure for the
a) Open the Manage Engineering Changes app and search for the change record that you
created for the CABIN-## EBOM to MBOM hand over in the previous exercise.
b) Navigate to the planning scope that is assigned to the change record, select the radio
button next to the planning scope, and choose Launch VEMP.
c) In VEMP, from the Working Panel toolbar, choose Create → Create New Manufacturing
Structure.
d) In the Material field, enter INSTCABIN-## and choose Enter.

The system adds INSTCABIN-## to the Working Panel.

2. Move the components STCON-##, WINDOW-##, BLROOF-##, and RDROOF-## from the
Source Panel to the newly created installation kit.
Note:
You can do this using drag and drop. Or, you can choose the components in
the Source Panel (use the Ctrl or Shift keys to choose multiple components)
and from the Source Panel toolbar or from the context menu, choose Add to
Working Panel. You can also use the Ctrl+Q keyboard shortcut to add
components to the Working Panel.
The system adds STCON-##, WINDOW-##, BLROOF-## and RDROOF-## to the Working
Panel as components of the new manufacturing structure for the installation kit (IK)
INSTCABIN-## with the effectivity that was defined for the EBOM.
a) Move the IK structure to the Target Panel by choosing Move to Target Panel from the
Working Panel toolbar or from the context menu.
The system moves the INSTCABIN-## to the Target Panel.
3. Add the parameter effectivity information M1 1-25, M2 10-50, and M3 5-9 to the
a) In the Target Panel, select the node CABIN-## and move it to the Working Panel using
drag and drop or by choosing Add to Working Panel from the Target Panel toolbar or
context menu.
The structure moves to the Working Panel.
b) In the Target Panel, select the node INSTCABIN-## and move it to the Working Panel.
The structure moves to the Working Panel under the CABIN-## assembly.
c) In the Working Panel, choose INSTCABIN-## and from the Working Panel toolbar or
context menu, choose Edit → Edit BOM Item.
d) Choose the Insert Row option three times and add the following effectivity values:
● M1, 1 to 25
● M2, 10 to 50
● M3, 5 to 9
e) Choose OK.
The system closes the screen. The parameter effectivity has been defined for
INSTCABIN-##.
4. Move the completed structure back to the Target Panel and choose Save and Exit to return
a) Move the CABIN-## structure to the Target Panel.
The system moves the structure to the Target Panel. INSTCABIN-## is the component
of CABIN-## and you can now see a two-level MBOM structure in the Target Panel.
b) Choose Save and Exit.

The system creates the MBOMs for CABIN-## and INSTCABIN-## with the status In
Process.
c) Choose Continue in the dialog box.

Lesson: Handing Over EBOM to MBOM, Creating Related Planning Scopes, Creating Installation Kits, and Maintaining
The system returns to the change record and the newly created MBOMs have been
added to the change record.
Note:
Refresh the page (F5) to see the changes.
(Second Team of Engineers)
1. In the Cockpit for VMP app, create a new related planning scope with the description
Second Team of Engineers for the major assembly CABIN-##.
a) Open the Cockpit for VMP from the Production Engineering group.
b) Choose Create in the opened Manage Planning Scopes to create a related planning
scope for the major assembly CABIN-##.
c) Choose Planning Scenario 05 and choose Enter.
d) Enter the following data in the Create Planning Scope page:
● Description: Any free-form text such as Second Team of Engineers
● Source Material: CABIN-##
● EBOM Plant: Empty
● EBOM Usage: E
● EBOM Alternative: 1
● Target Plant: 1020
● MBOM Usage: V
● Related Planning Scope checkbox: Select
e) Choose Save & Start Planning in the top-left corner.

The system creates a related planning scope and navigates to VEMP to perform an
EBOM to MBOM handover.
2. In VEMP, create a new manufacturing structure for the installation kit INSTRADAR-##
with the description Install Radar.
The MBOMs created for the first team of engineers in the first planning scope are locked
and not available for editing. They are displayed with a lock icon in the Target Panel.
The components (STCON-##, WINDOW-##, BLROOF-## and RDROOF-##) that were
consumed in the first planning scope are grayed out in the Source Panel and are not
available for consumption in the current planning scope.
a) From the Working Panel toolbar, choose Create → Create New Manufacturing
Structure.
b) In the Material field, enter INSTRADAR-##.
c) Enter the description Install Radar and choose Enter.

The system adds the installation kit INSTRADAR-## to the Working Panel.

3. Move the remaining two components RADAR-## and BLCON-## from the Source Panel to
the newly created installation kit in the Working Panel.
a) Move the two remaining EBOM components (RADAR-## and BLCON-##) from the
Source Panel to the Working Panel under INSTRADAR-##.
4. Move the completed IK structure to the Target Panel and choose Save and Exit to return to
the Change Record app.
a) Move the IK structure to the Target Panel.
The system moves the installation kit INSTRADAR-## to the Target Panel.

The system creates the MBOM for the IK INSTRADAR-## with the status In Process.
(First Team of Engineers Continued)
1. Open your change record in the Manage Engineering Changes app and navigate to the
Planning Scopes section. Launch VEMP and check that the MBOM created for the second
IK INSTRADAR-## is locked for editing in this planning scope.
a) Open your change record in the Manage Engineering Changes app and navigate to the
Planning Scopes section.
b) Select the radio button next to the planning scope created for CABIN-##.
c) Choose Launch VEMP.

The MBOM that was created for the second installation kit INSTRADAR-## is locked
for editing in this planning scope.
2. Add the nodes CABIN-## and INSTRADAR-## to the Working Panel.

a) In the Target Panel, select the node CABIN-## and move it to the Working Panel.
The system moves the structure to the Working Panel.
b) In the Target Panel, select the node INSTRADAR-## and move it to the Working Panel.
The system moves the structure to the Working Panel under the CABIN-## assembly.
3. Add the parameter effectivity information M2 10-50 and M3 5-9 to the installation kit
INSTRADAR-##.
a) In the Working Panel, choose INSTRADAR-## and from the Working Panel toolbar or
the context menu, choose Edit → Edit BOM Item.
b) Choose the Insert Row option twice and add the effectivity values M2 10-50 and M3
5-9.
c) Choose OK.
The system closes the screen and the parameter effectivity has been defined for
INSTRADAR-##.
4. Move the CABIN-## structure back to the Target Panel and choose Save and Exit to return
a) Move the CABIN-## structure to the Target Panel.
The system moves the structure to the Target Panel and INSTRADAR-## is the
component of CABIN-##.

Lesson: Handing Over EBOM to MBOM, Creating Related Planning Scopes, Creating Installation Kits, and Maintaining

The system updates the MBOM for CABIN-## with the new component – installation
kit INSTRADAR-##.

The system returns to the change record.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 5
Learning Assessment
1. Put the different types of assemblies in a complex assembly in the correct order, with 1
being the final product.
0 Major assemblies
0 Raw materials and inventory
0 End items
0 Installation kits
2. Match the term to the correct definition.

Term Definition
End items These are the final products,
that is, the result of the com-
Major assemblies
plex assembly process. They
Installation kits are the root node of a BOM hi-
erarchy. Customers order
Raw materials and inventory
these and the spare parts for
them.
All of these together contain
the components of a major as-
sembly. A major assembly can
have several hundred of these,
each of which contains the
components for the specific
part of the major assembly.
These are the components of
another item and represent a
large section of the product.
Installation kits can contain
these types of subassemblies,
which are either procured to
stock, made to stock, or made
to project. They are issued
from inventory by the installa-
tion kit’s production orders.

3. Does a major assembly have a routing or production order associated with it?
X A Yes
X B No
4. Do you have to create an engineering change number (ECN) manually in advance to define
effectivity for unitized BOMs?
X A Yes
X B No
5. What is the purpose of the effectivity type?

X A The effectivity type is used to control the number of parameters which are used for
a defined effectivity.
X B Product unitization controls the applicability of BOM items and routing

operations/operation activities in a BOM and routing, based on effectivity
parameters.
6. What is a unitized BOM?

X A One level BOM without parameter effectivity
X B Multi-level BOM without parameter effectivity
X C Super BOM with parameter effectivity applied at the BOM item level
7. A non-unitized BOM is specific for a particular unit of a product.

X True
X False
8. Should you divide planning scopes in complex unitized products?

X A Yes
X B No

UNIT 6 Advanced Shop Floor Routing
Part I: Setup and Start
Workflow
Lesson 1
Defining Teams and Responsibilities 254
Exercise 17: Create a New Team and Assign Team Members with Functions 257
Lesson 2
Creating a Workflow for the Shop Floor Routing 261
Exercise 18: Create and Start a Workflow for the Shop Floor Routing 265
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Create teams and responsibilities for further use in the production process
● Set up and start a workflow to manage advanced routing creation process

Unit 6
Lesson 1
Defining Teams and Responsibilities
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to setup teams and add team members with functions to use
with SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for production engineering and operations (PEO)
applications, as well as which applications require this functionality and for which business
processes.
Business Example
complex products. The Company has production users grouped into teams according to the
responsibilities they handle when running production activities. John is tasked with explaining
how this setup can be done in SAP S/4HANA PEO, as well as which applications and
processes require team setup.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Teams and Responsibilities

Teams and Responsibilities functionality is not SAP S/4HANA PEO specific; this is a core
feature of SAP S/4HANA products. To create, edit and delete teams, as well as assign
functions to team members, use the Manage Teams and Responsibilities app on the SAP Fiori
launchpad. With this app, you can manage teams, responsibility definitions, and team
member functions in Responsibility Management. Use team and member functions to
determine responsible agents for a business process, workflow or tasks, or other non-
workflow scenarios.
Figure 192: Teams and Responsibilities

Lesson: Defining Teams and Responsibilities
SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for production engineering and operations (PEO) uses the
Responsibility Management framework for the following business processes and workflows:
● Buyoffs:
When creating buyoff cycle templates, you have to specify the appropriate team and
function information for each buyoff item. When adding a buyoff cycle template or
individual buyoff items to operation activities in the routing, you would require to specify
the appropriate team and function information.
● Routing Workflow:
When defining the workflow process, you need to specify the appropriate team that is to
receive the tasks.

Unit 6: Advanced Shop Floor Routing Part I: Setup and Start Workflow

Unit 6
Exercise 17
Create a New Team and Assign Team Members
with Functions
Simulation: Create a New Team and Assign Team Members with Functions
For more information on Create a New Team and Assign Team Members with
Functions, please view the simulation in the lesson Defining Teams and
Responsibilities in your online course.
Business Example
responsibilities that they handle when running production activities. John is tasked with
explaining how this setup can be done in SAP S/4HANA PEO, as well as which applications
and processes require team setup.
Note:
1. Create a new team, Team-##.
2. Assign the user that corresponds to your business partner to it and add the EPO_W,
EPO_Q, and EPO_ S functions to the user.

Unit 6
Solution 17
Create a New Team and Assign Team Members
with Functions
Simulation: Create a New Team and Assign Team Members with Functions
For more information on Create a New Team and Assign Team Members with
Functions, please view the simulation in the lesson Defining Teams and
Responsibilities in your online course.
Business Example
responsibilities that they handle when running production activities. John is tasked with
explaining how this setup can be done in SAP S/4HANA PEO, as well as which applications
and processes require team setup.
Note:
1. Create a new team, Team-##.

b) Navigate to the Manage Teams and Responsibilities app on the SAP Fiori launchpad.
c) Above the table on the right, choose the Create button.
d) In the Name field, enter Team-##.
e) In the Description field, enter any free form text.
f) In the Type field, enter BUYOF.
2. Assign the user that corresponds to your business partner to it and add the EPO_W,
EPO_Q, and EPO_ S functions to the user.
a) Under the Team Members view, choose Create.
b) Search for the business partner that corresponds to your user name.
c) Add some additional business partners as team members.
d) In the Functions field, choose the value help button.
e) Select the EPO_W, EPO_Q, and EPO_S functions and choose OK.

Lesson: Defining Teams and Responsibilities
f) Select random functions for other users in your team and choose OK.
g) Choose Save.
h) In the pop-up dialog box, choose Yes.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 6
Lesson 2
Creating a Workflow for the Shop Floor
Routing
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Workflow
In a complex manufacturing work environment, you may have a team of several engineers
working on one shop floor routing. This work has to be carefully coordinated to ensure that all
tasks are completed. It is also important to check that everything has been maintained
correctly as once a shop floor routing has been released no further changes are allowed. You
can manage these coordination tasks using the workflow features available from within the
shop floor routing app. Once you have created the shop floor routing header, you can create a
workflow and start the process.
Note:
The existence of a workflow does not influence the sequence in which work can be
performed in the routing. It is also not necessary that one task has to be approved
before you can start processing the next task in the routing. However, you cannot
release the routing until all the tasks in the workflow have been performed and
approved.
Preparation and Customizing

To work with the routing workflow, the workflow scenario definition WS02000467 is provided
in the standard system. In addition, you must make sure that the following prerequisites are
fulfilled:
● You ensure that the scenario definition is active by maintaining the scenario definition
number and the activation checkbox in Customizing under SAP NetWeaver → Application
Server → Business Management → SAP Business Workflow → Flexible
Workflow → Scenario Activation.
● You assigned the workflow scenario definition to the version profile in Customizing under
Production → Manufacturing for Production Engineering and Operations → Production
Engineering → Routings → Shop Floor Routing → Define Version Profile.
● In Customizing under SAP NetWeaver → SAP Gateway Service
Enablement → Content → Workflow Settings → Maintain Task Name & Decision Options,
you have configured the decisions for the workflow step types Review, Perform Task, and
Rework Request, as outlined in the following table:

Workflow ID Step ID Step Decision

WS02000467 0000000010 Review
WS02000467 0000000027 Perform Task
WS02000467 0000000041 Rework Request
- Workflow ID: WS02000467

Workflow Step ID: 10
Key Decision Text Nature

1 Approve POSITIVE
2 Rework NEGATIVE


1 Complete POSITIVE


1 Complete POSITIVE
Manage Workflow Templates

With this app, you can define and manage workflow templates for routings according to
different scenarios. PEO routing workflow templates should be created for the workflow
scenario WS02000467.
You can use this app to:
● Search process templates of a certain scenario.
● Define a new process template.
● Define a process template based on an existing template.
● Edit a process template.
Performing Workflow Tasks

Once the routing workflow has been started, a new task will have appeared for processing in
the My Inbox app of the first recipient. If you are indicated as recipient of the workflow task,
you will receive a task in your inbox that you now want to process. In this case, the task is to
perform a step, for example, create an operation with operation activities or define quality
data in the routing. You do as is required and then you complete the task in the workflow.
Once you are sure that you have completed your work, return to your inbox and choose
Complete. The system displays a dialog box where you can add any additional notes. Choose
Submit to proceed.

Lesson: Creating a Workflow for the Shop Floor Routing
Figure 194: Submit Decision
The system completes the task. Now when you return to the Manage Workflow page from the
Manage Shop Floor Routings app, you will see that the step you just completed is set to
Completed and that the next step in the workflow is now set to Ready. You can also see the
possible processors. All these processors will receive this task in their Inbox.
Figure 195: Process Routes


Unit 6
Exercise 18
Create and Start a Workflow for the Shop Floor
Routing
Simulation: Create and Start a Workflow for the Shop Floor Routing
For more information on Create and Start a Workflow for the Shop Floor Routing,
please view the simulation in the lesson Creating a Workflow for the Shop Floor
Routing in your online course.
Business Example
Eric is a production engineer in the low-volume A&D Company. He wants to initiate a workflow
for the newly created routing. Several engineers will coordinate their work on the routing to
ensure that all tasks are completed as required before releasing it.
Note:
1. Create a new shop floor routing for the installation kit INSTCABIN-##.
2. Create a workflow with multiple steps to manage the shop floor routing creation process.
3. Check the My Inbox app for new workflow tasks.

Unit 6
Solution 18
Create and Start a Workflow for the Shop Floor
Routing
Simulation: Create and Start a Workflow for the Shop Floor Routing
For more information on Create and Start a Workflow for the Shop Floor Routing,
please view the simulation in the lesson Creating a Workflow for the Shop Floor
Routing in your online course.
Business Example
Eric is a production engineer in the low-volume A&D Company. He wants to initiate a workflow
for the newly created routing. Several engineers will coordinate their work on the routing to
ensure that all tasks are completed as required before releasing it.
Note:
1. Create a new shop floor routing for the installation kit INSTCABIN-##.
a) Open the Manage Engineering Changes app and search for the change record created
for CABIN-## (from Unit 5).
b) Navigate to the Manufacturing Material BOM section in the Items tab.
c) Select the radio button next to the INSTCABIN-## manufacturing BOM.
d) Choose Create New Routing.
e) Confirm the default parameters in the displayed pop-up window.

The system creates a shop floor routing version and navigates to the Structure
Workspace of the Manage Shop Floor Routings app.
2. Create a workflow with multiple steps to manage the shop floor routing creation process.
a) In the Structure Workspace, choose the Manage Workflow icon in the main application
toolbar to navigate to the Routing Workflow app.
Note:
If an error appears after choosing the Manage Workflow icon, confirm the
error message, choose Save, and then choose the Manage Workflow icon
again.

Note:
You can also create and manage the routing workflow from the entry
screen of the Manage Shop Floor Routing app by choosing the Manage
Workflow button on top of the routings list.
b) Choose Edit to create a new workflow.
c) Choose the Add button on top of the Steps list to create new steps with following
settings:
1. Step
Step Name: Setup routing structure with effectivity
Step Type: Perform Task
Role: Production Supervisor
Step to be completed by: One of the recipients
Subject for recipients: Setup routing structure with effectivity
2. Step
Step Name: Setup Inspection Char & Work Instruction
Role: Quality Engineer
Subject for recipients: Setup Inspection Char & Work Instruction
3. Step
Step Name: SetupTool Tracking,Qualifications&Buy-
off
Role: Quality Engineer
Subject for recipients: SetupTool Tracking,Qualifications&Buy-
off
Note:
There is a character limit for the Step Name and Subject For Recipients
fields.

Note:
The recipient of the steps depends on the role assignments which you can
maintain by choosing Adapt Roles in the Process Routes screen.
d) After the first 3 steps have been added to the workflow, add the last step for the
workflow initiator as a review and release step.
e) Enter the following fields in the Step Detail screen:

3. Step
Step Name: Review and release routing
Step Type: Review
Role: Initiator of Workflow
Subject for recipients: Review and release routing
Exception Handling: Required Action: for example, Rework Re-
quest
Action Result: for example, Restart work-
flow
f) Save the workflow.
g) Choose Start Workflow to start the workflow immediately.
Hint:
You can also start the workflow later by choosing the Start Workflow icon
from the main application toolbar of the shop floor routing.
h) Close the Manage Shop Floor Routing app.
3. Check the My Inbox app for new workflow tasks.

a) To find the My Inbox app, go to the Shop Floor Control and Manufacturing Execution tile
group or use the Search function.
b) Check if the first task of above workflow is displayed.

LESSON SUMMARY


Unit 6
Learning Assessment
1. Where can you create Teams and Responsibilities in SAP S/4HANA core?
X A Manage Operator and Work Center
X B Manage Teams and Responsibilities
X C Manage Production operations
2. SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for production engineering and operations (PEO) uses the
Responsibility Management framework. Which business processes and workflows can be
managed?
X A PRTs
X B Work Instructions
X C Buyoffs
X D Routing Workflow
3. With the Manage Workflow Templates app, you can define and manage templates for
routings according to different scenarios. What are the functionalities of this app?
X A Search process templates of a certain scenario
X B Create PEO routing workflow templates with all of the available workflow scenarios
X C Define or edit a process template based on an existing template
X D Define a new process template
4. You can see if you are a recipient of a workflow task.

X True
X False

5. Put the steps to create a new workflow in the Manage Workflow app in order, based on the
example in this course.
0 Set up tool tracking, qualifications, and buyoff
0 Set up routing structure with effectivity
0 Set up inspection characteristics and work instructions
0 Review and release the routing

Part II: Effectivity, Components,
Inspection Characteristics,
Work Instructions
Lesson 1
Creating a New Shop Floor Routing with Effectivity and Assigning Components 274
Exercise 19: Create a New Shop Floor Routing with Effectivity and Assign Components 287
Lesson 2
Creating Tabular Inspection Characteristics 295
Exercise 20: Create Inspection Characteristics 297
Lesson 3
Managing Standard Texts 303
Exercise 21: Create Standard Texts 307
Lesson 4
Creating Interactive Work Instructions for Operation Activities 311
Exercise 22: Create Interactive Work Instructions for Operation Activities 313
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Create a new shop floor routing with effectivity and assign components
● Create tabular inspection characteristics for operation activities
● Create a standard text for copy
● Create interactive work instructions for operation activities

Unit 7
Lesson 1
Creating a New Shop Floor Routing with
Effectivity and Assigning Components
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Shop Floor Routings with Unitized Parameter Effectivity

Using unitized parameter effectivity, you can manage multiple configurations of an assembly
and its production process plan (routing) so that all of the possible units can be modeled
using the same super BOM and super routing. When a particular unit is to be produced, the
super BOM and related super routing is filtered to retrieve the information relevant for that
unit only. This information is then assigned to the production order.
Note the following when maintaining parameter effectivity information in the routing:
● You can only assign one MBOM with parameter effectivity to a routing - multiple MBOM
assignment is not possible. Note that the default version profile must be set to single
MBOM assignment when working with parameter effectivity. If this checkbox is not set, the
MBOMs with parameter effectivity are not selected in the MBOM search dialog box.
● The routing header inherits the overall effectivity of the MBOM and this effectivity
information cannot be changed at header level.
● The operations inherit the effectivity information from the routing header and the
operation activities inherit the effectivity information from the operations. You can change
the effectivity for operations and operation activities, as necessary.
● That is, the effectivity range defined for higher levels must cover the effectivity range
defined for the lower levels. See the following figure:
Figure 197: Inherited Effectivity Information
● When assigning components to operation activities, the effectivity range of the

components must be greater than or equal to the effectivity range of the operation activity
to which you want to assign it. See the following figure:

Lesson: Creating a New Shop Floor Routing with Effectivity and Assigning Components
Figure 198: Component Effectivity Range
In this example, the following assignments are possible:

- B can only be assigned to the operation activities A2 and B1, B2, B3.
- C cannot be assigned to any activity because its effectivity is not fully covered by any
operation activity.
- D can only be assigned to A3.
When you release the routing, the system first performs a check to ensure that the
complete effectivity range for all components has been assigned to operation activities. If
the assignments are not correct, the system displays a dialog box with a list of messages.
You have to solve all of the problems before you can release the routing.
● If you make a mistake when splitting the effectivity ranges of operation activities, you can
choose the Revert to Inherited Validity button. The system then changes the effectivity
information back to the original values as passed on from the MBOM. You can use this
button for operation activities and operations.
● When copying objects with parameter effectivity to your favorites, the system removes the
parameter effectivity information.
● When pasting objects from your favorites to a routing with parameter effectivity, the
following happens:
- When pasting an operation, it inherits the effectivity information from the routing
header. This effectivity information can be changed as necessary.
- When pasting an operation activity, it inherits the effectivity information from the higher
level operation. This effectivity information can be changed as necessary.
Component Assignment with Parameter Effectivity

The different scenarios for splitting quantities and effectivity ranges that can arise when
assigning components to operation activities are explained in this section.

Unit 7: Advanced Shop Floor Routing Part II: Effectivity, Components, Inspection Characteristics, Work Instructions
Note:
When assigning components with parameter effectivity to operation activities,
remember the general rule that the effectivity of the component must be greater
than or equal to the effectivity range of the operation activity to which it is being
assigned. In addition, the complete effectivity range of the component must be
assigned to an operation activity before the routing can be released.
No Splits
Figure 199: No Splits
Animation: No Splits
For more information on No Splits, please view the animation in the lesson
Creating a New Shop Floor Routing with Effectivity and Assigning Components,
In this scenario, you can see a component for which 5 PC are required and the effectivity
range is 1 to 60. In this case, the total quantity of 5 and the complete effectivity range is
assigned to the first operation activity OA1 which also has an effectivity range of 1 to 60. That
is, no quantity or effectivity split exists.

Quantity Split - No Effectivity Split
Figure 201: Quantity Split - No Effectivity Split
Animation: Quantity Split - No Effectivity Split

For more information on Quantity Split - No Effectivity Split, please view the
animation in the lesson Creating a New Shop Floor Routing with Effectivity and
Assigning Components, in your online course.
In this scenario, the component quantity of 5 PC has been split (2 PC and 3 PC) but no
effectivity split exists. Two pieces of the component have been assigned to OA1 and the other
three pieces to OA2 for the complete effectivity range.
Effectivity Split - No Quantity Split
Figure 203: Effectivity Split - No Quantity Split

Animation: Effectivity Split - No Quantity Split

For more information on Effectivity Split - No Quantity Split, please view the
In this scenario, the component quantity has not been split but an effectivity split exists. As
can be seen in the figure, two options for routing assignment exist: Either the effectivity range
for each of the operation activities can be adjusted to suit the effectivity of the component
(routing option 1), or the first operation activity OA1 which was originally created with the
effectivity 1 - 60 can also be split and the effectivity ranges adjusted to suit the component
effectivity (routing option 2).
Note:
When splitting an operation activity, the system creates an exact copy of the
operation activity with the same ID, description, component assignments, PRT
assignment, and so on. You cannot change the ID of the new operation activity,
but you can change the description to be able to distinguish between the two.
Quantity Split and Effectivity Split
Figure 205: Quantity Split and Effectivity Split
Animation: Quantity Split and Effectivity Split

For more information on Quantity Split and Effectivity Split, please view the
In this scenario, both the quantity and the effectivity of the component have been split. A (2
PC) and C (3 PC) are assigned to the operation activities OA1 and OA3 respectively, each
covering an effectivity range of 1 - 30. B (2 PC) and D (3 PC) are assigned to operation
activities OA2 and OA4 respectively, each covering an effectivity range of 31 to 60. Again,

there are alternative ways of dealing with the effectivity split. For example, it is also possible to
split the individual OAs as shown in the previous figure.
Quantity and Effectivity Split - Different Effectivity Ranges
Figure 207: Quantity and Effectivity Split - Different Effectivity Ranges
Animation: Quantity and Effectivity Split - Different Effectivity Ranges

For more information on Quantity and Effectivity Split - Different Effectivity
Ranges, please view the animation in the lesson Creating a New Shop Floor
Routing with Effectivity and Assigning Components, in your online course.
In this scenario, you can see a second variation of the quantity and effectivity split. Again,
both the quantity and the effectivity of the component have been split, but this time a
different effectivity range has been defined for each quantity. That is:
● 2 PC are valid for the effectivity range 1 to 30 (A)
● 2 PC are valid for the effectivity range 31 to 60 (B)
● 3 PC are valid for the effectivity range 1 to 40 (C)
● 3 PC are valid for the effectivity range 41 to 60 (D)

Effectivity Splits and BOM Instances
Figure 209: Effectivity Splits and BOM Instances
Animation: Effectivity Splits and BOM Instances

For more information on Effectivity Splits and BOM Instances, please view the
In this scenario, you can see a third variation of the quantity and effectivity split. In this case,
MBOM instances have been maintained for the component and a different effectivity range
has been maintained for each instance. Note that this is only one example of how to perform
component assignment.
Note:
To work with MBOM instances, you have to maintain your shop floor routings in
the SAP Business Client or in the SAP GUI environment.
Effectivity Filters
You may want to make changes to a routing for a specific effectivity range only. This may be
necessary if you want to produce a certain number of units of a particular model for a
particular customer who requires specific features. Such a situation may arise, for example, if
you are a manufacturer of aircraft and you want to produce a certain number of units for a
particular airline company who want their logo to be printed on several components. The
effectivity filter enables you to create a separate work environment for this limited number of
units. You can change the operations, operation activities, and components as necessary
without this having an effect on the rest of the routing.
General Information for Creating a Filtered Work Environment

Note the following scenarios when maintaining a valid effectivity filter for a work environment:

Scenario 1:
Figure 211: Scenario01_Scr.pptx
In this case, you have maintained a filter range of 1 - 50. However, an operation exists
(operation 0010) that does not cover the complete filter range – it is only valid for the range
12 - 50. Therefore, the system cannot create the work environment because the effectivity
range of all operations must completely cover the effectivity filter 1 - 50.
Animation: Scenario 1
For more information on Scenario 1, please view the animation in the lesson
Note:
If the effectivity range of the operation lies completely outside the filter effectivity,
the creation of the work environment is possible, but this operation would not be
displayed at all.
Scenario 2:

In this case, you have maintained a filter range of 1 - 50. However, the effectivity range of OA 2
(1 - 15) is not valid for the complete effectivity filter (1 - 50). In addition, OA3 has already been
split and is therefore not unique within the effectivity filter. Therefore, the system cannot
create the work environment.
Note:
If the effectivity range of the operation activity lies completely outside the filter
effectivity, the creation of the work environment is possible, but this operation
activity would not be displayed at all.
Scenario 3:
Again, you have maintained a filter range of 1 - 50. In this case, the system will create the work
environment as the effectivity of the operation completely covers the effectivity filter as do
the effectivity ranges of all the operation activities. Only the operation activity OA3** is not
included in the filter as its effectivity range lies completely outside the filter range.
Summary
When creating a filtered work environment, take note of the following points:

● To be included in the filtered work environment, the effectivity ranges of the operations
and operation activities must be equal to or greater than the filter effectivity range.
● Operations and operation activities with effectivity ranges that lie completely outside the
filter effectivity range are not displayed in the filtered work environment at all.
Options for Changing the Filtered Work Environment

The following options are available:
● You can add new operations and operation activities. The system then creates these new
operations and operation activities for the selected work environment and for the filtered
effectivity range. That would be 1 - 50 in the previous examples.
● You can change operations and operation activities:
- If the effectivity of the filter matches the effectivity of the operation or operation activity
exactly, you can make changes as necessary.
- If the effectivity of the filter is less than the effectivity of the operation, you cannot make
any changes to the operation. That is, an operation split is currently not possible. If the
effectivity of the filter is less than the effectivity of the operation activity, you can
change the operation activities. However, all changes in this case lead to an activity
split. This applies when changing an existing activity attribute, an object assignment
(such as buyoff, PRT, inspection characteristic), or any changes to component
assignments in the component assignment workspace. This behavior is summarized in
the following figure:
Figure 217: WorkEnvironment_Scr.pptx
● You can delete operations and operation activities:

- If the effectivity of the filter matches the effectivity of the operation or operation activity
exactly, the operation or operation activity is completely deleted for the work
environment.
- If the effectivity of the filter is less than the effectivity of the operation or operation
activity, you cannot delete the operation. If you delete an activity, note the following:
● The effectivity range defined for the filtered work environment is deleted and the effectivity
range of this activity is reduced to the range that lies outside the filter. For example, an
activity has the effectivity range 1 - 100. You create a work environment for the range 10 -

20. You then delete the activity in the work environment. The overall effectivity of the
activity is then 1 - 9 and 21 - 100. That is, the units 10 - 20 no longer exist.
● If you delete an object assignment, the activity is split. When you leave the filtered work
environment, you can see the split activity which should no longer contain the deleted
object assignment.
● If you delete a component assignment, the activity is split. Again, when you leave the
filtered work environment, you can see the split activity which should no longer contain the
deleted component assignment.
Feature Allowed/Not Allowed Comment
Create new operation Allowed The new operation is only val-

id for the filtered work envi-
ronment.
Create new group Not allowed Not possible because no ef-
fectivity information exists
for the activity group.
Create new activity Allowed The new activity is only valid
for the filtered work environ-
ment.
Delete operation Allowed Only if the effectivity range of
the operation exactly match-
es the filtered effectivity.
Delete group Not allowed It is not possible to delete the
group as it is valid for the
complete routing. You can,
however, change the opera-
tion activities contained in
the group.
Delete activity Allowed If the activity is valid for a
greater effectivity range than
the filtered work environ-
ment, it is split. If the effectiv-
ity range of the activity exact-
ly matches the effectivity of
ment, the complete activity is
deleted.
Change header/MBOM as- Not allowed The header data and MBOM
signments assignments relates to the
whole routing and therefore
cannot be changed.
Change operation Allowed Only if the effectivity range of
the operation exactly match-
es the filtered effectivity.

Feature Allowed/Not Allowed Comment
Change groups Not allowed Not possible because no ef-

fectivity information exists
for the activity group. The
group is always valid for the
complete routing.
Change activity Allowed If the activity is valid for a
greater effectivity range than
ment, it is split. If the effectiv-
ity range of the activity exact-
ly matches the effectivity of
ment, it is changed.
Structural changes of OA Not allowed You cannot move the OAs,
link an OA to a previous OA,
or drag and drop.


Unit 7
Exercise 19
Create a New Shop Floor Routing with
Effectivity and Assign Components
Simulation: Create a New Shop Floor Routing with Effectivity and Assign
Components
For more information on Create a New Shop Floor Routing with Effectivity and
Assign Components, please view the simulation in the lesson Creating a New
Shop Floor Routing with Effectivity and Assigning Components in your online
course.
Business Example
Eric is a production engineer in the low-volume A&D Company. His task is to create a shop
floor routing for an installation kit. He needs to maintain the parameter effectivity information
for operations and operation activities making some operations activities applicable for
specific parameter effectivity. Eric also needs to assign components to the operation
activities with parameter effectivity.
You received a new task in your inbox to set up a new routing structure with effectivity.
Note:
1. Navigate to the My Inbox app in the Shop Floor Control and Manufacturing Execution tile
group or use the Search function. Check for new tasks.
There should be a task for setting up the routing structure with effectivity for installation
kit INSTCABIN-##.
2. Claim the task and navigate to the Manage Shop Floor Routing app to work on the routing.
3. Create a new operation with the following information:

The structure of the operations should be as follows:
● 0010
- OA10
- OA20
- OA30

● 0020
- OA10
Note:
If the structure of the operation activities is disturbed, for example,
● 0010
- OA30
- OA10
- OA20
select OA10 and drag and drop it at the top under operation 0010.
Field Value
Operation 0010
Description Assemble Cabin
Control Key PP01
Description Install Steering Console and

Windscreen
4. Create another operation activity for operation 0010 with the following information:
Field Value
Description Install Red Roof
Field Value
Description Install Blue Roof
6. Create a second operation with the following information:

Field Value
Operation 0020
Description Final Inspection
Control Key PP01

Field Value
7. Change the effectivity ranges for the operation activity OA20 (both for the red roof and for
the blue roof) as follows:
● The Install Red Roof operation activity is valid for M1 11-25, M2 10-50, M3 5-9
● The Install Blue Roof operation activity is valid for M1 1-10 only
8. Perform component assignment to the operation activities as follows:
● Assign the components STCON-## (Steering Console) and WINDOW-## (Window) to

the operation activity OA10 Install Steering Console and Windscreen.
● Assign the component RDROOF-## (Red Roof) to the operation activity OA20 Install
Red Roof
● Assign the component BLROOF-## (Blue Roof) to the operation activity OA20 Install
Blue Roof

Unit 7
Solution 19
Create a New Shop Floor Routing with
Effectivity and Assign Components
Simulation: Create a New Shop Floor Routing with Effectivity and Assign
Components
For more information on Create a New Shop Floor Routing with Effectivity and
Assign Components, please view the simulation in the lesson Creating a New
Shop Floor Routing with Effectivity and Assigning Components in your online
course.
Business Example
Eric is a production engineer in the low-volume A&D Company. His task is to create a shop
floor routing for an installation kit. He needs to maintain the parameter effectivity information
for operations and operation activities making some operations activities applicable for
specific parameter effectivity. Eric also needs to assign components to the operation
activities with parameter effectivity.
You received a new task in your inbox to set up a new routing structure with effectivity.
Note:
There should be a task for setting up the routing structure with effectivity for installation
kit INSTCABIN-##.
2. Claim the task and navigate to the Manage Shop Floor Routing app to work on the routing.
a) Claim the task and select the Routing Details link.
b) Choose the Change Shop Floor Routing link from the list.
The system navigates to the Manage Shop Floor Routing app and opens the Structure
Workspace for the INSTCABIN-## routing.
3. Create a new operation with the following information:

The structure of the operations should be as follows:
● 0010

- OA10
- OA20
- OA30
● 0020
- OA10
Note:
If the structure of the operation activities is disturbed, for example,
● 0010
- OA30
- OA10
- OA20
select OA10 and drag and drop it at the top under operation 0010.
Field Value
Operation 0010
Description Assemble Cabin
Control Key PP01
Description Install Steering Console and

Windscreen
a) Above the table on the left, choose Add → Operation and enter the data provided in
the table.
b) Choose OK.
A new operation and operation activity is added to the routing structure.
Field Value
Description Install Red Roof
a) Select the operation 0010 and open the context menu (right mouse click). Choose
Add → Add Operation Activity (Sub- Level) and enter the data provided in the table.
b) Choose OK.

Field Value
Description Install Blue Roof
a) Select the operation 0010 and open the context menu (right mouse click). Choose
Add → Add Operation Activity (Sub- Level) and enter the data provided in the table.
b) Choose OK.
6. Create a second operation with the following information:

Field Value
Operation 0020
Control Key PP01
a) Above the table on the left, choose Add → Operation and enter the data provided in
the table.
b) Choose OK.
The system adds new operation with one operation activity to the routing.
7. Change the effectivity ranges for the operation activity OA20 (both for the red roof and for
the blue roof) as follows:
● The Install Red Roof operation activity is valid for M1 11-25, M2 10-50, M3 5-9
● The Install Blue Roof operation activity is valid for M1 1-10 only
a) Choose operation activity OA20 (Install Red Roof) in the structure on the left and then
choose Change (Change Selected Element) in the toolbar.
b) In the Change Operation Activity screen, in the Parameter Effectivity section, for model
M1, enter 11 in the Unit From (or Lower Limit) field.
c) Choose OK.
d) Choose operation activity 20 (Install Blue Roof) in the structure on the left and then
choose Change (Change Selected Element) in the toolbar.
e) In the Change Operation Activity screen, in the Parameter Effectivity section, for model
M1, enter 10 in the Unit To (or Upper Limit) field and remove the lines for models M2
and M3.
f) Choose OK.
g) Switch to the Component Assignment Workspace.
8. Perform component assignment to the operation activities as follows:

● Assign the components STCON-## (Steering Console) and WINDOW-## (Window) to

the operation activity OA10 Install Steering Console and Windscreen.
● Assign the component RDROOF-## (Red Roof) to the operation activity OA20 Install
Red Roof
● Assign the component BLROOF-## (Blue Roof) to the operation activity OA20 Install
Blue Roof
a) Select the component STCON-## (Steering Console) and WINDOW-## (Window) in

the list of components on the left.
b) Select the operation activity OA10 Install Steering Console and Windscreen in the
routing structure on the right.
c) Choose the Assign button.

The system assigns both components to the selected operation activity.
d) Choose Save in the main application toolbar to save the routing changes.
e) Select the component RDROOF-## (Red Roof) in the list of components on the left and
select the operation activity OA20 Install Red Roof in the routing structure on the right.
f) Choose Assign.
The system assigns the component to the selected operation activity.
g) Select the component BLROOF-## (Blue Roof) in the list of components on the left
and select the operation activity OA20 Install Blue Roof in the routing structure on the
right.
h) Choose Assign.
The system assigns the component to the selected operation activity.
i) Choose Save in the main application toolbar to save the routing changes.
j) Go back to your My Inbox app and complete the task by choosing the Complete button.
k) Choose Submit on the Submit Decision dialog box.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 7
Lesson 2
Creating Tabular Inspection Characteristics
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Inspection Characteristics
You can assign inspection characteristics to operation activities in a produce segment. To do
so, you have the following options:
● Create inspection characteristics with or without a reference to existing master inspection
characteristics
● Create a table of several inspection characteristics
● Copy master inspection characteristics and change the attributes as necessary
In the Details Workspace, for each operation, by selecting an operation, you can view all the
inspection characteristics that have been assigned to the operation activities underneath the
operation on the Inspection Characteristics tab in the Details Workspace. At operation level
however, you can only view the information – you cannot delete existing or assign new
inspection characteristics.
Note:
To be able to assign master inspection characteristics to an operation activity, it
must be predefined in the system in the corresponding transaction.
To assign a new material or equipment, change, delete, or copy the existing one, use the
Inspection Characteristics tab of the operation activity.
Figure 219: Inspection Characteristics Tab


Unit 7
Exercise 20
Create Inspection Characteristics
Simulation: Create Inspection Characteristics

For more information on Create Inspection Characteristics, please view the
simulation in the lesson Creating Tabular Inspection Characteristics in your
online course.
Business Example
Paul is a production engineer in the low-volume A&D Company. His task is to assign work
centers to the routing operations and create inspection characteristics to measure the
steering angle of the steering assembly and check the glass transparency of the windscreen.
After completing his task, he will update the workflow task to trigger the next activity.
Note:
The task “Setup Inspection Characteristics and Work Instructions” should be ready after
the last task has been completed (the previous exercise).
2. Enter the work center CABIN-## for operations 0010 and 0020.
3. Create a tabular inspection characteristic for the operation activity OA10 Install Steering
Console and Windscreen with the following data:
● Type: Inspection Characteristic
● Description: Windscreen Glass Check Transparency
● Quantitative: Select
● Unit of measure: deg
● Lower specification limit: 98
● Upper specification limit: 100
● Record Measured Values: Select
● Single Result: Select
4. Create a table for the above inspection characteristic with following data:

● Description: Windscreen Glass Check
● No. of Measurements: 3
● Measurement description: Left Side, Right Side, Front
5. Create another inspection characteristic for the operation activity OA10 Install Steering
Console and Windscreen with following data:
● Description: Steering Angle
● Record Measured Values: select

Unit 7
Solution 20
Create Inspection Characteristics
Simulation: Create Inspection Characteristics

For more information on Create Inspection Characteristics, please view the
simulation in the lesson Creating Tabular Inspection Characteristics in your
online course.
Business Example
Paul is a production engineer in the low-volume A&D Company. His task is to assign work
centers to the routing operations and create inspection characteristics to measure the
steering angle of the steering assembly and check the glass transparency of the windscreen.
After completing his task, he will update the workflow task to trigger the next activity.
Note:
the last task has been completed (the previous exercise).
2. Enter the work center CABIN-## for operations 0010 and 0020.
a) Switch to the Details Workspace.
b) Choose operation 0010 in the routing structure on the left and in the Work Center field
on the right in the General tab, enter CABIN-##.
c) Choose operation 0020 in the routing structure on the left and in the Work Center field
on the right in the General tab, enter CABIN-##.
3. Create a tabular inspection characteristic for the operation activity OA10 Install Steering
Console and Windscreen with the following data:

● Description: Windscreen Glass Check Transparency
● Record Measured Values: Select
a) Select the operation activity OA10 Install Steering Console and Windscreen in the
routing structure on the left.
b) Go to the Inspection Characteristics tab on the right.
c) Choose Create and in the dropdown list, select Inspection Characteristic.

The system displays the Add Inspection Characteristic dialog box.
d) Select the Inspection Characteristic radio button in the dialog box.
e) In the Description field of the Characteristic Info section, enter Specify

Transparency of Glass, select the Quantitative radio button, and choose Next.
f) In the Type section, select the Lower Specif. Limit and Upper Specif. Limit checkboxes.
g) Make sure that the Record Measured Vals checkbox is selected in the Miscellaneous
section.
h) In the Results Confirmation section, select the Single Result radio button and choose
Next.
i) Enter % in the Unit of Meas. field.
j) Enter 95 in the Lower Limit field.
k) Enter 100 in the Upper Limit field.
l) Choose OK.
m) Save the routing.

The inspection characteristic has been assigned to the operation activity OA10 Install
Steering Console and Windscreen.
4. Create a table for the above inspection characteristic with following data:
● Description: Windscreen Glass Check
● No. of Measurements: 3
● Measurement description: Left Side, Right Side, Front
a) Choose Create and then in the dropdown list, select Table.

The system displays the Add Table dialog box.
b) In the Table Description field, enter Windscreen Glass Check, in the No. of
Measurements field, change 1 to 3 to create 3 measurements, and choose OK.

Lesson: Creating Tabular Inspection Characteristics
c) Drag and drop the Specify Transparency of Glass characteristic to the created table or
use the cut and paste buttons from the toolbar.
The Specify Transparency of Glass characteristics is added to the table.
d) Select the Windscreen Glass Check table and choose Edit.
e) Change the measurement descriptions to Left Side, Right Side and Front.
f) Choose OK to save and close the screen.
5. Create another inspection characteristic for the operation activity OA10 Install Steering
Console and Windscreen with following data:
● Description: Steering Angle
● Record Measured Values: select
a) Choose Create to add another Inspection Characteristic.

The system displays the Add Inspection Characteristic dialog box.
b) Select the Inspection Characteristic radio button in the dialog box.
c) In the Description field of the Characteristic Info section, enter Steering Angle,
select the Quantitative radio button, and choose Next.
d) In the Type section, select the Lower Specif. Limit and Upper Specif. Limit checkboxes.
e) Make sure that the Record Measured Vals checkbox is selected in the Miscellaneous
section.
f) In the Results Confirmation section, select the Single Result radio button.
g) Choose Next.
h) In the Unit of Meas. field, enter deg.
i) In the Lower Limit field, enter 0.
j) In the Upper Limit field, enter 180.
k) Choose OK and save the routing.

The inspection characteristic has been assigned to the operation activity OA10 Install
Steering Console and Windscreen.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 7
Lesson 3
Managing Standard Texts
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn the purpose of using standard texts and how they support production
engineers when creating work instructions. You also learn how to create standard texts and
use them for copy or reference in SAP S/4HANA PEO.
Business Example
complex products. The Company is looking for an opportunity to create text abstracts that
can be re-used in multiple work instructions of different routings. This will facilitate the
creation and maintenance of instructions. John is tasked with explaining the purpose of using
standard texts in SAP S/4HANA PEO to Company representatives and creating standard
texts in the system for future use in work instructions.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Standard Texts
Standard texts are text abstracts that can be created and saved in the system for further use
when creating work instructions in the SAP S/4HANA PEO shop floor routing. This helps to
greatly speed up the creation of work instructions and standardize the information that can
be reused in multiple routings to avoid confusion.
In SAP S/4HANA PEO there are two types of standard texts available:
● Reference:
You can reference this type of standard text in the work instructions for an operation
activity in the shop floor routing, for example. In the routing, this information is referenced
only and cannot be changed. If, however, you create and release a new version of a
standard text that is already referenced in a work instruction, the system automatically
updates the standard text already referenced and always displays the newest version.
Note:
The referenced standard text is even updated in released routing versions. It is
also updated in production orders until the production order is released. Once
the production order has been released, the standard text version is no longer
updated.
● Copy Only:

You can insert this type of standard text in the work instructions in the shop floor routing.
In the routing, you can change the copied standard text as necessary. In this case, if you
create a new version of a standard text of the type Copy Only that has already been used in
a work instruction, the system does not automatically update the text in the work
instructions.
Standard texts are maintained in the Find Standard Texts and Manage Standard Texts apps
under the Production Engineering group on the SAP Fiori launchpad.
Figure 221: Find Standard Texts
When working with standard texts, the following features are available:
● Create standard texts with embedded Rich Text Editor.
● Include hyperlinks, images, and other attachments as necessary.
● Create categories and assign them to standard texts. You can then use these categories
later as a filter in the Find Standard Texts app when searching for a particular standard
text.
● Create standard texts in multiple languages. When creating work instructions in the shop
floor routing, you can then reference all the necessary languages.
● Create new versions of standard texts. You can make changes to standard texts as long as
they are in the status In Progress. To change a standard text that has already been
released, you have to create a new version of the text. Then you can change either the
header data or content.

Lesson: Managing Standard Texts
Figure 222: Find Standard Texts
Standard Text Statuses

● In Progress:
Changes to the standard text are allowed.
● Released:
The standard text cannot be edited anymore. To change it, you have to create a new
version.
Caution:
You can only delete released standard texts of the type Reference if they have
not already been referenced in work instructions. If you try to do so, the system
issues an appropriate message and does not delete the standard text. If,
however, the standard text is of the type Copy Only, you can delete it, even if it is
released and has been used in a work instruction.


Unit 7
Exercise 21
Create Standard Texts
Simulation: Create Standard Texts

For more information on Create Standard Texts, please view the simulation in the
lesson Managing Standard Texts in your online course.
Business Example
complex products. The company is looking for an opportunity to create text abstracts that
can be reused in multiple work instructions of different routings. This will facilitate the
standard texts in SAP S/4HANA PEO to company representatives and creating standard
Note:
1. Create a standard text for copy ST-COPY-## for plant 1020.
2. Create a standard text for reference ST-REF-## for plant 1020.

Unit 7
Solution 21
Create Standard Texts
Simulation: Create Standard Texts

For more information on Create Standard Texts, please view the simulation in the
lesson Managing Standard Texts in your online course.
Business Example
complex products. The company is looking for an opportunity to create text abstracts that
can be reused in multiple work instructions of different routings. This will facilitate the
standard texts in SAP S/4HANA PEO to company representatives and creating standard
Note:
1. Create a standard text for copy ST-COPY-## for plant 1020.

b) Navigate to the Manage Standard Texts app under the Production Engineering group
c) Above the table on the right, choose the Add button and in the dropdown menu, select
Standard Text.
d) In the Standard Text field, enter ST-COPY-##.
e) In the Standard Text Description field, enter any text.
f) Specify any key words that may help you find your text later.
g) In the Usage Type dropdown, select Copy Only.
h) In the Content field, enter any text paragraph with different types of formatting and
links, as well as embed images.
i) Try different options.
j) Choose Save.
The standard text remains in the status In Progress.
2. Create a standard text for reference ST-REF-## for plant 1020.

Lesson: Managing Standard Texts
b) Navigate to the Manage Standard Texts app under the Production Engineering group
c) Above the table on the right, choose the Add button and in the dropdown menu, select
Standard Text.
d) In the Standard Text field, enter ST-REF-##.
e) In the Standard Text Description field, enter any text.
f) Specify any key words that may help you find your text later.
g) In the Usage Type dropdown, select Reference.
h) In the Reference Type dropdown, select Always latest released version.
i) In the Content field, enter any text paragraph with different types of formatting and
links, as well as embed images.
j) Try different options.
k) In the upper-right corner of the screen, choose Save and Release.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 7
Lesson 4
Creating Interactive Work Instructions for
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Interactive Work Instructions

The benefit of creating interactive work instructions is that, during production, operators can
carefully follow complex work instructions and record information within the context of the
instruction.
You can create detailed work instructions for operation activities in all segments; setup,
produce, and teardown. How you create the work instructions and the options available for
creating them depend on where you maintain your shop floor routings and whether the
routing is created for a single MBOM or for multiple MBOMs:
● In SAP GUI with Single MBOM: In SAP GUI (transaction MSFR4), you can create work
instructions with interactive data collection if the following prerequisites are met:
- The Single indicator is set for the default version profile in Customizing.
- You have created a routing with operations and operation activities.
- You have selected the Interactive Data Collection Allowed option in the Work
Instructions tab for the operation activity.
● In SAP GUI with Multiple MBOMs and in SAP GUI for HTML (SAP Fiori launchpad): In this
case, you must have already created a routing with operations and operation activities
and, if you work with standard texts, you must have already created the necessary
standard texts in the Manage Standard Texts app.
When creating interactive work instructions, you have the following options:
Action… Information…
Add reference You can add a link to a component, an in-
spection characteristic, or a PRT. Choose the
appropriate tab, select the appropriate row,
and choose Add Reference.

Add Input (for serialized components) You can add input fields for serialized com-
ponents. This means, for example, that the
production operator in execution can enter
serial number information directly in the
work instructions.
Select the component for which you want to
add input in the components tab and choose
Add Input.
The system inserts the input row in the work
instructions. You can repeat this for all serial-
ized components.
Add Input (for inspection characteristics) You can add an input row for inspection char-
acteristics. This means that the production
operator can record the inspection results di-
rectly in the work instructions.
Select the inspection characteristic for which
you want to add input in the inspection char-
acteristics tab and choose Add Input.
The system inserts the input row in the work
instructions. You can repeat this step for all
inspection characteristics.
Add Standard Text You can add standard texts of the types Ref-
erence and Only Copy.
Add Remaining Inputs To make sure that you have not forgotten
any serialized components or inspection
characteristics, choose this option and then
either Add Remaining Components or Add
Remaining Inspection Characteristics. The
system determines any serialized compo-
nents or inspection characteristics that have
not yet been included in the work instruc-
tions and inserts them accordingly.
Note that when you choose Done, the system
checks to make sure that all serialized com-
ponents and inspection characteristics are
included in the work instructions. If not, it dis-
plays an appropriate message.

Unit 7
Exercise 22
Create Interactive Work Instructions for
Simulation: Create Interactive Work Instructions for Operation Activities

For more information on Create Interactive Work Instructions for Operation
Activities, please view the simulation in the lesson Creating Interactive Work
Business Example
complex products. To improve the quality of work and ensure that production processing is
executed exactly as defined, John is asked to describe the operation activity steps in detail.
He uses SAP S/4HANA PEO interactive work instruction capabilities to create work
procedures with text and pictures including references (hyperlinks) to components and
inspection characteristics. With that, the production operator can interact between the 3D
model and the work instruction and is very well guided in the steps he/she has to perform.
Note:
the last task has been completed (previous exercise).
2. Create an interactive work instruction for operation activity OA10 Install Steering Console
and Windscreen.
3. Go back to your My Inbox app and complete the task by choosing the Complete button.
After choosing the Complete button, the Submit Decision dialog box appears. Choose
Submit.

Unit 7
Solution 22
Create Interactive Work Instructions for
Simulation: Create Interactive Work Instructions for Operation Activities

For more information on Create Interactive Work Instructions for Operation
Activities, please view the simulation in the lesson Creating Interactive Work
Business Example
complex products. To improve the quality of work and ensure that production processing is
executed exactly as defined, John is asked to describe the operation activity steps in detail.
He uses SAP S/4HANA PEO interactive work instruction capabilities to create work
procedures with text and pictures including references (hyperlinks) to components and
inspection characteristics. With that, the production operator can interact between the 3D
model and the work instruction and is very well guided in the steps he/she has to perform.
Note:
the last task has been completed (previous exercise).
a) Select the Routing Details link.
2. Create an interactive work instruction for operation activity OA10 Install Steering Console
and Windscreen.
a) Switch to the Details Workspace and select operation activity OA10 Install Steering
Console and Windscreen.
b) Go to the Work Instructions tab on the right and select the Interactive Data Collection
Allowed checkbox.
c) Choose the Create button and select a language for your work instruction.

Lesson: Creating Interactive Work Instructions for Operation Activities
By default, the text editor opens and a list of components and inspection
characteristics displays in a table.
d) Choose the Add Standard Text button above the text editor and select the ST-REF-##
text reference that you created in a previous exercise.
The text building block is placed in the first line of the text editor.
e) Below the reference text, enter a new line and type Assemble Components:
f) Place the cursor in a new line and select all components from the Components list.
g) Choose the Add Reference button above the list.

The components are added to the work instruction.
h) Place the cursor in a new line and type Collect Quality Data:
i) Select all inspection characteristics from the Inspection Characteristics list.
j) Choose the Add Reference button above the list.

The inspection characteristics are added to the work instruction.
k) Save the work instruction and return to the Details Workspace.
l) Save the routing.
3. Go back to your My Inbox app and complete the task by choosing the Complete button.
Submit.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 7
Learning Assessment
1. What are the main aspects you must keep in mind if you are working with shop floor
routings with unitized parameter effectivity?
X A The routing header inherits the overall effectivity of the MBOM and this effectivity
information can be changed at header level
X B You can only assign one MBOM with parameter effectivity to a routing
X C The operations inherit the effectivity information from the routing header and the
operation activities inherit the effectivity information from the operations
X D The effectivity range defined for higher levels must cover the effectivity range
defined for the lower levels
X E Multiple MBOM assignment is possible
2. Match the item in the first column to the corresponding item in the second column to
name the different scenarios available for component assignment with parameter
effectivity.
Item Item
Quantity Split - Different Effectivity Ranges
Effectivity Split - Effectivity Split
Quantity Split and No Quantity Split
Quantity and Effectivity Split - BOM Instances
Effectivity Splits and No Effectivity Split

3. Which of the following options do you have to create inspection characteristics in the
Details Workspace?
X A Create inspection characteristics with or without a reference to existing master

inspection characteristics
X B Create a table of several inspection characteristics
X C Copy master inspection characteristics and change the attributes as necessary
4. With Reference standard texts, you can reference this type of standard text in the work
instructions for an operation activity in the shop floor routing, for example. In the routing,
this information is referenced only and cannot be changed. If, however, you create and
release a new version of a standard text that is already referenced in a work instruction,
the system automatically updates the standard text already referenced and always
displays the newest version.
X True
X False
5. With Copy Only standard texts, you can insert this type of standard texts in the work
instructions in the shop floor routing. In the routing, you can change the copied standard
text as necessary. In this case, if you create a new version of a standard text of the type
Copy Only that has already been used in a work instruction, the system does not
automatically update the text in the work instructions.
X True
X False
6. Which of the following are prerequisites to use Interactive Work Instructions?

X A The Single indicator is set for the default version profile in Customizing
X B You have created a routing with operations and operation activities
X C The Interactive Data Collection Allowed option in the Work Instructions tab for the
operation activity is selected
X D The operator is assigned to an operation activity
X E References are linked to an operation

Part III: Qualifications and
Buyoff
Lesson 1
Creating Qualifications and Assigning Qualifications to Objects in SAP S/4HANA PEO 320
Exercise 23: Create Qualifications and Assign Qualifications to Objects in SAP S/ 325
4HANA PEO
Lesson 2
Setting Up Buyoff Cycle Templates 329
Exercise 24: Set Up Buyoff Cycle Templates 331
Lesson 3
Assigning Qualifications and Buyoffs to Operation Activities 335
Exercise 25: Assign Qualifications and Buyoffs to Operation Activities 337
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Create qualifications and assign them to objects in SAP S/4HANA PEO

● Set up a buyoff cycle template
● Assign qualifications and buyoffs to operation activities

Unit 8
Lesson 1
Creating Qualifications and Assigning
Qualifications to Objects in SAP S/4HANA
PEO
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to create qualifications with proficiency levels, as well as how to
assign qualifications to manufacturing-related objects such as operation activities, work
centers, and materials. You also learn how to qualify a user and what impact assigned
qualifications have during production execution.
Business Example
complex products. When running production processes, the Company would like to make
sure that only qualified users with the defined skill levels have access to work centers and can
start working on specific production steps. John is tasked with explaining how qualifications
work in SAP S/4HANA PEO, creating them and assigning qualifications to manufacturing-
related objects.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Qualifications in SAP S/4HANA PEO

Qualifications define the level of expertise required of an operator to perform a certain task or
process a certain material on the shop floor. Only a person who has the appropriate
qualifications can be allowed to work in certain shop floor areas, operate specific work centers
or process certain materials, for example.
Qualifications are maintained in Customizing (SPRO) under the following path: SAP Reference
IMG → Personnel Management → Personnel Development → Master Data → Edit
Qualifications Catalog. Here, you define the qualifications catalog which contains all the
qualifications you need in your company. The qualifications catalog contains groups and
qualifications.

Lesson: Creating Qualifications and Assigning Qualifications to Objects in SAP S/4HANA PEO
Figure 225: Catalog: Change Configurations
When creating a new qualification, you can record the following data for it:
● Hierarchy level in qualifications catalog (indicates whether it is a qualification or a
qualification group)
● Object ID of qualification or qualification group
● Validity of a qualification
● Proficiency of a qualification using a quality scale
Qualification groups are used to structure the qualifications catalog. Qualification groups can
contain both qualifications and further qualification groups. You must assign each
qualification group a proficiency scale. This proficiency scale is then automatically assigned to
the qualifications in this group.
Note:
Scales are not passed on automatically between qualification groups.
You can describe the scale proficiencies for each qualification group in more detail by
entering user-defined texts for them. The proficiency descriptions of the corresponding scale
(if there are any) are proposed as defaults. You can overwrite these defaults as required.
Qualifications can include further qualifications. You cannot insert a qualification directly
under the root node of the catalog. You can enter a text to describe the proficiencies for each
qualification in more detail. The proficiency descriptions of the corresponding qualification
group are defaulted (if there are any); otherwise, the proficiency descriptions of the
corresponding scale are defaulted (once again, if there are any). You can overwrite these
defaults as required.
Note:
The proficiency descriptions of qualifications used in the appraisal catalog must
be edited in the qualifications catalog.
Assigning Qualifications to Manufacturing-Related Objects

The following objects can be assigned a qualification in SAP S/4HANA PEO:
● Work center

Unit 8: Advanced Shop Floor Routing Part III: Qualifications and Buyoff
● Material
● Operation activity
To assign qualifications to work centers or materials, use the Manage Object Qualification
Assignments app under the Production Execution Process Setup group on the SAP Fiori
launchpad. Use the Add button under the corresponding section to qualify a work center,
material, or both.
Figure 226: Assigning Qualifications to Manufacturing-related Objects
Specify work center or material, depending on what objects you want to add qualifications to.
Then, provide information about the plant, required proficiency level, and validity dates, and
save your changes.
Figure 227: Add Work Center
To assign qualifications to operation activities, use the Manage Shop Floor Routings app under
the Production Engineering group on the SAP Fiori launchpad. Here, select an operation
activity and choose the HR Qualifications tab. The system displays all qualifications that exist
in the system. Select a qualification, specify the proficiency level that is required to execute an
operation activity, and save your changes.

Figure 228: Select Proficiency
Note:
If you assign a qualification to a particular work center and assign this work center
to an operation in the routing, this qualification displays automatically in the HR
Qualifications tab for all the operation activities of this operation. Here, you can
also see the origin of the qualification. Such inherited qualifications cannot be
changed in the routing. However, you can assign more qualifications manually.
Assigning Qualifications to Users

Once you create all required qualifications and assign them to manufacturing-related objects,
you can assign qualifications to your production operators. In execution, when the production
operator starts an operation activity for either a material or a work center for which
qualifications have been defined, the system checks to make sure that the user has the
required qualification. If not, the system issues an appropriate message and the operation
activity cannot start.
Note:
Qualifications are assigned to individual users, not to a group or a team.
To qualify a user, enter the PPPM transaction in the SAP Easy Access menu. Here you select
business partner created for your user, add the qualification, and assign the proficiency level.
Note:
If the proficiency levels of the qualification assigned to an object and qualification
assigned to the user do not match, the user will not be able to start an operation
activity in production.

Figure 229: Assigning Qualifications to Users

Unit 8
Exercise 23
Create Qualifications and Assign Qualifications
to Objects in SAP S/4HANA PEO
Simulation: Create Qualifications and Assign Qualifications to Objects in SAP S/

4HANA PEO
For more information on Create Qualifications and Assign Qualifications to
Objects in SAP S/4HANA PEO, please view the simulation in the lesson Creating
Qualifications and Assigning Qualifications to Objects in SAP S/4HANA PEO in
your online course.
Business Example
related objects.
Note:
1. Create a qualification, ASSY-EXPRT-##, and assign a scale with proficiency levels to it.
2. Assign the newly created qualification, ASSY-EXPRT-##, to the work center STCON-##
with the proficiency level Very Good.
3. Assign the newly created qualification ASSY-EXPRT-## to the business partner that
corresponds to your user with the proficiency level Poor.

Unit 8
Solution 23
Create Qualifications and Assign Qualifications
to Objects in SAP S/4HANA PEO
Simulation: Create Qualifications and Assign Qualifications to Objects in SAP S/

4HANA PEO
For more information on Create Qualifications and Assign Qualifications to
Objects in SAP S/4HANA PEO, please view the simulation in the lesson Creating
Qualifications and Assigning Qualifications to Objects in SAP S/4HANA PEO in
your online course.
Business Example
related objects.
Note:
1. Create a qualification, ASSY-EXPRT-##, and assign a scale with proficiency levels to it.
a) Go to Customizing (SPRO) → SAP Reference IMG → Personnel
Management → Personnel Development → Master Data → Edit Qualifications Catalog.
b) Choose the ASSY-EXPERT catalog and choose the Create button.
c) Choose Qualification.
d) In the text field, enter ASSY-EXPRT-##.
e) Select a scale with proficiency levels.
f) Choose Save.
2. Assign the newly created qualification, ASSY-EXPRT-##, to the work center STCON-##
with the proficiency level Very Good.

b) Navigate to the Manage Object Qualification Assignments app under the Production
Execution Process Setup group on the SAP Fiori launchpad.
c) In the Qualification Desc field, enter ASSY-EXPRT-## and choose Go.
d) Select the returned Qualification to navigate to the details page.
e) Under the Work Centers section, choose the Add button.
f) In the Work Center field, enter STCON-##.
g) In the Plant field, enter 1020.
h) In the Required Skill Level field, choose Very Good.
i) Specify the end date as you like.
j) Choose Save.
3. Assign the newly created qualification ASSY-EXPRT-## to the business partner that
corresponds to your user with the proficiency level Poor.
a) In SAP Easy Access, enter transaction PPPM.
b) Find the business partner that corresponds to your user and double-click the name on
the left.
c) On the right, select the Qualifications tab and, on the bottom, choose the Create
button.
d) Choose the ASSY-EXPRT-## qualification and choose Continue.
e) In the Proficiency field, select Poor.
f) Choose Save.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 8
Lesson 2
Setting Up Buyoff Cycle Templates
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to create buyoff cycle templates and define individual buyoff
items with qualifications. You also learn what actions can be performed on an individual
buyoff item when required at an operation activity.
Business Example
complex products. When a production step has been completed by a production operator, the
Company requires that it is check and approved or rejected by the responsible supervisor or
quality engineer. Currently, the Company is using stamps and paper to confirm/revert
completion of a production step, however they are looking into digital way of performing the
same. John is tasked with explaining the buyoff concept in SAP S/4HANA PEO to Company
representatives and creating buyoff templates with corresponding assignments to be further
used in production.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Buyoffs in SAP S/4HANA PEO

A buyoff is an electronic way to approve the completion of a manufacturing activity performed
on a shop floor. This is an electronic substitute for the physical stamps applied to paper
travelers by various people in manufacturing to record (or warrant) that they performed,
checked or acknowledged the completion of a manufacturing activity.
The objective of the buyoff is to facilitate the elimination of paper documents in
manufacturing while at the same time providing at least the same level of recording or
warranting of the manufacturing activities performed. A buyoff template contains a list of
buyoffs and the sequence in which these buyoffs shall be performed. Creating templates
means that the buyoff information does not have to be created from scratch in every shop
floor routing in which buyoffs are required. You can copy the buyoff cycle templates and
adjust them as necessary. You can also add additional buyoffs.
If you assemble a product that must fulfill certain security or quality requirements, you can
introduce the buyoff cycles to ensure that the desired quality is reached. The buyoff cycle is
an electronic method to approve the completion of an operation activity. Any subsequent
operation activities cannot be started until the buyoff cycle of a previous operation activity
has been approved.
Benefits of Using Buyoffs

You can benefit from using buyoffs in SAP S/4HANA PEO in the following ways:
● Reduce rework time through real-time task validation.

● Reduce manufacturing cost through real-time task validation rather than validation later in
the process, which in turn brings down the overall cost.
● Conform to federal guidelines mandated by regulatory agencies.
Prerequisites
To work with buyoffs, the following prerequisites are necessary:
● Activate the function module in Customizing (SPRO) for production engineering and
operations.
● Create the team and function details.
Buyoffs are maintained in Manage Buyoff Cycle Templates app under the Production
Engineering group on the SAP Fiori launchpad. There, you can create a buyoff template and
assign one or several buyoff items to it.
Buyoff Item corresponds to an individual signature required to continue or compete a buyoff
cycle. The buyoff item is assigned a sequence, a team, and a set of required functions. Only
users that belong to the assigned team and have all the required functions can perform a
buyoff.
For a buyoff item, you can specify whether the qualification check has to be performed and
whether the buyoff item can be skipped without being approved/rejected.
Figure 231: Buyoff Template

Unit 8
Exercise 24
Set Up Buyoff Cycle Templates
Simulation: Set Up Buyoff Cycle Templates

For more information on Set Up Buyoff Cycle Templates, please view the
simulation in the lesson Setting Up Buyoff Cycle Templates in your online course.
Business Example
company requires that it is checked and either approved or rejected by the responsible
supervisor or quality engineer. Currently, the company uses stamps and paper to confirm or
revert the completion of a production step. However, they are looking into a new digital way of
performing this task. John has been given the task of explaining the buyoff concept in SAP S/
4HANA PEO to company representatives and creating buyoff templates with the
corresponding assignments to be used in production.
Note:
1. Create a buyoff template, QUAL-BF-##.
2. Add a Completion Check buyoff item, assign it Team-##, and enable the qualification
check for it.
3. Add a Quality Inspection buyoff item, assign it the team Team-##, and allow this buyoff
item to be skipped.

Unit 8
Solution 24
Set Up Buyoff Cycle Templates
Simulation: Set Up Buyoff Cycle Templates

For more information on Set Up Buyoff Cycle Templates, please view the
simulation in the lesson Setting Up Buyoff Cycle Templates in your online course.
Business Example
company requires that it is checked and either approved or rejected by the responsible
supervisor or quality engineer. Currently, the company uses stamps and paper to confirm or
revert the completion of a production step. However, they are looking into a new digital way of
performing this task. John has been given the task of explaining the buyoff concept in SAP S/
4HANA PEO to company representatives and creating buyoff templates with the
corresponding assignments to be used in production.
Note:
1. Create a buyoff template, QUAL-BF-##.

b) Navigate to the Manage Buyoff Cycle Templates app under the Production Engineering
c) Above the table on the right, choose the Add button.
d) In the Template field, enter QUAL-BF-##.
e) In the Description field, enter any text.
2. Add a Completion Check buyoff item, assign it Team-##, and enable the qualification
check for it.
a) Under the Buyoffs section, choose the Add button.
b) In the Sequence field, enter 1.
c) In the Description field, enter Completion Check.
d) In the Team Name field, enter Team-##.
e) In the Function field, enter EPO_S (Production Supervisor).

Lesson: Setting Up Buyoff Cycle Templates
f) Select the Check Qualification checkbox.
3. Add a Quality Inspection buyoff item, assign it the team Team-##, and allow this buyoff
item to be skipped.
a) Under the Buyoffs section, choose the Add button.
b) In the Sequence field, enter 2.
c) In the Description field, enter Quality Inspection.
d) In the Team Name field, enter Team-##.
e) Select the Skip checkbox.
f) Choose Save.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 8
Lesson 3
Assigning Qualifications and Buyoffs to
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to assign previously created qualifications and buyoff templates
to operation activities.
Business Example
complex products. After he has created qualification profiles with proficiency levels and
buyoff templates, he is now going to apply them to shop floor routings. Therefore, he needs to
review the shop floor routings and decide which operation activities require what level of
proficiency and which operation activities are required to be checked by a supervisor or
quality inspector. Only critical operation activities require a digital approval whereas simple
operation step allow the buyoff signature to be skipped.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Assignment of Qualifications and Buyoffs to Operation Activities

Qualifications and buyoffs can be assigned to operation activities on a shop floor routing
within the Manage Shop Floor Routings app. In the Details Workspace there are tabs for HR
Qualifications and Buyoffs where you can add one or more items to an operation activity.
Figure 233: Shop Floor Routing with HR Qualification
Figure 234: Shop Floor Routing with Buyoff


Unit 8
Exercise 25
Assign Qualifications and Buyoffs to Operation
Activities
Simulation: Assign Qualifications and Buyoffs to Operation Activities

For more information on Assign Qualifications and Buyoffs to Operation
Activities, please view the simulation in the lesson Assigning Qualifications and
Buyoffs to Operation Activities in your online course.
Business Example
buyoff templates, he is now going to apply them to shop floor routings. Therefore he needs to
proficiency and are required to be checked by a supervisor or quality inspector. Only critical
operation activities require a digital approval whereas simple operation step allow the buyoff
signature to be skipped.
Note:
1. Navigate to the My Inbox app in the Change Record group and check for new tasks.
The task “Setup Tool Tracking, Qualifications and Buyoff” should be ready after last task
has been completed (previous exercise).
2. Assign qualification ASSY-EXPRT-## to operation activities OA20 Install Red Roof and
Install Blue Roof.
3. Assign the buyoff template QUAL-BF-## to OA10 Final Inspection.

Unit 8
Solution 25
Assign Qualifications and Buyoffs to Operation
Activities
Simulation: Assign Qualifications and Buyoffs to Operation Activities

For more information on Assign Qualifications and Buyoffs to Operation
Activities, please view the simulation in the lesson Assigning Qualifications and
Buyoffs to Operation Activities in your online course.
Business Example
buyoff templates, he is now going to apply them to shop floor routings. Therefore he needs to
proficiency and are required to be checked by a supervisor or quality inspector. Only critical
operation activities require a digital approval whereas simple operation step allow the buyoff
signature to be skipped.
Note:
1. Navigate to the My Inbox app in the Change Record group and check for new tasks.
The task “Setup Tool Tracking, Qualifications and Buyoff” should be ready after last task
has been completed (previous exercise).
2. Assign qualification ASSY-EXPRT-## to operation activities OA20 Install Red Roof and
Install Blue Roof.
a) Switch to the Details workspace.
b) Choose the operation activity OA20 Install Red Roof in the routing structure on the left
of the screen.
c) Choose the HR Qualifications tab in the details section on the right.
d) Choose Add.
e) Choose the Search option for the Qualification field, and in the Search field, enter
ASSY-EXPRT-##. Choose Find.

Lesson: Assigning Qualifications and Buyoffs to Operation Activities
f) In the Proficiency field, choose Very High and choose OK.
g) The system assigns the qualification to the selected operation activity. You can also
see the appropriate icon in the Qualifications Exist column of the routing structure.
h) Copy the newly assigned qualification and paste it to operation activity OA20 Install
Blue Roof by using the Copy and Paste buttons of the qualifications menu.
3. Assign the buyoff template QUAL-BF-## to OA10 Final Inspection.

a) Choose the operation activity OA10 Final Inspection in the routing structure on the left
of the screen.
b) Choose the Buyoffs tab in the details section on the right.
c) Choose Add from Template and select the buyoff template QUAL-BF-## that you
created in a previous exercise.
The system assigns the buyoff sequence to the operation activity and displays the
appropriate icon in the routing structure table.
d) Save the routing.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 8
Learning Assessment
1. Which of the following statements about creating a new qualification are correct?
X A You can record the hierarchy level in the qualifications catalog (indicate whether it
is a qualification or a qualification group)
X B Scales are passed on automatically between qualification groups
X C You can record the Object ID of a qualification or qualification group
X D Qualifications can be maintained directly under the root node of the catalog
X E You can record the validity of a qualification
X F You can record the proficiency of a qualification using a quality scale
2. Which of the following manufacturing-related objects can be assigned to qualifications?

X A PRTs
X B Work instructions
X C Work center
X D Material
X E Operation activity
X F Quality inspections

3. Two of the following statements are benefits of using buyoffs, and the other two
statements are prerequisites of using buyoffs.
Statement Benefit or Prerequisite of Us-

ing Buyoffs?
Reduce rework time through
real-time task validation Prerequisites
Activate the function module Prerequisites
for production engineering and
Benefit
operations
Benefit
Reduce manufacturing cost
through real-time task valida-
tion rather than validation later
in the process, which in turn
brings down the overall cost
Create team and function de-
tails
4. You can only add one item to an operation activity in order to add qualifications and
buyoffs.
X True
X False

Part IV: Tool Tracking
Lesson 1
Defining Trackable Tools and Assigning them to Shop Floor Routings 344
Exercise 26: Assign a Trackable Tool to an Operation Activity and Add to Work 349
Instruction
Lesson 2
Releasing the Shop Floor Routing, Creating a Production Version, and Approving Workflow Review 355
Steps
Exercise 27: Release the Shop Floor Routing, Create a Production Version, and 357
Approve Workflow Review Steps
Lesson 3
Completing a Change Record 362
Exercise 28: Complete a Change Record 363
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Understand the concept of tool tracking

● Set up material master and equipment for trackable tools
● Assign a trackable tool to an operation activity
● Assign activity handles for automatic claiming and registering of tools
● Release the shop floor routing, create a production version, and approve workflow review
steps
● Change the status of a change record

Unit 9
Lesson 1
Defining Trackable Tools and Assigning them
to Shop Floor Routings
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to define material master and equipment for trackable tools and
how to assign them to operation activities.
Business Example
John is a production engineer at the low-volume A&D Company focusing on the final
assembly of complex products. The Company would like to use tool tracking capabilities in
order to ensure that the pre-assigned resources and tools are available and used during
production execution. John is given the task to set up the master data for trackable tools in
order to use them in production.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Tool Usage Tracking

In classical routings as well as in PEO-specific version controlled routings, it is possible to
attach Production Tools and Resources (PRT) to operations or operation activities
respectively. It is intended to instruct the operator on the shop floor to use a specific tool
when performing an operation activity. It is assumed that the tool is available at the required
time of execution and that the operator actually made use of it. However, there is no control
over whether this exact scenario happens.
The tool tracking capability within SAP S/4HANA PEO aims for a better control of tool usage
during production execution. On top of the standard PRT assignment to operation activities, it
implements two additional main concepts: The claiming and registering of tools.
Tool Claiming
Claiming a tool is like an exclusive reservation of a particular tool for a user, a work center, or
an operation activity. No other object or person gets access to this tool as long as it is
claimed. In addition, the claiming event also triggers a movement from the warehouse to the
production location which is reflected in the status CLM Claimed.

Lesson: Defining Trackable Tools and Assigning them to Shop Floor Routings
Note:
Transfer posting will only be done if BADI is implemented by a customer –
otherwise, only the status change takes place.
Claiming can be performed manually in the Track Tool Usage app or it can be configured to
take place automatically, triggered by an action handler assigned to the register action.
Tool Registration
Tool registration is the process of documenting the tool number that has been used in
production. The registration is performed manually by the operator after starting an operation
activity in the Perform Work app. If the registration is meant to be mandatory it can also be
configured as an automatic event triggered by an action handler assigned to an action (for
example, SAP_COMPLETE). In that case, it is even recommended to check and perform the
claim as well automatically, even though the claiming and registration events are not mutually
dependent.
The registered tool will be recorded for a serialized product (SFI@OA) or for an operation
activity (OA). It becomes part of the as-built BOM and is captured in the production action log.
Tool Tracking Process

In order to implement the tool tracking process, the material and equipment master data for
serialized tools has to be set up in a specific way before it is put on stock. Afterwards, it can be
used by the production engineer as an attachment to an operation activity of a version-
controlled shop floor routing. The production engineer may configure the PRT registration as
mandatory or optional depending on business requirements. They can even enforce the
registration and claim of tools by assignment of the corresponding action handler to specific
operation activities.
Figure 236: High Level Process Flow for Tool Tracking
During production, the operator and supervisor use the Track Tool Usage and Perform Work
apps in order to execute the claiming and registration events. All actions, whether performed
manually or automatically, are recorded in the Production Action log and the Product
Genealogy report for further reference.

Unit 9: Advanced Shop Floor Routing Part IV: Tool Tracking
Defining Trackable Tools

Trackable tools are like non-trackable tools based on material type PRT. They need to have a
serial number profile assigned and on the PRT view in the material master, the PRT Usage
must be defined as 009 (for PEO SFR) and the Registrable checkbox will be activated.
Figure 237: Material Type FHMI for Trackable Tools
Figure 238: PRT Usage 009 and Registrable Checkbox
Animation: Material Type FHMI for Trackable Tools

For more information on Material Type FHMI for Trackable Tools, please view the
animation in the lesson Defining Trackable Tools and Assigning them to Shop
Floor Routings, in your online course.
To define a specific instance of the above PRT material type, an equipment of category type P
(Production Resources/Tools) needs to be created. That equipment will be based on the
above material and gets a serial number and UII identifier assigned to make it unique.

Figure 240: Equipment View for Trackable Tool
For this instance, it is now possible to book a goods receipt using the MIGO transaction.
Thereafter, the status of the equipment will change to ESTO UII, which means that it is put
into the warehouse and the UII identifier is attached.
Figure 241: Equipment Status when Available in the Warehouse
Assignment of PRT to Operation Activity

The production engineer determines which tools are to be used at what operation activity.
They define if the tool usage has to be registered during execution or not. By default, the
Registrable flag is set when a tool is assigned to an operation activity (assuming the flag was
set in material master), but that can be changed for any particular tool or operation activity.

Figure 242: PRT Assignment to Operation Activity
If required, the production engineer additionally assigns specific action handlers related to
tools, for example, auto registration of claimed tools, check for PRT registration, or auto
unclaim of tools at operation activity complete.
Figure 243: Action Handler for Automatic Registration
Inserting PRT to Work Instructions

Finally, the trackable tools need to be added to the work instruction of the corresponding
operation activity to enable the operator to register the proper serial number of the tool
during production execution.
Figure 244: Work Instructions for PRT Registration

Unit 9
Exercise 26
Assign a Trackable Tool to an Operation
Activity and Add to Work Instruction
Simulation: Assign a Trackable Tool to an Operation Activity and Add to Work

Instruction
For more information on Assign a Trackable Tool to an Operation Activity and
Add to Work Instruction, please view the simulation in the lesson Defining
Trackable Tools and Assigning them to Shop Floor Routings in your online
course.
Business Example
Note:
group and check for new tasks.
The task for “Set up Tool Tracking” should be in your inbox. If not, go to the Manage Shop
Floor Routing app and find and open the shop floor routing from the previous exercise.
2. Assign the CLAMP_DEV-## tool to the operation activity Install Steering Console and
Windscreen (OA10).
3. Add the CLAMP_DEV-## tool to interactive work instruction.
4. Add four action handlers for automatic claiming and registration of the CLAMP_DEV-##
tool using the following information:
Parameter Value
Action SAP_START
Processing Point Postprocessing
Execution Sequence 1
Action Handler Name REGISTER_CLAIMED_PRT

Parameter Value
Action Handler is Active X
Parameter Value
Action SAP_COMPLETE
Processing Point Preprocessing
Action Handler Name CHECK_PRT_REGISTRATION
Parameter Value
Action SAP_COMPLETE
Action Handler Name UNCLAIM_PRT
Parameter Value
Action SAP_TOOL_REGN_SFI
Action Handler Name CLAIM_PRT_AT_REGISTRATION
5. Go back to your My Inbox app and complete the current task by choosing the Complete
button.
Submit.

Unit 9
Solution 26
Assign a Trackable Tool to an Operation
Activity and Add to Work Instruction
Simulation: Assign a Trackable Tool to an Operation Activity and Add to Work

Instruction
For more information on Assign a Trackable Tool to an Operation Activity and
Add to Work Instruction, please view the simulation in the lesson Defining
Trackable Tools and Assigning them to Shop Floor Routings in your online
course.
Business Example
Note:
The task for “Set up Tool Tracking” should be in your inbox. If not, go to the Manage Shop
Floor Routing app and find and open the shop floor routing from the previous exercise.
a) Select the Routing Details link.
2. Assign the CLAMP_DEV-## tool to the operation activity Install Steering Console and
Windscreen (OA10).
a) Expand the routing structure and select the operation activity Install Steering Console
and Windscreen (OA10).
b) Choose the Details Workspace.
c) Choose the PRTs tab on the right and choose the Add Material button.

d) Enter the following data and choose OK:
● Material: CLAMP_DEV-##
● PRT Control Profile: 1
● Quantity: 1
● Unit: EA
Note:
The Registrable setting can be turned on and off here, regardless of the
setting in the material master. Leave it turned on for the completion of the
following exercises.
3. Add the CLAMP_DEV-## tool to interactive work instruction.

a) Choose the Work Instructions tab.
b) Select the existing Work Instruction and choose the Edit button.
c) On the work instruction page, place the cursor at the last line and enter an instruction
such as Register tool used during production execution:
d) Next to the work instruction window, select the Production Resources/Tools table.
e) Select the equipment which you have added above to the PRT tab.
f) Select the Add Reference link above the table and select Material, Material Description,
and Serial Number in pop-up dialog.
g) Choose Done.
The app returns to the Details Workspace.
h) Save the routing.
4. Add four action handlers for automatic claiming and registration of the CLAMP_DEV-##
tool using the following information:
Parameter Value
Action SAP_START
Action Handler Name REGISTER_CLAIMED_PRT
Parameter Value
Action SAP_COMPLETE
Processing Point Preprocessing

Parameter Value
Action Handler Name CHECK_PRT_REGISTRATION
Parameter Value
Action SAP_COMPLETE
Action Handler Name UNCLAIM_PRT
Parameter Value
Action SAP_TOOL_REGN_SFI
Action Handler Name CLAIM_PRT_AT_REGISTRATION
a) Choose the Action Handler tab.
b) Add four new action handlers using the data provided in the tables.
c) Save the routing.
5. Go back to your My Inbox app and complete the current task by choosing the Complete
button.
Submit.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 9
Lesson 2
Releasing the Shop Floor Routing, Creating a
Production Version, and Approving Workflow
Review Steps
LESSON OBJECTIVES
steps
Extended Error Log and Production Version

See Unit 3 to understand the purpose of production versions. It describes in more detail how
production versions are created and how the extended error log can be used to perform a
consistency check on the shop floor routing.


Unit 9
Exercise 27
Release the Shop Floor Routing, Create a
Production Version, and Approve Workflow
Review Steps
Simulation: Release the Shop Floor Routing, Create a Production Version, and
For more information on Release the Shop Floor Routing, Create a Production
Version, and Approve Workflow Review Steps, please view the simulation in the
lesson Releasing the Shop Floor Routing, Creating a Production Version, and
Approving Workflow Review Steps in your online course.
Business Example
Eric is a production engineer in the low-volume A&D Company. He needs to review the shop
floor routing to ensure that it is ready to be released. If he finds any inconsistencies, he can
leverage workflow capabilities and reject the task. This resets the routing back to the previous
step so that the identified issue(s) can be fixed. Once the routing has been finalized, he needs
to release it, create a production version, and complete the routing workflow.
Note:
The task “Review and release routing” should be ready after the last task is complete
(previous exercise).
2. Create a production version using the following information:
● Production Version: PV01
● Prodn Version Text: INSTCABIN-##
● Material: INSTCABIN-##
● Plant: 1020
● Alternative BOM: 1
● BOM Usage: Versioned BOM

● Task List Type: Shop Floor Routing
● Group: From the previous exercise
● Group Counter: From the previous exercise

Unit 9
Solution 27
Release the Shop Floor Routing, Create a
Production Version, and Approve Workflow
Review Steps
Simulation: Release the Shop Floor Routing, Create a Production Version, and
For more information on Release the Shop Floor Routing, Create a Production
Version, and Approve Workflow Review Steps, please view the simulation in the
lesson Releasing the Shop Floor Routing, Creating a Production Version, and
Approving Workflow Review Steps in your online course.
Business Example
Eric is a production engineer in the low-volume A&D Company. He needs to review the shop
floor routing to ensure that it is ready to be released. If he finds any inconsistencies, he can
leverage workflow capabilities and reject the task. This resets the routing back to the previous
step so that the identified issue(s) can be fixed. Once the routing has been finalized, he needs
to release it, create a production version, and complete the routing workflow.
Note:
The task “Review and release routing” should be ready after the last task is complete
(previous exercise).
c) Check the routing by choosing the Check button in the menu bar.
d) Resolve all open issues listed in the message box. Select the Message Text link and
resolve the issue as per its description.
Only the following message should remain: Workflow has not yet been
completed.

e) Go back to your My Inbox app and select the Review and release routing task.
f) Go back to your shop floor routing and check it again.

Only the following message should remain: Workflow has not yet been completed.
g) Save and close the routing.
h) Go back to My Inbox app and choose Approve.
i) Enter a comment, if necessary, and choose Submit. The review step and the routing
workflow have been completed and the shop floor routing has been released.
The review step and the routing workflow have been completed and the shop floor
routing has been released.
2. Create a production version using the following information:
● Production Version: PV01
● Prodn Version Text: INSTCABIN-##
● Plant: 1020
● BOM Usage: Versioned BOM
● Task List Type: Shop Floor Routing
● Group: From the previous exercise
● Group Counter: From the previous exercise
a) Navigate to the Manage Production Version app in the Production Engineering group.
b) Choose Create to create a new production version for material INSTCABIN-##.
c) On the entry screen for a new production version, enter the data provided in the step.
d) Save the production version.

Lesson: Releasing the Shop Floor Routing, Creating a Production Version, and Approving Workflow Review Steps
LESSON SUMMARY
steps

Unit 9
Lesson 3
Completing a Change Record
LESSON OBJECTIVES

Unit 9
Exercise 28
Complete a Change Record
Simulation: Complete a Change Record

For more information on Complete a Change Record, please view the simulation
in the lesson Completing a Change Record in your online course.
Business Example
of complex products. Eric is responsible for integration of engineering changes into
manufacturing. Once the change request is completed and fully incorporated, the change
record can be closed.
Note:
1. Complete a change record in the Manage Engineering Changes app.

Unit 9
Solution 28
Complete a Change Record
Simulation: Complete a Change Record

For more information on Complete a Change Record, please view the simulation
in the lesson Completing a Change Record in your online course.
Business Example
of complex products. Eric is responsible for integration of engineering changes into
manufacturing. Once the change request is completed and fully incorporated, the change
record can be closed.
Note:
1. Complete a change record in the Manage Engineering Changes app.

a) Launch the Manage Engineering Changes app.
b) Open the change record created for CABIN-##.
c) Choose Change Status and select Start change process.

The change record status changes to Change request in work.
d) Choose Change Status and select Send change request for Approval.
The change record status changes to Change req. ready for approval.
e) Choose Change Status and select Approve change request.

The change record status changes to Change request approved.
f) Choose Change Status and select Start Design.

The change record status changes to Design in Process.
g) Choose Change Status and select Start Parts and BOM.

The change record status changes to Parts and BOM in Process.
h) Choose Change Status and select Complete Change.

The change record status changes to Change request completed. The change record is
completed. The Change Status option disappears.

Lesson: Completing a Change Record
LESSON SUMMARY


Unit 9
Learning Assessment
1. The following steps need to be completed before you use tool tracking as a production
engineer. What is the correct sequence of these steps?
0 Inserting PRT to work instructions
0 Assigning PRT to operation activity
0 Defining trackable tools


UNIT 10 Advanced Production Process
Lesson 1
Claiming and Registering Tools During Production Execution 370
Exercise 29: Claim and Register Tools During Production Execution 375
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Use the Track Tool Usage app to monitor status of trackable tools
● Start operation activities directly in the Perform Work app
● Claim and register tools during the production execution

Unit 10
Lesson 1
Claiming and Registering Tools During
Production Execution
LESSON OBJECTIVES
The Track Tool Usage App

The Track Tool Usage app is mainly used by production supervisors and operators to view the
status of available tools and claim or unclaim a particular tool as required.
Figure 248: Track Tool Usage App
Animation: Track Tool Usage App

For more information on Track Tool Usage App, please view the animation in the
lesson Claiming and Registering Tools During Production Execution, in your
online course.
The Track Tool Usage app offers the following capabilities:

● Search for equipment

Lesson: Claiming and Registering Tools During Production Execution
● Display the following information about equipment:

- Material
- Serial number
- Equipment status
- Plant and storage location
- Claimed by, claim Type, claimed for, claim date, total time claimed
● Claim equipment in the following scenarios:
- To be used in operation activities
- To be used by user
- To be used in the Work Center
● Unclaim claimed tools
● Put equipment on hold
● Release equipment from hold
Claiming a tool from the Track Tool Usage app is only possible in the status ESTO and if
assigned to an operation activity that has the status Initial, In Process, and Paused.
Status Lifecycle of Trackable Tools

The status of a tool determines if it is available for claiming or not. The status and action
schema defines how an action such as claim, unclaim, hold, or release changes the status
from one state to another state. The complete status lifecycle of a trackable tool is shown in
the schema in the following figure.
Figure 250: ToolStatusLifecycle_Image.pptx
Animation: Tool (Equipment) Status Lifecycle for Production

For more information on Tool (Equipment) Status Lifecycle for Production,
please view the animation in the lesson Claiming and Registering Tools During
Production Execution, in your online course.

Unit 10: Advanced Production Process
Tool Tracking in Execution

The production operator checks in his/her work queue to see if there are any trackable tools
required for the next operation activity he/she is going to start. If that is the case, he/she can
navigate from their work queue to the Track Tool Usage app in order to claim the required tool
for the intended operation activity.
Figure 252: My Work Queue: Navigation to Track Tool Usage App
Animation: My Work Queue: Navigation to Track Tool Usage App

For more information on My Work Queue: Navigation to Track Tool Usage App,
please view the animation in the lesson Claiming and Registering Tools During
Production Execution, in your online course.
Alternatively the production operator can use the Perform Work app to look for registrable
tools and navigate from here to the Track Tool Usage app for claiming. To register the tool
he/she could use a scanner device or select the available equipment/serial number from the
F4 value help.
Figure 254: Navigation to the Track Tool Usage App from the Perform Work App

The following information and actions for trackable tools are available from the Perform Work
app:
● Display information about PRTs in the left view of the screen.
● Scan by equipment or serial number or UII or select the available equipment/serial
number from the F4 value help.
● If an equipment was claimed to be used in this OA, it can be auto registered via an action
handler assigned to the Start action (action handler to auto register the tool instance’s
serial number/UII).
● Auto claim the equipment at registration via an action handler, if it was not already claimed
in the Track Tool Usage app before.
● Unregister equipment that has been registered by mistake.
● Unclaim the claimed tool.
● Provide navigation to the Track Tool Usage app.
● Perform the unclaim action automatically via an action handler assigned to the Complete
action.
● Check whether the equipment is in the “PRT Not Ready for use” status. In this case, the
equipment can’t be registered. The error message will display.
● Check whether all registrable equipment has been registered at completing OA via an
action handler assigned to the Complete action, if PRTs configured as registrable in OA.
● Enhance interactive WIs to support PRTs registration.
Product Genealogy and Production Action Log

Register and unregister actions are recorded in the production action log, including a
timestamp with the user who executed the action. Detailed information about the tool, such
as serial number and UII, is added to the Product Genealogy report and As-Built hierarchy.
Figure 255: Product Genealogy and Production Action Log

Note:
Enhancements to Authorization Objects
Provide the ability to control authorizations for managing tools via the new
authorization object C_MPE_TTU.
1. Allow users to claim and unclaim PRTs.
2. Allow users to put/release PRTs from hold.
Note:
Enhancements to BADIs
1. Extend the Order Update interface’s BADI with information about OA level and
tool assignment to OA to support custom extensions for tool determination at
order release and update.
2. Introduce a BADI to perform inventory posting for the tool instance from one
storage location to another during claim/unclaim.

Unit 10
Exercise 29
Claim and Register Tools During Production
Execution
Simulation: Claim and Register Tools During Production Execution

For more information on Claim and Register Tools During Production Execution,
please view the simulation in the lesson Claiming and Registering Tools During
Production Execution in your online course.
Business Example
Tom is a production operator at the low-volume A&D Company focusing on the final assembly
of complex products. The Company would like to use tool tracking capabilities in order to
ensure that the pre-assigned resources and tools are available and used during production
execution. Tom starts the operation activity task he has been assigned to and finds the tools
which have been attached to the activity by the production engineer. He is able to select,
claim, and register the tool upon the start of the operation activity. All steps are also recorded
in the action log and product genealogy report.
Note:
1. Create a production order for the installation kit INSTCABIN-## with quantity 1 and the
Current date scheduling type.
2. Open the order in the Perform Work (Order/Operation) app and navigate to operation
activity Install Steering Console and Windscreen (OA10).
3. Check the status of the assigned PRT in the Track Tool Usage app.
4. Check the product genealogy and action log entries.
5. Check the Claim and Registration History of used tools in the Track Tool Usage app.

Unit 10
Solution 29
Claim and Register Tools During Production
Execution
Simulation: Claim and Register Tools During Production Execution

For more information on Claim and Register Tools During Production Execution,
please view the simulation in the lesson Claiming and Registering Tools During
Production Execution in your online course.
Business Example
Tom is a production operator at the low-volume A&D Company focusing on the final assembly
of complex products. The Company would like to use tool tracking capabilities in order to
ensure that the pre-assigned resources and tools are available and used during production
execution. Tom starts the operation activity task he has been assigned to and finds the tools
which have been attached to the activity by the production engineer. He is able to select,
claim, and register the tool upon the start of the operation activity. All steps are also recorded
in the action log and product genealogy report.
Note:
1. Create a production order for the installation kit INSTCABIN-## with quantity 1 and the
Current date scheduling type.
a) Open the SAP Fiori launchpad and navigate to the Create Production Order app in the
Shop Floor Control and Manufacturing Execution group.
b) Enter the following data on the initial screen and choose Continue:
● Material: INSTCABIN -##
Note:
If the system prompts you for a sales order or WBS element, choose
Cancel and ignore the follow-up warning message.

c) In the Total Qty field, enter 1.
d) In the Scheduling Type dropdown list, select Current date and press Enter.
Note:
If the system prompts you to enter Effectivity Parameters, enter M1 and 1
for material and serial number, respectively.
e) In the Production Supervisor field in the Assignment view, enter DMO.
f) Make sure that the correct production version has been picked for the order in the
Master Data view.
g) Choose Release.
h) Choose Save.
Note:
If the system shows a dialog with a message about an error in calculating
costs, ignore it and choose Yes to save the order.
i) Note down or copy the order number.
2. Open the order in the Perform Work (Order/Operation) app and navigate to operation
activity Install Steering Console and Windscreen (OA10).
Manufacturing Execution group in the SAP Fiori launchpad.
b) Enter the order number you noted down earlier and select the first operation.
The app opens the worker dialog with the first operation activity in the queue.
c) Start the operation activity by choosing Start.
3. Check the status of the assigned PRT in the Track Tool Usage app.
a) Scroll down in the work instruction until you reach the section with assigned PRTs and
copy the material number of the assigned tool.
b) Navigate to the Track Tool Usage app by opening the navigation menu in the action
control bar at the bottom.
c) Search for the assigned tool using its material number, select the unclaimed material
from the equipment list, and then copy the serial number.
d) Go back to the Perfom Work app and enter the serial number in the work instruction
for registration.
The app has registered the tool and automatically claims it because of the assigned
action handler CLAIM_PRT_AT_REGISTRATION.
e) Navigate to the Track Tool Usage app again to check the status now.
The status of the tool has changed to CLM (Claimed).

f) Go back to the Perfom Work app and book the serial number and quantities for the
consumed components (follow the work instructions). Enter a value for the serial
number for STCON-##, for example 1.
g) Collect the quality data as asked for in the work instruction.
h) Complete the operation activity (OA10).
4. Check the product genealogy and action log entries.

b) Enter the order number of the previously executed order and choose Go.
c) Select the order to view the details.
d) Navigate to the Serial Numbers section and select the serial number that you executed
previously.
e) Review the collected information about the serial number on this page.
f) Go to the Operation Activities section and select the operation activity Install Steering
Console and Windscreen (OA10) from the previous task.
g) On the Operation Activity page, review the collected information about consumed
components, assigned PRTs, Inspection Characteristics, and the Action Log.
5. Check the Claim and Registration History of used tools in the Track Tool Usage app.
a) Navigate to the Track Tool Usage app in the Shop Floor Control and Manufacturing
Execution group in the SAP Fiori launchpad.
b) Enter the material/serial number of the tool used in the above example.
Notice that the tool has been automatically unclaimed with the Complete action
because of the action handler UNCLAIM_PRT.

LESSON SUMMARY


Unit 10
Learning Assessment
1. Which of the following statements about the functionalities of the Perform Work app are
correct?
X A You can unclaim the claimed tool
X B You cannot navigate to the Track Tool Usage app
X C You can auto claim the equipment at registration via an action handler, if it was not
claimed in the Track Tool Usage app before
X D The system will not display information about PRTs on the screen
X E You can enhance interactive WIs to support PRTs registration
2. Register and unregister actions are recorded in the production action log with a
timestamp and the user who executed the action.
X True
X False
3. Detailed information about the tool, such as serial number and UII, is added to the product
genealogy report and as-built hierarchy.
X True
X False
4. You cannot identify which operator or which work center the equipment is used in.
X True
X False


UNIT 11 Setup of a Project System for
Unitized Products
Lesson 1
Creating a Project for a Complex Product Using the Manage Major Assembly Projects App 385
Exercise 30: Create a New Project Using the Manage Major Assembly Projects App 391
Lesson 2
Assigning Reference Points to the Major Assembly BOM Items (Installation Kits) 397
Exercise 31: Assign Reference Points to the Major Assembly 401
Lesson 3
Exploding the BOM for a Major Assembly 404
Exercise 32: Run the BOM-PS Interface to Explode the BOM 407
Lesson 4
Performing MRP to Create Demand and Planned Orders 411
Exercise 33: Perform MRP to Create Demand and Planned Orders 415
Lesson 5
Converting Planned Orders to Production Orders 418
Exercise 34: Convert Planned Orders to Production Orders 421
Lesson 6
Checking Major Assembly Projects 425
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Explain how project management is integrated with the PEO complex assembly process
● Assign reference points to the major assembly’s BOM items
● Create a new complex assembly project from Manage Major Assembly Projects app
● Create reference points in Customizing
● Assign reference points to the project’s network activities
● Explode the BOM for a major assembly using the BOM-PS interface

Unit 11: Setup of a Project System for Unitized Products
● Perform the MRP run to create demand and planned orders for installation kits
● Convert the planned orders for the installation kits into production orders to trigger the
execution process
● Perform consistency checks for your major assembly projects

Unit 11
Lesson 1
Creating a Project for a Complex Product
Using the Manage Major Assembly Projects
App
LESSON OBJECTIVES
PEO Integration with SAP S/4HANA Project Management

The complex assembly process starts with the creation of a project for a new model and unit
of an end item. The project coordinates the subsequent process steps such as product
engineering, production engineering, production planning, and production execution. The
process aims at fulfilling the following objectives:
● Tight integration of engineering and production execution
● Support individually configured end items by means of parameter effectivity
● Top-down project planning
● Support the collaboration of people with different roles
● Check and validate user entry to prevent errors early and make the process more robust
● Automate process steps that can be automated. In the figure, Complex Assembly Process,
the clock indicates a periodic job
● Record all process steps for later reference, root-cause analysis, and process
improvement activities
The following figure shows an overview of the complex assembly process. This unit explains
the details of the process.

Figure 257: Complex Assembly Process
The process begins with design engineering. Product engineers create the engineering BOMs
(EBOMs) for the end item and its major assemblies. They know that an end item with a certain
unit number is intended for a customer with certain preferences and restrict the validity of
customer-specific BOM items accordingly.
After product engineers have created and released the EBOMs for the end item and its major
assemblies, they are handed over to production engineering. Production engineers are
responsible for designing the production process needed to assemble the product. They
group the major assembly components into installation kits (EBOM to MBOM handover) and
create a routing for every installation kit. By releasing the MBOMs and installation kit routings,
production engineers can communicate to production planners that the design is completed,
and production may start.
In production planning, the production planner creates a project for the end item and
determines the start and end dates of every installation kit by scheduling network activities.
After network activities have been scheduled, Material Requirements Planning (MRP) knows
the requirement dates of every installation kit and can create planned orders automatically.
The planned orders are usually converted into production orders automatically when they
reach their opening period.
Major assemblies do not show up in production planning but are represented by networks in
the project system.
Installation kits are represented in both the project system and in PEO: In the PS they are
represented by the activities of a major assembly’s network. Scheduling and sequence
control are done based on the network activities.

Lesson: Creating a Project for a Complex Product Using the Manage Major Assembly Projects App
Figure 258: Project System and SAP PEO
The production orders are managed and executed in production operations. Production
supervisors release the production orders as soon as all prerequisites for starting production
have been fulfilled. This communicates to the production operators that they can start work
on the production order. The production operators then assemble installation kit components
into the major assembly as instructed by the installation order (production order for the
installation kit). On completion of the installation order, an artificial inventory for the
installation kit is posted. This inventory is cleared automatically by a periodic job.
Project Creation
The first thing the production planner does when it has been decided to build an end item
(such as an aircraft or ship) is to create a new project. The project is required (or at least a
separate WBS element) for every end item. There can be several levels of WBS elements to
collect the costs of all the lower level networks and networks defining the sequence in which
the required activities must be performed.
If you are creating an end item for the first time, the production planner builds a new project
from scratch. Initially it will have only a few WBS elements and/or networks for different
major assemblies. The networks can be used to allocate resources to the project and to plan
the production sequence of the different major assemblies on a very high level. More details
are added to the project later. Especially after the creation of installation kits, production
planners have to add network activities for every installation kit.
If you have built the end item before, it is recommended that you create a project by copying
the project of the previous unit of this end item. In this case, you only have to adapt the
networks to bill of material (BOM) changes. If you create a project by copying it from an
earlier project, you do not need to copy components and documents because these will be
added later by the BOM transfer. It is recommended to copy projects together with network
activities and relationships, but not with components. Components will be added when you
explode every major assembly’s BOM using the Transfer Bill of Material transaction
(CN33_N).
Note:
This is the classic project management way of creating a project, whereby
reference points have to be maintained manually in BOM items and in network
activities.

Figure 259: Project Creation
Figure 260: Project Setup
Every project and WBS element needs a unique name. Naming conventions should be agreed
to make sure that WBS elements can be copied from the template project and new names can
be determined with little effort. In the test system, a project copy replaces the first 10
characters of every WBS element in the project with the first 10 characters in the project.
Ideally, every WBS element in the project should differ in the characters 11 to 24. Then, the
WBS elements can be copied into the new project without adjusting names. If the name of a
WBS element is not unique, you will be prompted to make it unique when copying the project.
The project must use non-valuated project stock to make sure that major assemblies and
installation kits of different projects are separated.

Figure 261: Non-Valuated Stock
Major assemblies are specially engineered or configured to meet customer requirements.

Usually, every major assembly is different. If parameter effectivity is used, then BOM
explosion selects the components needed for a specific unit of the product. The project’s end
item unit is defined by means of parameter effectivity. Select a network and choose
Extras → Parameter effectivity to update the parameter effectivity values.
Figure 262: Parameter Effectivity Values
Subsequent processes (BOM explosion in particular) have to differentiate the demand from
different end items. BOM explosion needs every end item’s individual parameter effectivity
(such as model and unit). If a new project is created for every end item, then every project has
a separate set of networks. All networks of the same project must have the same parameter
effectivity.

If several end items are made using the same project, then separate networks and WBS
elements are required for every end item. Different networks of the same project have
different model-units in this case, and a validation is not possible.

Unit 11
Exercise 30
Create a New Project Using the Manage Major
Simulation: Create a New Project Using the Manage Major Assembly Projects
App
For more information on Create a New Project Using the Manage Major
Assembly Projects App, please view the simulation in the lesson Creating a
Project for a Complex Product Using the Manage Major Assembly Projects App
Business Example
Janice is a production planner with the low-volume A&D Company focusing on the final
assembly of complex products. She has been told to set up a new project to start the planning
process for a specific model/unit of one of A&D’s products. For the initial creation of the
project, she uses the Manage Major Assembly Projects app.
Note:
Task 1: Preliminary Steps Before Project Creation
1. Create an MBOM for the LEGOBOAT-## material (end item).
2. Assign reference points to the installation kits of MBOM CABIN-## before you release
CABIN-## MBOM (reference points are explained in more detail in the next lesson).
Task 2: Create a Project for the End Item LEGOBOAT-##
1. Navigate to the Manage Major Assembly Projects app in the Complex Assembly Project
Management group on the SAP Fiori launchpad.
2. Create a new project with the following input parameters:

Project Data
● Project Definition: BOAT_M1_U10-##
● Description: Boat M1 U10 ##
● Start Date: Current date

● Finish Date: Current date + 10 weeks
● Project Profile: Complex Assembly
● Material: M1
● Serial no.: 10
BOM Selection
● Plant: 1020
● Usage: V
Network Data
● MRP Controller: 001
● Planner Group: 1
Default for WBS Element
● Create WBS Element for Every Major Assembly: Select
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to create another project for model M2 and unit 15.

Unit 11
Solution 30
Create a New Project Using the Manage Major
Simulation: Create a New Project Using the Manage Major Assembly Projects
App
For more information on Create a New Project Using the Manage Major
Assembly Projects App, please view the simulation in the lesson Creating a
Project for a Complex Product Using the Manage Major Assembly Projects App
Business Example
assembly of complex products. She has been told to set up a new project to start the planning
process for a specific model/unit of one of A&D’s products. For the initial creation of the
project, she uses the Manage Major Assembly Projects app.
Note:
Task 1: Preliminary Steps Before Project Creation
1. Create an MBOM for the LEGOBOAT-## material (end item).

a) Navigate to the Cockpit for VMP app in the Production Engineering group.
b) On the initial screen, search for material LEGOBOAT-## and Planning Scenario 05.
c) Select the returned planning scope in the table and choose the Start Planning button
from the main menu.
The Visual Manufacturing Planner opens and shows the legoboat EBOM in the Source
Panel.
d) Select the legoboat node of the EBOM structure and choose the Plan as Designed
button from the Source Panel menu.
The EBOM gets transferred to the Target Panel.
e) Select the legoboat node of the EBOM structure and choose the Mark for release
button in the Target Panel.
f) Choose Save and Exit Planning from the main menu (confirm the pop-up message
box).
The LEGOBOAT-## MBOM is saved and released.

2. Assign reference points to the installation kits of MBOM CABIN-## before you release
CABIN-## MBOM (reference points are explained in more detail in the next lesson).
a) Navigate to the Maintain Bill of Material app in the Material BOM group on the SAP Fiori
launchpad and search for the CABIN-## MBOM:
● Plant: 1020
● BOM Usage: V
The status of the BOM version should be In Process.
b) Select the MBOM and choose Edit.
c) Choose the chevron button for the BOM item INSTCABIN-## to navigate to its details.
d) Assign the reference point 10000014-0020 to it. Add it to the Reference Point field in
the General Data section.
Figure 264: Reference Point Field
e) Choose the Apply button at the bottom of the page.

The system applies the changes and navigates back to the previous screen with the
components list.
f) Choose the chevron button for the BOM item INSTRADAR-## to navigate to its details.
g) Assign the reference point 10000014-0030 to it. Add it to the Reference Point field in
the General Data section
h) Choose the Apply button at the bottom of the page.

The system applies the changes and navigates back to the previous screen with the
components list.
i) Choose the Save button at the bottom of the page.
j) Choose the Release button at the top-right corner.

The system releases the MBOM for the major assembly CABIN-##.
Task 2: Create a Project for the End Item LEGOBOAT-##
1. Navigate to the Manage Major Assembly Projects app in the Complex Assembly Project
Management group on the SAP Fiori launchpad.
2. Create a new project with the following input parameters:

Project Data

● Project Definition: BOAT_M1_U10-##
● Description: Boat M1 U10 ##
● Start Date: Current date
● Finish Date: Current date + 10 weeks
● Project Profile: Complex Assembly
● Material: M1
● Serial no.: 10
BOM Selection
● Plant: 1020
● Usage: V
Network Data
● MRP Controller: 001
● Planner Group: 1
Default for WBS Element
● Create WBS Element for Every Major Assembly: Select
a) Choose the Create button above the Projects list and enter the input data.
b) Choose Save.
The project has been saved. Changes to the project can be done in the Project Builder
app provided as a navigation link on top of the projects list or by using the CJ20_N
transaction in the SAP GUI.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to create another project for model M2 and unit 15.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 11
Lesson 2
Assigning Reference Points to the Major
Assembly BOM Items (Installation Kits)
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Reference Points
A major assembly has one or more networks with a network activity for every installation kit.
The major assembly also has a BOM with a component for every installation kit. Major
assemblies are specially engineered or configured to meet engineering and/or customer
requirements. BOM explosion for a major assembly determines the installation kits needed
for a specific unit of the end item. BOM explosion for a major assembly has to assign every
component (installation kit) to a network activity.
Reference points define where in the activity network an installation kit will be assembled.
Network activities have reference points and manufacturing BOM items also have reference
points. If the reference point of the manufacturing BOM item and the reference point of the
network activity match, then the manufacturing BOM item is assigned to the network activity.
Reference points are a prerequisite of the manufacturing BOM maintenance.
Hint:
Major assemblies can have several hundred installation kits and every installation
kit needs a unique reference point. Therefore, you should create the reference
points in a systematic way.
In Customizing for Project System → Bill of Material Transfer → Define Reference Points for
BOM Transfer, you define reference points which you can then use as a logical link between
BOM items (installation kits) and network activities.

Figure 265: Reference Points for BOM Transfer
Note:
You have to define a reference point in this Customizing activity before you can
use it in the reference point field in the BOM item or network activity.
You should assign reference points to network activities in the project. If you use a template
to create a new project, the reference points will be maintained in the network activities of the
template and will be copied with them to a new project. You can modify them as required in
the Assignments tab of the network activity.
Figure 266: Assignments Tab

Lesson: Assigning Reference Points to the Major Assembly BOM Items (Installation Kits)
Animation: Assignments Tab

For more information on Assignments Tab, please view the animation in the
lesson Assigning Reference Points to the Major Assembly BOM Items
(Installation Kits), in your online course.
The same reference points shall be assigned to BOM items (installation kits) of the major
assembly. Every time the BOM-PS Interface is executed, the system compares the reference
points of all the selected BOM components and all the selected network activities. If there is a
match, the system creates, changes, or deletes the BOM components in the corresponding
network activities.
Figure 268: Major Assembly From BOM to WBS Element


Unit 11
Exercise 31
Assign Reference Points to the Major
Assembly
Simulation: Assign Reference Points to the Major Assembly

For more information on Assign Reference Points to the Major Assembly, please
view the simulation in the lesson Assigning Reference Points to the Major
Assembly BOM Items (Installation Kits) in your online course.
Business Example
John is a production engineer with the low-volume A&D company focusing on the final
assembly of complex products. He has already created an MBOM for a major assembly and
now has to assign reference points to its BOM items (installation kits) to do BOM explosion for
the major assembly and assign installation kits to the project’s network activities.
Note:
1. Assign reference points to the network activities of the major assembly CABIN-## using
the following data:
● For the BOM item INSTCABIN-##, enter the reference point 10000014-0020.
● For the BOM item INSTRADAR-##, enter the reference point 10000014-0030.

Unit 11
Solution 31
Assign Reference Points to the Major
Assembly
Simulation: Assign Reference Points to the Major Assembly

For more information on Assign Reference Points to the Major Assembly, please
view the simulation in the lesson Assigning Reference Points to the Major
Assembly BOM Items (Installation Kits) in your online course.
Business Example
John is a production engineer with the low-volume A&D company focusing on the final
assembly of complex products. He has already created an MBOM for a major assembly and
now has to assign reference points to its BOM items (installation kits) to do BOM explosion for
the major assembly and assign installation kits to the project’s network activities.
Note:
1. Assign reference points to the network activities of the major assembly CABIN-## using
the following data:
● For the BOM item INSTCABIN-##, enter the reference point 10000014-0020.
● For the BOM item INSTRADAR-##, enter the reference point 10000014-0030.
a) Call transaction CJ20N to start the Project Builder and open project definition
BOAT_M1_U10-## from the previous exercise.
b) Navigate to the network activity INSTCABIN-## and choose the Assignment tab.
c) In the Reference point field, enter the reference point 10000014-0020.
d) Repeat the above substeps for network activity INSTRADAR-## and in the Reference
point field, enter 10000014-0030.
e) Save the project.

Lesson: Assigning Reference Points to the Major Assembly BOM Items (Installation Kits)
LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 11
Lesson 3
Exploding the BOM for a Major Assembly
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Explosion of Major Assembly BOMs

The explosion of major assembly BOMs is a step that production planners need to perform if
they have created an end item project from a template.
The sequence in which the installation kits of a major assembly are assembled is defined by a
network. There should be one network for every major assembly.
Note:
The networks can be reused for different major assemblies of the same end item.
The installation kits of a major assembly are defined in the major assembly’s BOM. The
network should have activities for every installation kit. The BOM-PS interface explodes the
major assembly’s BOM (which determines reservations for installation kits) and assigns the
reservations to the network activities with matching reference points. Classic project
management uses transaction CN33 for this purpose. The transaction CN33_N has been
introduced to better support the major assembly and installation kit process.
● It is designed for version-managed BOMs. It determines a released BOM version of the
major assembly if the BOM version is not specified, or allows you to explode the BOM
version you specify.
● It creates a serial number for every project and major assembly which is used later in the
genealogy report.
● It records the BOM version used to explode a major assembly. In future versions of the
software, this will enable the system to notify users about new BOM versions available for
a major assembly.
The Transfer Bill of Material transaction CN33_N explodes the major assembly’s BOM to
determine the installation kits needed for a specific unit of the major assembly by evaluating
parameter effectivity. It assigns a reservation for every required installation kit to a network
activity if the reference points in the BOM item and in the network activity match.

Lesson: Exploding the BOM for a Major Assembly
Figure 270: Transfer Bill of Material
Figure 271: Result Overview
In addition, the BOM-PS interface adds material component demand to the project for the
different installation kits if the BOM item and the network activity have matching reference
points.

Figure 272: Reference Points

Unit 11
Exercise 32
Run the BOM-PS Interface to Explode the BOM
Simulation: Run the BOM-PS Interface to Explode the BOM

For more information on Run the BOM-PS Interface to Explode the BOM, please
view the simulation in the lesson Exploding the BOM for a Major Assembly in your
online course.
Business Example
assembly of complex products. Janice has already created a new project from an existing
template for a new end item. Now she wants to run the PEO BOM-PS interface to explode the
major assembly’s BOM to add components.
Note:
1. Run the PEO BOM-PS interface to assign components to the project network’s activities
for the following:
● CABIN-## created for M1, Unit 10

Unit 11
Solution 32
Run the BOM-PS Interface to Explode the BOM
Simulation: Run the BOM-PS Interface to Explode the BOM

For more information on Run the BOM-PS Interface to Explode the BOM, please
view the simulation in the lesson Exploding the BOM for a Major Assembly in your
online course.
Business Example
template for a new end item. Now she wants to run the PEO BOM-PS interface to explode the
major assembly’s BOM to add components.
Note:
1. Run the PEO BOM-PS interface to assign components to the project network’s activities
for the following:
a) Go to transaction CN33_N to run the PEO BOM-PS interface to assign components to

the project network’s activities.
b) Enter the network number for CABIN (created for M1 Unit 10) in the Network field.
c) Enter the major assembly CABIN-## in the Material field.
d) Enter Plant 1020 and specify the following:
● BOM Usage: V
● BOM Version: 0001 (if you do not specify the BOM version, the latest version is
selected)
e) Execute the PEO BOM-PS interface.

The system displays the Result Overview screen showing one installation kit
INSTCABIN-## in the Assignments section.

Lesson: Exploding the BOM for a Major Assembly
f) Choose Save.
g) Go to transaction CJ20N and open the Project Builder again.
h) Open your project and expand the structure. The system has assigned the component
INSTCABIN-## to the network activity.
i) Repeat steps a to h to run the PEO BOM-PS interface for the network number for
CABIN created for M2, Unit 15.
Note:
Close all other SAP GUI windows, especially the Project Builder window.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 11
Lesson 4
Performing MRP to Create Demand and
Planned Orders
LESSON OBJECTIVES
MRP for Installation Kits

The Monitor Material Coverage app shows shortages for all materials in your area of
responsibility. Transaction MD04 displays material demand for installation kits. After major
assembly BOM explosion and before running the MRP, all demands for installation kits have
shortages.
Figure 274: Monitor Material Coverage
Every demand is in a separate make-to-project planning segment. This separates the demand
from the demands of other WBS elements.

Figure 275: Stock/Requirements List
MRP makes sure that all material shortages are covered by corresponding material receipts
such as planned orders, purchase requisitions, and delivery schedule lines. After MRP, the
shortage of the installation kit is covered by a new planned order and the shortage is no longer
displayed in the Monitor Internal Requirements app.
Figure 276: Stock/Requirements List
Note:
The production planner has to reschedule network activities if a component is
missing at the planned start date, if a resource is overloaded, if a predecessor
activity was not completed on time, or if another constraint is violated.

Lesson: Performing MRP to Create Demand and Planned Orders
MRP adjusts planned orders to changed material demand. If the material demand date or the
quantity changes, then MRP adjusts the planned orders covering the demand. If the
installation kit BOM is changed then MRP automatically re-explodes the planned orders as
long as their components are not firmed.


Unit 11
Exercise 33
Perform MRP to Create Demand and Planned
Orders
Simulation: Perform MRP to Create Demand and Planned Orders

For more information on Perform MRP to Create Demand and Planned Orders,
please view the simulation in the lesson Performing MRP to Create Demand and
Planned Orders in your online course.
Business Example
template for a new end item. She has also exploded the BOM to add components. Now she
has to create demand and planned orders for the installation kits.
Note:
1. Perform an MRP run to create demand and planned orders for the installation kit
INSTCABIN-##.

Unit 11
Solution 33
Perform MRP to Create Demand and Planned
Orders
Simulation: Perform MRP to Create Demand and Planned Orders

For more information on Perform MRP to Create Demand and Planned Orders,
please view the simulation in the lesson Performing MRP to Create Demand and
Planned Orders in your online course.
Business Example
template for a new end item. She has also exploded the BOM to add components. Now she
has to create demand and planned orders for the installation kits.
Note:
1. Perform an MRP run to create demand and planned orders for the installation kit
INSTCABIN-##.
a) Go to transaction MD02 to create a material demand for the installation kit INSTCABIN-
##.
b) In the Material field, enter INSTCABIN-##.
c) Enter the MRP area 1020 and plant 1020.
d) Choose Enter or Save and Continue from the menu.

The system asks you to check the input parameters.
e) Choose Enter or Save and Continue from the menu.

After the MRP run, the shortage of the installation kit is covered by new planned
orders.

Lesson: Performing MRP to Create Demand and Planned Orders
LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 11
Lesson 5
Converting Planned Orders to Production
Orders
LESSON OBJECTIVES
execution process
Planned Order to Production Order Conversion

Planned order conversion converts the selected planned orders into production orders.
Production supervisors monitor and manage production orders. Thus, planned order
conversion communicates the need to produce a certain material or to assemble an
installation kit from production planning to production supervisors.
Planned orders are usually converted automatically into production orders if they reach the
opening period. The opening period should be short. The later a planned order is converted,
the longer the system can automatically adjust planned orders to reflect changes of BOM,
network activity dates, customer preferences, and so on.
Planned order conversion replaces planned orders by production orders.
Production planners can use transactions CO41 and MD02 or the Manage Planned Orders app
to convert planned orders.
Figure 278: Planned Order to Production Order Conversion
Release Network Activity

Production planners release network activities if they consider an activity feasible and if there
is nothing more important or more urgent to do on the required resources.

Lesson: Converting Planned Orders to Production Orders
By releasing the network activity, the production planner communicates to the production
supervisor that production planning is complete and production execution may be started.
Production engineering releases BOMs and routings. Production planning releases network
activities and converts planned orders.
A stepwise release provides more control over what can be started in execution. For long-
lasting projects, individual network activities should be released, not the complete project.
1. Select a network activity.
2. Choose Edit → Status → Release.

This implicitly partially releases the parent network and WBS element(s).
Figure 279: Release Network Activity
Animation: Release Network Activity

For more information on Release Network Activity, please view the animation in
the lesson Converting Planned Orders to Production Orders, in your online
course.
Basically, production planners determine the start date of every network activity. Production
planners of course do not only have to consider the work center capacity and the priority of
the different projects but also technical sequence constraints between the network activities
of a project. Production engineers use activity relationships to define the sequence in which
network activities shall be performed. To make the production process more robust, it is
useful to check on release of a network activity if the predecessor activities have been
completed. The error message will display that you must also release the predecessor
activities before saving the project.

Figure 281: Error Message

Unit 11
Exercise 34
Convert Planned Orders to Production Orders
Simulation: Convert Planned Orders to Production Orders

For more information on Convert Planned Orders to Production Orders, please
view the simulation in the lesson Converting Planned Orders to Production
Orders in your online course.
Business Example
template for a new end item. She has exploded the BOM to add components and she has
performed MRP to create planned orders for the installation kits. Her next task is to convert
the planned orders into production orders to initiate execution.
Note:
1. Convert the planned orders for the installation kit INSTCABIN-## for the two projects M1,
Unit 10 and Unit 15 in the MRP area 1020 and Plant 1020 into production orders.

Unit 11
Solution 34
Convert Planned Orders to Production Orders
Simulation: Convert Planned Orders to Production Orders

For more information on Convert Planned Orders to Production Orders, please
view the simulation in the lesson Converting Planned Orders to Production
Orders in your online course.
Business Example
template for a new end item. She has exploded the BOM to add components and she has
performed MRP to create planned orders for the installation kits. Her next task is to convert
the planned orders into production orders to initiate execution.
Note:
1. Convert the planned orders for the installation kit INSTCABIN-## for the two projects M1,
Unit 10 and Unit 15 in the MRP area 1020 and Plant 1020 into production orders.
a) Open the Stock/Requirements List using transaction MD04 and enter the following data
on the initial screen:
● Plant: 1020
b) Choose the Details button next to the planned order for M1, Unit 10 to display its
details.
c) Choose the Prod. Ord. button in the opened Additional MRP Data for Element dialog
box to convert the planned order for INSTCABIN-## to a production order.
The system navigates to the Production Order Create: Header screen.
d) Choose Save.
The planned order has been converted to a production order and the system navigates
back to the Stock/Requirements List screen.
e) Choose Refresh in the toolbar.

The planned order has been replaced by the new production order.
f) Go to transaction CJ20N and open the Project Builder.

Lesson: Converting Planned Orders to Production Orders
g) Open your project and expand the structure.
h) Select the network activity for INSTCABIN-## and choose Edit → Status → Release.
The network activity is released and this implicitly partially releases the parent network
and WBS element(s).
i) Repeat steps b - h for M2, Unit 15.

LESSON SUMMARY
execution process

Unit 11
Lesson 6
Checking Major Assembly Projects
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Check Major Assembly Projects

Managing projects for complex technical products such as aircrafts, ships, train sets, power
stations, production facilities, and so on is challenging for many reasons. Several thousand of
components must be assembled and a corresponding number of assembly activities must be
managed in the project system. The assembly process takes a long period of time, sometimes
even years, and the work of various experts in different areas should be coordinated as
required. All components must be assembled in a feasible sequence. Components for
assembly should be procured or manufactured in time, but not too early in the process. As the
assembly process takes a long period of time and technology is complex, engineering
changes are very frequent and need to be considered even if the assembly process has
already started.
The Check Major Assembly Project app helps you to maintain the consistency of the project
created for the major assembly. It enables you to detect issues of the major assembly BOMs
and the networks needed to assemble a certain model and unit. Due to the complex
structures of major assembly projects, different types of issues can prevent the smooth
planning and execution of your projects. Using this app, you as the production planner, can
drill down from every issue into a related app or transaction that allows you to fix the issue.
Figure 283: Check Major Assembly Project

Figure 284: Major Assembly Issues
Figure 285: Maintain BOM
After returning to and refreshing the list of issues, you can continue fixing any remaining
issues, whereby you can freely decide whether and how to fix an issue and thus have full
control of the project.
LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 11
Learning Assessment
1. The following steps will be covert by using Project Management in SAP S/4HANA within
PEO Integration. Put these steps in the correct order.
0 Engineering
0 Production execution
0 Production engineering
0 Production planning
2. Major assemblies can have only one installation kind and every IKIT can have multiple
reference points.
X True
X False
3. Why is it good to use an explosion of major assembly BOMs with network?

X A Networks can be reused for different major assemblies of the same end item
X B Determination of reservations for installation kits is included
X C It will not generate serial number for every project in advance
X D It is designed for version-managed BOMs
4. How can you monitor internal requirements for shortages of all materials?
X A MD04
X B CS02
X C The Monitor Material Coverage app
X D MIGO

5. Which role should release the following items?

Role Release Item

Production Planner Network activities
Production Engineer BOMs and routings
6. The Check Major Assembly Project app helps to maintain the consistency of the project
created for the major assembly.
X True
X False
7. Individual configuration of end items by means of parameter effectivity is not supported.

X True
X False
8. The Check Major Assembly Project app provides you with which of the following
information?
X A Several reference points for one major assembly
X B Additional information such as information about inconsistency
X C Possible reasons of inconsistencies
X D Information on how to fix any inconsistencies
9. With the Check Major Assembly Project app, can you navigate to the relevant app or
transaction to fix an issue to set up a project?
X A Yes
X B No

UNIT 12 Management of Engineering
Change During the Production
Process
Lesson 1
Creating and Releasing a New EBOM Version 430
Exercise 35: Create a New EBOM Version and Release it in the Maintain Bill of Material 431
App
Lesson 2
Managing Unassigned Modified EBOM Versions 435
Exercise 36: Reuse an Existing Planning Scope and Create a New Change Record with 437
New Versions for EBOM and MBOM
Lesson 3
Performing Change Impact Analysis 441
Exercise 37: Analyze the Change Impact of an Engineering Change 445
Lesson 4
Implementing Engineering Changes and Performing Execution 448
Exercise 38: Implement Engineering Changes, Execute the Updated Production Order, 453
and View the As-Built Record for the Production Order
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Create and release a new EBOM version

● Manage unassigned EBOM versions
● Reuse an existing planning scope and create a new change record with new versions for
EBOM and MBOM
● Analyze the impact of the changes and add impacted objects to the change record
● Implement engineering changes
● Use the favorites and routing comparison capabilities
● Implement engineering changes, execute the updated production order, and view the as-
built record for the production order

Unit 12
Lesson 1
Creating and Releasing a New EBOM Version
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Business Example
Eric is a design engineer in the low-volume A&D Company focusing on the final assembly of
complex products. The company would like to start modeling its production process in the
SAP S/4HANA PEO product. Eric is responsible for changes to product design. To improve a
particular product, he wants to replace an old component with a newly developed one. To do
this, he creates a new version of the engineering bill of material (EBOM) with the new
component in place of the old one. He can finalize the EBOM structures by releasing them in
VEMP, or in the Maintain Bill of Material app.

Unit 12
Exercise 35
Create a New EBOM Version and Release it in
the Maintain Bill of Material App
Simulation: Create a New EBOM Version and Release it in the Maintain Bill of
Material App
For more information on Create a New EBOM Version and Release it in the
Maintain Bill of Material App, please view the simulation in the lesson Creating
and Releasing a New EBOM Version in your online course.
Business Example
Note:
1. Create a new version of a DBOM and convert it into a new version of EBOM for CABIN-##.

Unit 12
Solution 35
Create a New EBOM Version and Release it in
the Maintain Bill of Material App
Simulation: Create a New EBOM Version and Release it in the Maintain Bill of
Material App
For more information on Create a New EBOM Version and Release it in the
Maintain Bill of Material App, please view the simulation in the lesson Creating
and Releasing a New EBOM Version in your online course.
Business Example
Note:
1. Create a new version of a DBOM and convert it into a new version of EBOM for CABIN-##.
a) Launch the back-end system.
b) Use the CV02N transaction code to change a document info record.
c) In the Document field, enter S4280-LEGOBOAT-##.
d) In the Document Type field, enter DES.
e) In the Document part field, enter 000.
f) In the Document version field, enter 01.
g) Choose Enter.
h) Choose the Object Links tab, choose the Material Master tab, and in the Material field,
enter CABIN-##.
i) Choose Save.

Lesson: Creating and Releasing a New EBOM Version
j) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, open the Maintain Bill of Material app in the Production
Engineering group.
k) To search for the EBOM for CABIN-##, in the Material field, enter CABIN-##. Choose
Go.
l) Select the radio button next to the retrieved EBOM. Choose the Create Version link on
the upper-right corner of the BOM table.
m) Choose OK in the pop-up window that appears.

The system displays the 0002 EBOM version in edit mode.
n) Change the RDROOF-## component to RDROOF-ENH-##.
o) Choose Save.
p) Choose the Release button in the upper-right corner of the screen.

The new EBOM version, 0002, has been released.

Unit 12: Management of Engineering Change During the Production Process
LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 12
Lesson 2
Managing Unassigned Modified EBOM
Versions
LESSON OBJECTIVES
EBOM and MBOM
The Manage Unassigned EBOMs App

The Manage Unassigned EBOMs app displays new and modified engineering BOMs (EBOMs)
waiting for manufacturing handover as a worklist. You can display a net change to understand
what exactly has been changed between EBOM versions. Choose the material number to view
the BOM net change.
The net change of an EBOM version displays the delta between the given version and its
previous version. This gives you an idea of the scope of the change that has taken place in the
BOM.
Figure 287: Manage Unassigned EBOMs
If the relevant planning scope and change record are already available, they are displayed and
the user can select them.

Figure 288: Planning Scope and Change Record

Unit 12
Exercise 36
Reuse an Existing Planning Scope and Create a
New Change Record with New Versions for
EBOM and MBOM
Simulation: Reuse an Existing Planning Scope and Create a New Change Record
with New Versions for EBOM and MBOM
For more information on Reuse an Existing Planning Scope and Create a New
Change Record with New Versions for EBOM and MBOM, please view the
simulation in the lesson Managing Unassigned Modified EBOM Versions in your
online course.
Business Example
of complex products. Eric has been given the task of managing the unassigned engineering
and manufacturing BOMs and assigning BOMs to planning scopes and change records. He
monitors his queue for new and modified engineering BOMs waiting for manufacturing
handover.
1. Reuse an existing planning scope and change record for the major assembly CABIN-## in
plant 1020.

Unit 12
Solution 36
Reuse an Existing Planning Scope and Create a
New Change Record with New Versions for
EBOM and MBOM
Simulation: Reuse an Existing Planning Scope and Create a New Change Record
with New Versions for EBOM and MBOM
For more information on Reuse an Existing Planning Scope and Create a New
Change Record with New Versions for EBOM and MBOM, please view the
simulation in the lesson Managing Unassigned Modified EBOM Versions in your
online course.
Business Example
of complex products. Eric has been given the task of managing the unassigned engineering
and manufacturing BOMs and assigning BOMs to planning scopes and change records. He
monitors his queue for new and modified engineering BOMs waiting for manufacturing
handover.
1. Reuse an existing planning scope and change record for the major assembly CABIN-## in
plant 1020.
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, in the Production Engineering group, navigate to the
Manage Unassigned EBOMs app.
b) Enter the following data in the filter section and choose Go.
● EBOM Type: Group EBOM
The system finds the second version (0002) available for the EBOM for the specified
material.
c) In the Material column, choose the link of the material name.

The system displays the EBOM net change.
d) Choose Assign.
The system displays the screen with the recommended planning scopes.
e) Select the planning scope that is proposed by default.
f) In the Change Record section, choose the Create button.
g) In the Record Type dropdown list, select MFG.

Lesson: Managing Unassigned Modified EBOM Versions
Leave the Change Record field empty because the system will generate the number
automatically.
h) In the Description field, enter any free-form text.
i) In the Change Responsible field, browse and search for your user.
j) Choose Create.
k) Choose the Assign and Navigate button.

The system navigates to the Manage Engineering Changes app.
l) Note down the change record number.

LESSON SUMMARY
EBOM and MBOM

Unit 12
Lesson 3
Performing Change Impact Analysis
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Change Impact Analysis

Changes in the product design can result in changes to the process plan (routing), MBOM,
production orders, and so on. Before the manufacturing engineer can incorporate the
changes, he/she can assess the impact of the changes and analyze if the incorporation of
changes will be simple or complex.
Figure 290: Analyze Change Impact: List View
The analysis result can be displayed in a list or in a network view. While the list is useful to
display all the impacted objects in a consolidated manner, the network provides insights on
the relationships between the objects.

Figure 291: Analyze Change Impact: Network View
For each EBOM and MBOM, the manufacturing engineer can see the components which have
been deleted, modified, or added. The manufacturing engineer can also go to the Stock
Requirement app to check the material details of the corresponding object.
Figure 292: EBOM and MBOM Components
For each routing, the manufacturing engineer can see the list of all activities and the impacted
activities and navigate to the Manage Shop Floor Routings app for further details.

Lesson: Performing Change Impact Analysis
Figure 293: Operations and Activities
For each unitized BOM and routing, the manufacturing engineer can see the effectivity
impacted by the change.
The impact analysis also considers the changes to the parameter effectivity in the BOMs for
the unitized material.
The changes that are determined between the current and previous versions of EBOMs and
MBOMs also consider the changes in the effectivity of the items.
Figure 294: Changes Between Current and Previous BOM Versions
The BOM changes are considered to determine the related objects and identify whether or
not they are impacted. For example, the production orders for the parameter values (units)
that are part of the BOM changes are marked as Impacted production orders.
Settings for Change Records

You can configure the objects for which you want to analyze the change impact and the
specific settings for each analysis object. To do this, in Customizing, go to Manufacturing for
Production Engineering and Operations → Production Engineering → Change Impact Analysis.


Unit 12
Exercise 37
Analyze the Change Impact of an Engineering
Change
Simulation: Analyze the Change Impact of an Engineering Change

For more information on Analyze the Change Impact of an Engineering Change,
please view the simulation in the lesson Performing Change Impact Analysis in
your online course.
Business Example
of complex products. Eric has been given the task to incorporate engineering changes. He
wants to gauge the impact of the changes on the product, process, and people (organization)
involved before incorporating the changes.
1. Analyze the impact of the change and add impacted objects to the change record.
2. Put the impacted production order on hold in order to implement the engineering change.

Unit 12
Solution 37
Analyze the Change Impact of an Engineering
Change
Simulation: Analyze the Change Impact of an Engineering Change

For more information on Analyze the Change Impact of an Engineering Change,
please view the simulation in the lesson Performing Change Impact Analysis in
your online course.
Business Example
of complex products. Eric has been given the task to incorporate engineering changes. He
wants to gauge the impact of the changes on the product, process, and people (organization)
involved before incorporating the changes.
1. Analyze the impact of the change and add impacted objects to the change record.
a) Navigate to the Manage Engineering Changes app in the Change Record group on the
SAP Fiori launchpad.
b) Search for the change number created in the previous exercise and open it.
c) Choose the Analyze Impact button at the top of the screen.

A list with impacted and not impacted objects (for example, BOMs, routings,
production order) is displayed.
d) Choose the Network Graph button above the table on the right.
All objects impacted by the change (replacement of RDROOF by RDROOF-ENH) are
displayed in the color red. Other not impacted objects are displayed in the color gray.
e) Select the impacted objects one by one, choose the Actions button right next to it, and
select the Add to Change Record action.
f) Select the impacted production order and choose the Details button next to it.
Another panel with details on the production order opens on the right.
2. Put the impacted production order on hold in order to implement the engineering change.
a) At the top of the Details panel, choose the Hold action from the dropdown menu (…) to
put the order on hold.
b) In the Put on Hold dialog box, in the Hold dropdown, choose Order and enter any note
as a description.
c) Choose the Put on Hold button.

Lesson: Performing Change Impact Analysis
LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 12
Lesson 4
Implementing Engineering Changes and
Performing Execution
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Implementation of Engineering Changes

After identifying impacted manufacturing objects and adding them to the change record, the
production engineer needs to incorporate the modified EBOM into the MBOM.
From the change record, the production engineer selects the planning scope and launches
SAP Visual Enterprise Manufacturing Planner (VEMP). The Source Panel displays the most
recently released version of the EBOM. The Target Panel displays the latest version of the
MBOMs available in the system.
If new components are added to the EBOM, they are displayed only in the Source Panel and
remain available for planning. The components that were planned but have now been deleted
from the EBOM are not displayed in the Source Panel. The system also identifies changes in
component quantities and parameter effectivity. To highlight these inconsistencies, any
nodes with such changes are marked with an error message in the target panel. The
production engineer reconciles the MBOM with the EBOM and saves the new MBOM version.
The routing needs to be updated with the new MBOM. In the change record, the production
engineer selects the routing, navigates to the Manage Shop Floor Routings app and creates
the new routing version, selects the latest MBOM version, assigns the new component to the
correct operation activity, and adjusts component allocations as required. If necessary, the
production engineer can update inspection characteristics, PRTs, or work instructions. To
make these changes visible in production execution, the production engineer can enter a
change alert count so that the production operator has to acknowledge the changes before
proceeding.
Comparison of Routing Versions

Production engineers can compare the routing that they are currently working on with a
previously released version to see at a glance which data has been changed, inserted, or
deleted. In the comparison mode, you can easily identify changes to the structure of the
routing and changes in the Details tabs. One of the main advantages of the comparison mode
is that you can easily manage all the changes that have been made from version to version
and use this past information to update the current version as necessary.

Lesson: Implementing Engineering Changes and Performing Execution
For each operation, operation activity, and operation activity object (such as inspections
characteristics and PRTs), you can see whether or not they are the same in both versions.
The system also shows the attributes of both versions for a given element (such as standard
values).
Figure 296: Comparison of Routing Versions
Work instructions are compared for all available languages and the differences are
highlighted.
Figure 297: Differences Between Work Instructions
You can easily copy operations, operation activities, or operation activity objects from one
version to the other.

Figure 298: Transfer Operations, Operation Activities, or Operation Activity Objects
Favorites
To facilitate and speed up the creation and maintenance of shop floor routings, you can
leverage routing templates by reusing them when creating new shop floor routings or
updating routing versions. If you have objects that you need to reuse regularly, you can copy
them to the favorites. Here, you can organize the objects (templates) in folders. For example,
you can create folders for each different type of object or process, which makes it easy to find
the object you are looking for.
The two main favorites folders are Common Favorites and My Favorites.
The Common Favorites folder is visible to all users and the objects available in its sub-folders
can be reused by all users. However, only certain users with the necessary authorization can
create new common folders or change existing ones. Only these authorized users can add
new objects to the common folders using copy and paste or drag and drop. All users,
however, can reuse the objects available in the common folders.
The My Favorites folder is user specific. Here, production engineers can maintain their own
user-specific favorites information that is visible only to them.

Figure 299: Favorites
To add a template to a routing, you can copy it from the favorites folder and paste into a
routing, operation, or operation activity in a routing. Alternatively, you can drag and drop it.


Unit 12
Exercise 38
Implement Engineering Changes, Execute the
Updated Production Order, and View the As-
Built Record for the Production Order
Simulation: Implement Engineering Changes, Execute the Updated Production

Order, and View the As-Built Record for the Production Order
For more information on Implement Engineering Changes, Execute the Updated
Production Order, and View the As-Built Record for the Production Order, please
view the simulation in the lesson Implementing Engineering Changes and
Performing Execution in your online course.
Business Example
of complex products. He is responsible for implementing engineering changes and updating
the manufacturing objects impacted by the changes. He needs to update the MBOM, shop
floor routing, and production order.
Note:
Task 1: Incorporate the Modified EBOM Into the MBOM
1. Perform handover of EBOM to MBOM for the CABIN-## material.
Note:
Use SAP Business Client to launch the apps for this exercise.
Task 2: Update the Routing with the Latest MBOM and Engineering Changes
1. Create a new version of the routing for the INSTCABIN-## material.
2. Add the Color qualitative inspection to the operation activity where the RDROOF-ENH-##
component is assigned.
3. Add any available equipment number to the same operation activity where the RDROOF-
ENH-## component is assigned.
4. Assign the change alert counter of 1 to the routing header.

Task 3: Update the Production Order and Execute Production
1. Read master data for the order to update it with the new version of MBOM and routing for
the INSTCABIN-## material and release the order from hold.
2. Execute the production order using the Perform Work app by starting and completing its
operation activities, acknowledging change alerts, assembling components, collecting
inspection characteristics, getting qualifications, and managing buyoffs. Complete all
operation activities of the production order.
3. View the production action log and as-built record for the production order.

Unit 12
Solution 38
Implement Engineering Changes, Execute the
Updated Production Order, and View the As-
Built Record for the Production Order
Simulation: Implement Engineering Changes, Execute the Updated Production

Order, and View the As-Built Record for the Production Order
For more information on Implement Engineering Changes, Execute the Updated
Production Order, and View the As-Built Record for the Production Order, please
view the simulation in the lesson Implementing Engineering Changes and
Performing Execution in your online course.
Business Example
of complex products. He is responsible for implementing engineering changes and updating
the manufacturing objects impacted by the changes. He needs to update the MBOM, shop
floor routing, and production order.
Note:
Task 1: Incorporate the Modified EBOM Into the MBOM
1. Perform handover of EBOM to MBOM for the CABIN-## material.
Note:
Use SAP Business Client to launch the apps for this exercise.
a) In the Manage Engineering Changes app, search for the change record number that
you noted down in the previous exercise.
b) Choose the chevron icon at the end of the line.

The system navigates to the details of the change record.
c) Scroll down to the Planning Scopes section.
d) Select the radio button next to the planning scope and choose the Launch VEMP
button above the table.

The system launches VEMP and displays the RDROOF-## component that has been
changed.
e) In the Target Panel, select INSTCABIN-## and move it to the Working Panel.
If the Working Panel is not shown by default, use the Layout button to add it.
f) Select the INSTCABIN ## node of the structure and then in the Working Panel, choose
the Semi-Automatic Update button.
The system prompts you to create a new version of the manufacturing BOM.
g) Choose Continue.
The system updates the RDROOF-## component in the MBOM.
h) Move the result from the Working Panel to the Target Panel.
i) Choose Save and Exit.

The system creates the second version of the MBOM for INSTCABIN-##. The MBOM
status is In Process.
j) Choose Continue in the dialog.

The system returns to the Manage Engineering Changes app and adds the newly
created MBOM to the change record.
k) To see the changes, refresh the page (F5).
Task 2: Update the Routing with the Latest MBOM and Engineering Changes
1. Create a new version of the routing for the INSTCABIN-## material.

a) In the Manage Engineering Changes app, search for the change record number that
you noted down in the previous exercise.
b) Choose the chevron icon at the end of the line.

The system navigates to the details of the change record.
c) Scroll down to the Routings section.
d) Choose the routing and then choose the Manage Routing button above the table.
The system navigates to the Manage Shop Floor Routings app.
e) In the routing toolbar, choose Create New Version.

The system creates the successive routing version 2.
f) Choose the Details Workspace.
g) Choose the routing header in the Details Workspace and then choose the MBOMs tab
on the right.
h) The new MBOM version is automatically assigned. If not, choose the Change MBOM
version icon and select the newly available MBOM version.
i) Switch to the Component Assignment Workspace and check that the RDROOF-ENH-
## component is visible in the components list and is assigned to the correct
operation activity.
2. Add the Color qualitative inspection to the operation activity where the RDROOF-ENH-##
component is assigned.
a) Switch back to the Details Workspace.

b) Choose the operation activity where the RDROOF-ENH-## component is assigned.
c) In the top menu, choose the Show Favorites button.
d) In the Common Favorites folder on the left, choose the Common Inspection
Characteristics folder.
e) Choose the Color inspection characteristic. In the toolbar at the top, choose the Copy
Selected Element button.
f) In the far-right pane, choose the Inspection Characteristics tab. In the toolbar, choose
the Paste button.
g) In the menu at the top, choose the Hide Favorites button.

The system adds the newly created inspection characteristics to the operation activity.
3. Add any available equipment number to the same operation activity where the RDROOF-
ENH-## component is assigned.
a) Choose the PRTs tab.
b) Choose Add. In the dropdown list, select the Add Equipment option.
c) Browse for the Equipment field and browse for any available equipment number.
d) In the PRT Control Profile field, enter 1.
e) Choose OK.
The system assigns the equipment number to an operation activity.
4. Assign the change alert counter of 1 to the routing header.

a) Choose the operation activity on the left.
b) Choose the General tab on the right and then set the change alert counter to 1.
c) Choose the Compare button in the upper menu, use the default selections in the
Comparison Options dialog box, and then choose Apply.
The system launches the routing comparison screen to compare the old and the new
routing versions.
d) Exit comparison mode by choosing the Exit Comparison Mode button in the menu
above.
e) Choose the routing header in the Details Workspace, choose the Materials/MBOM tab,
and in the MBOMs section, choose the Release MBOM button.
f) Choose Save.
g) Choose Save and Release Routing.
h) Use the default values and choose OK.
Task 3: Update the Production Order and Execute Production
1. Read master data for the order to update it with the new version of MBOM and routing for
the INSTCABIN-## material and release the order from hold.
a) In the Manage Production Orders app, search for the production order that you put on
hold due to the engineering change.
b) Select the checkbox next to the order on the left.

c) Choose the Read Master Data button above the table on the right.
The system updates the order to the latest version of the MBOM and routing and
resets the status to Created.
d) Choose the chevron icon at the end of the line with the order.
The system navigates to the order details screen.
e) In the Issues section, choose the Release Hold link.
f) Enter any available reason code and enter any free-form text for the note, if
configured.
g) Choose Release.
The system releases the hold from the production order.
h) Choose the Release button to release the production order.
2. Execute the production order using the Perform Work app by starting and completing its
operation activities, acknowledging change alerts, assembling components, collecting
inspection characteristics, getting qualifications, and managing buyoffs. Complete all
operation activities of the production order.
a) On the SAP Fiori launchpad, in the Shop Floor Control and Manufacturing Execution
group, go to the Perform Work (Order/Operation) app.
d) Choose Go.
The system navigates to the Perform Operation Activity screen.
e) Choose Start to start the Install Steering Console and Windscreen operation activity.
f) Enter any available serial number for the Steering Console component.
g) Enter 100 for the Transparency of Glass inspection characteristics three times: for the
left side, front side, and right side.
h) Enter 180 for the Steering Angle inspection characteristics.
i) Add a serial number for the tool to register (for tool registration details, refer to the
unit Advanced Shop Floor Routing Part IV: Tool Tracking.)
j) Choose the Complete button in the footer bar.

The system navigates to the next operation activity.
k) Choose Start to start the Install Red Roof operation activity.

The system displays a change alert dialog with the information that there is a new
inspection characteristic and a new equipment assigned to the activity.
l) Choose the Acknowledge button to continue.

The system displays the error message that the user is not qualified. Copy the
qualification ID if it is available.
m) Log on to SAP Logon. On the SAP Easy Access screen, call up the PPPM transaction.
n) Choose Business Partner in the tree on the left and choose Search.

o) Choose the New button in the bottom menu to enter your user, for example, S4280-
##.
p) Change the proficiency level to Very Good.
q) On the SAP Fiori launchpad, in the Shop Floor Control and Manufacturing Execution
group, go to the Perform Work (Order/Operation) app.
r) In the Order field, enter the order number that you have worked with.
s) In the Operation field, enter 0010.
t) Choose Go.
The system navigates to the Perform Operation Activity screen.
u) Choose Start to start the Install Red Roof operation activity.

The system displays a change alert dialog with the information that there is a new
inspection characteristic and a new equipment assigned to the activity.
v) Choose the Acknowledge button to continue.

The operation activity starts.
w) Enter any available serial number for the RDROOF-ENH-## component.
x) Enter a value for the Color inspection characteristic.
y) Choose the Complete button in the footer bar.

The system navigates to the next operation activity.
z) Choose Start to start the Final Inspection operation activity.
aa) Choose the Labor Off button in the footer bar.
ab) Choose the Buyoff button in the footer bar and choose OK in the pop-up window.
ac) Enter comments for the operator's buyoff.

The system accepts the buyoff, but the operation activity remains in the In Process
status due to the pending buyoff from the quality engineer.
ad) On the SAP Fiori launchpad, in the Shop Floor Control and Manufacturing Execution
group, go to the Manage Buyoffs app.
ae) In the Material field, enter INSTCABIN-## and choose Go.
af) Choose the chevron button at the end of the line with the buyoff.
ag) Choose the Approve button in the footer bar.
ah) In the Notes field, Enter any free-form text, if required.
ai) Choose Approve.

The system accepts the buyoff and completes the operation activity, as well as
operation and production order.
3. View the production action log and as-built record for the production order.
a) On the SAP Fiori launchpad, in the Production Monitoring group, go to the Production
Action Log app.
b) In the Production Order field, enter the order number that you have worked with.

c) Choose Go.
The system displays the list of all actions executed by the production worker when
processing the operation activities of the order. You can see the component assembly
actions, starts, completions, and so on.
d) On the SAP Fiori launchpad, in the Production Monitoring group, go to the Product
Genealogy app.
e) In the Order field, enter the order number that you worked with.
f) Choose Go.
g) Choose the chevron button at the end of the line.

The system navigates to the report of the serial number you have worked with. There
you can see the executed operation activities, assembled components with serial/
batch numbers, and so on.

LESSON SUMMARY


Unit 12
Learning Assessment
1. Which transaction is needed to change Document Info Records?

X A CV02N
X B CC02
X C CA02
2. In which app can you display a net change to identify what exactly has been changed
between BOM versions?
X A Maintain Bill of Material
X B Manage Unassigned MBOMs
X C Manage Unassigned EBOMs
3. What can be displayed in Change Impact Analysis?

X A The impacted objects in a consolidated manner
X B Insights on the relationships between the objects, provided by the network
X C The components that have been deleted, modified, or added
X D The current status of work for each impacted object
X E A list of all activities and the impacted activities
X F Each unitized BOM and routing that is effectivity impacted by the change
X G The changes to the parameter effectivity in the BOMs for unitized material
X H The operator who is working on this item right now
X I The work center where it is built

4. After identifying impacted manufacturing objects and adding them to the change record,
the production engineer needs to incorporate the modified EBOM into the MBOM. Match
the item to the panel that it is shown in in VEMP.
Item Panel in VEMP

The most recently released Source Panel
version of the EBOM
Source Panel
The latest version of the
Target Panel
MBOMs available in the sys-
tem Target Panel
New components are added to
the EBOM
Any nodes with such changes
are marked with an error mes-
sage
5. Which of the following are the main advantages of comparing routing versions?
X A You can easily manage all the changes that have been made from version to
version
X B Check that each operation, operation activity, and operation activity object (such
as inspections characteristics and PRTs) are the same in both versions
X C Work instructions are compared for all available languages and differences are
highlighted

6. The creation and maintenance of shop floor routings can be sped up with templates in
folders. Match the two main favorite folders with the correct description.
Folder Description
Common Favorites This folder is user specific.
Here, production engineers
My Favorites
can maintain their own user-
specific favorites information
which is visible only to them.
This folder is visible to all users
and the objects available in its
sub-folders can be reused by
all users. However, only cer-
tain users with the necessary
authorization can create new
common folders or change ex-
isting ones. Only these author-
ized users can add new objects
to the common folders using
copy and paste or drag and
drop. All users, however, can
reuse the objects available in
the common folders.


UNIT 13 Variant Configuration
Lesson 1
Setting Up Business Process for Variant Configuration 468
Exercise 39: Change and Release Shop Floor Routing 481
Lesson 2
The Make to Order Process for Configurable Materials 486
Exercise 40: Create Sales Order and Run MRP 495
Exercise 41: Convert a Planned Order to a Production Order and Release It 499
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Explain the concept of variant configuration and describe typical use cases
● Define characteristics and class for a configurable material
● Create configurable material and components
● Create BOM for a configurable material using object dependencies
● Create a shop floor routing for a configurable product
● Create a sales order for a configurable product for selected options
● Explain BOM explosion for a configurable material when running MRP
● View and explain production order routing for selected options

Unit 13
Lesson 1
Setting Up Business Process for Variant
Configuration
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Variant Configuration: Business Background

Configure to Order
Car makers pioneered production of configurable products, also known as “Lot-size 1” or
“Mass-Customization”. Cars have predefined options such as different colors, different
engines, different wheels, or different entertainment and GPS systems. Often, configurable
products have many options and usually the different options are independent of each other,
which results in a very high number of possible product variants. This guarantees a high
degree of individuality. In the internet economy, product configurators became commonplace
and the concept of configurable products is now used to manufacture products ranging from
muesli to machine tools.
Product engineers predefine possible product options and the super BOM. All possible
components of the product are defined in a so-called 150% BOM or super BOM defining the
component materials for all possible options. Different components are needed for different
product options. Optional BOM items have selection rules called object dependencies. An
object dependency is a Boolean expression, which evaluates to true if the BOM item is needed
for a given configuration.
If a product is configurable, then sales order creation will prompt the customer (or the sales
agent on behalf of the customer) to specify the requested product options. Customers can
choose a different alternative for every option in a product configurator. A product
configurator for a car for example lets you select the exterior color and the wheel design. The
set of product options selected by a customer is a configuration.

Lesson: Setting Up Business Process for Variant Configuration
Figure 301: Variant Configuration
MRP creates a planned order for every sales order item for a configurable product. The
planned order components are determined by exploding the 150% BOM. The configuration
controls BOM explosion and makes sure only the components required for the product
options selected by the customer are copied from the BOM into the planned order.
Figure 302: Variant Configuration - Super BOM (150%)
Animation: Variant Configuration - Super BOM (150%)

For more information on Variant Configuration - Super BOM (150%), please view
the animation in the lesson Setting Up Business Process for Variant
Configuration, in your online course.
The planned order will later be converted into a production order. Production order creation
triggers a routing explosion determining the operation activities needed to assemble the
selected components. After production order release, production operators perform the
operation activities defined by the production order.
Dependencies Between Options

The different options of a configurable product can depend on each other. You cannot have a
car with sunroof if the car is a cabriolet. Dependencies allow you to validate dependencies
between different characteristics. Dependencies can turn optional characteristics into
mandatory characteristics based on the value of another characteristic. Dependencies can
set the values of a characteristic based on the value of another characteristic.

Unit 13: Variant Configuration
Make to Order Planning

To save setup time and ordering costs, MRP tries to merge planned orders for demand from
different customers for the same material and time period. When planning configurable
materials, MRP must differentiate sales orders asking for differently configured material and
it must not merge planned orders with different configurations. Make-to-order planning
separates planned orders covering demand for different sales orders. Make-to-order planned
orders are intended to cover the material demand of one single sales order item. Configurable
material can only be manufactured in make-to-order planning.
Configurable versus Configured Materials

Configurable materials have options and customer select their preferred options during sales
order entry. Configured materials are predefined variants of a configurable material, where
the options have been defined by the manufacturer. Configured materials can be made to
stock. The cars you can see in the showroom of your car dealer have been built as configured
materials. The cars in the showroom have been built without a real customer asking for it. This
unit explains the business process for configurable materials only.
Business Process
The basic make to order (MTO) process of configurable products has the following steps,
which will be explained in more detail in the rest of this lesson.
Figure 304: Make to Order Process for Configurable Materials
Animation: Make to Order Process for Configurable Materials

For more information on Make to Order Process for Configurable Materials,
please view the animation in the lesson Setting Up Business Process for Variant
Configuration, in your online course.

To Define Characteristics
Usually, product engineers define possible product options together with BOM and material.
The possible options of a configurable material are represented by characteristics. When
customers order the product, they are prompted to select a value for every characteristic.
To create characteristics including possible values, complete the following steps:
1. Assign yourself the role SAP_BR_PRODUCT_CONFIG_MODELER “Product configuration

modeler”.
2. Launch transaction CT04 or the Manage Characteristics app.
3. Create a new characteristic. The characteristic’s name may only contain letters from A - Z,
digits from 0 - 9, and the underscore character. Special characters like ‘-’ and ‘+’ are
reserved for formulas.
4. The sales order entry will prompt the user to specify an option for every characteristic if
Entry required is selected in the characteristic. Do not forget to check the indicator if the
customer is expected to specify the option.
5. Define the allowed values for the characteristic.
6. Save the characteristic.
Figure 306: Create/Change Characteristics
To Define a Class
Configurable products can have many options and every option is represented by a
characteristic. The possible characteristics are collected in a class of class type 300.
Create the required class as follows:
1. Launch transaction CL02 or the Manage Classes app.
2. Create a new class with class type 300.
3. Reference the characteristics that you have created.
4. Set the status to Released.
5. Save the class.

Figure 307: Class Definition
Configurable Material Creation

The end-item, the material, which is sold to customers and the root node of your super-BOM
needs to be created as configurable material (that is, material type is KMAT).
Figure 308: Configurable Material
The BOM components of the configurable material can be raw or semi-finished materials
(that is, material type ROH or HALB).
To Create a Configuration Profile

Classes can be used for classifying many different business objects including materials,
batches, tools, and equipment. Therefore, the class is a very abstract object, which does not
know anything about its context. Use transaction CU41 to create a configuration profile (CU42
for changing the configuration profile) and assign a class of class-type 300 to the configurable
material.
1. If not already done, assign yourself the role SAP_BR_PRODUCT_CONFIG_MODELER

“Product configuration modeler”.

2. Launch transaction CU41 or the Create Configuration Profile for Material app to create a
configuration profile (CU42 or the Change Configuration Profile app for changing the
configuration profile).
3. If you are prompted to select a configurable object, select Material.
4. Enter your configurable material.
5. If there is a list of profiles, select a profile.
6. Select the Advanced Variant Configuration Processing Mode. SAP recommends to use
advanced variant configuration. The Perform Work and the Manage Production Order apps
allow drilldown into the configuration only if advanced variant configuration is used.
7. Save the configuration profile.
Figure 309: Configuration Profile
To Create Configurable Material BOM

The next step is creating a BOM for the configurable material. The BOM defines the
component materials needed for a product. In case of configurable materials, the BOM will be
a so-called super BOM or 150% BOM. It contains more BOM items than will eventually be
needed. Some BOM items will be needed only if the customer selects a certain option. BOM
items with object dependencies are selected only if needed for the configuration requested by
the customer.
1. You need the role SAP_BR_PRODN_ENG_DISC “Production Engineer for Discrete

Industries”, the role SAP_BR_PRODUCT_CONFIG_MODELER “Product configuration
modeler”, and the role SAP_BR_BOM_ENGINEER. Assign yourself these roles if they are
not yet assigned to your user.
2. Launch the Maintain Bill of Material app and select the Create Version BOM button.
3. In the Create Version BOM dialog box, specify your configurable material, plant, and BOM
usage V.
4. Add your component materials to the BOM version with item category L and specify the
required quantity. Note that the configurable material has a super BOM, which contains all
possible components. If your product is cars, then list a choice of wheel designs, engines,
or entertainment systems.

Figure 310: Maintain Bill of Material
5. If a component depends on product options selected by the customer (of course not every
component is optional or has alternatives), then select the Component checkbox in the
first column of the Component list and create object dependencies.
6. Create a local object dependency. SAP recommends to always use local object
dependencies for version-controlled BOMs.
7. Create a selection condition.
Figure 311: Creating Local Dependencies
8. Object dependencies are Boolean expressions. Several conditions can be joined using
logical AND or logical OR. Every condition checks the value of a characteristic. You can use
the usual operators, = for equality and NE for ‘not equal’. The available characteristics and
values can be found in the Characteristic Pool section. Characteristics can allow a
predefined set of possible values as in this example or numeric values. In case of numeric
values, you can also use operators ‘<’, ‘>’, and many arithmetic operators. If your
configurable product is cars, an object dependency could be “Assemble component 5-
spoke-wheel if option wheel_design = ‘5-spoke’”.

Figure 312: Assigning Dependencies
9. Perform the syntax check.
10. Save the object dependencies and return to the BOM item overview.
11. Add object dependencies to other components if required using the same procedure.
12. Save and release the BOM version.
To Create Shop-Floor Routing

The main task of the production engineer is defining the production process, which is
documented in the routing. To create the shop-floor routing for a configurable material,
proceed as follows:
1. If not already done, assign yourself the role SAP_BR_PRODN_ENG_DISC “Production

Engineer for Discrete Industries”.
2. Launch the Manage Shop Floor Routings app or transaction MSFR4.
3. Create a new routing.
4. Create a routing for a serialized material and specify your configurable material and the
BOM version of the product you want to make. The number of the bill of material can be
found using the value help of the Bill of Material field. Select the Configurable Materials
indicator in the value help filter.

Figure 313: Create Shop Floor Routing
5. Create a first operation and operation activity in the Structure Workspace. Use operation
control key PP01 and status and action schema SAP_SAS_SFI_OA for serialized products.
Figure 314: Adding Operation and Operation Activities
6. Create an operation activity in the Produce segment for assembling alternative parts. The
operation activity is meant to explain the assembly of different alternative components. If
your configurable product is cars, then the customer can probably select the wheel
design. All wheel designs have the same number screws and the same operation activity
can instruct production operators.
7. Create another operation activity, which must only be performed if a certain component
needs to be assembled. If your configurable product is cars, then assembling rear
speakers could be required only if the entertainment system is ‘Surround’, while front
speakers could be needed for every possible entertainment system.
8. Create an operation activity which will only be performed if an optional component needs
to be assembled somewhere else in the production process. If your configurable product
is cars, then you must cut a hole into the roof during the body-shop operation if a sunroof
needs to be installed later during final assembly. Later, the component will be assigned as
reference component to the operation activity, which tells the system, that the operation
activity depends on the component, even if it is not physically assembled at the operation
activity.
9. Note that routing explosion does not copy unnecessary operation activities into the
production order, but it always copies operations into the production order, and every
operation must have at least one operation activity. Make sure that every operation has at
least one operation activity, which will always be performed.

Figure 315: OAForAltComp_Scr.pptx
10. Switch from Structure Workspace to the Details Workspace (1), select an operation
activity, which depends on assigned components (2), choose Logical Components (3), and
create a new logical component (4). The logical component specifies whether the
operation activity depends on an assigned component (5). If the operation activity is only
needed to prepare assembly of an optional component at a later operation activity, or if
the operation activity is only needed to finalize the assembly of an optional component,
which was assembled at an earlier operation activity, then select the Reference
component indicator (6). In the example, cutting a hole into the roof of the car’s body is
only required if the customer wants a sunroof. Therefore, the operation activity is selected
only if BOM item sunroof is assigned to the logical component sunroof. BOM item sunroof
is assembled at a different operation activity. Therefore, the Reference component
indicator is selected.
Figure 316: Assignment of Logical Components to Optional OAs
11. Every operation activity, which either depends on an assigned component, or which
assembles one of several alternative components, must have logical components. In case
of car assembly, the car has several alternative wheel designs, from which the customer
can choose. The customer must choose one option. Every car has wheels and all four
wheels have the same design. You cannot buy a car without wheels. If we are always using
the same operation activity to assemble any wheels, then the logical component is not
relevant of operation activity selection.

Figure 317: Assignment of Logical Components to Alternative OAs
12. Switch from the Details Workspace to the Component Assignment Workspace (1). The
Manage Shop-Floor Routing app then displays the BOM items of the selected BOM in the
left side of the app. BOM items with object dependencies are highlighted by the
dependency symbol. All these Bom items must be assigned to a logical component. All
BOM items without object dependencies must be assigned directly to an operation
activity. Expand the operation activities to display logical components (2) and assign BOM
items with object dependencies to logical components using drag and drop (3). Assign all
BOM items without object dependencies to operation activities. The Status column shows
a green box if the assignment is always valid and it shows a blue diamond if the
assignment cannot be validated without knowing a configuration. In SAP PEO, all BOM
items must be assigned to operation activities, that is, every BOM item must have either a
green box or a blue diamond.
Figure 318: Component Assignment
13. Save and release the shop floor routing version.
14. Releasing the shop-floor routing version will fail if the assigned BOM version is not
released yet. You can release the BOM version from within Manage Shop-Floor Routing
app. Switch to the Details Workspace, select the root node of the routing, and choose the
MBOMs tab in the Details area. There, you can release the BOM version.
15. On releasing the routing, the Manage Shop-Floor Routing app will prompt you to create a
production version. The production version is needed by MRP and production order
creation to find the BOM and routing you just created. If a material has several alternative
BOMs and routings with several alternative production versions, then MRP and production
order creation select the production version using the temporal validity interval and the

quantity validity interval. Provide the ID, name, and validity of the new production version.
If you created your own material and BOM, the production version ID can be 0001, for
example.


Unit 13
Exercise 39
Change and Release Shop Floor Routing
Simulation: Change and Release Shop Floor Routing

For more information on Change and Release Shop Floor Routing, please view
the simulation in the lesson Setting Up Business Process for Variant
Configuration in your online course.
Business Example
complex products. The company has decided to use the advanced variant configuration to
model their complex products. Therefore, John is tasked to explain the business process for
setting up configurable materials and prepare the required master data in SAP S/4HANA PEO
for a prototype.
Note:
1. Open shop floor routing for the configurable material CAR-## in the Manage Shop Floor
Routing app.
2. Assign optional and alternative components to operation activities.
3. Save and release the shop floor routing.
4. Create a production version (PV).

Unit 13
Solution 39
Change and Release Shop Floor Routing
Simulation: Change and Release Shop Floor Routing

For more information on Change and Release Shop Floor Routing, please view
the simulation in the lesson Setting Up Business Process for Variant
Configuration in your online course.
Business Example
model their complex products. Therefore, John is tasked to explain the business process for
setting up configurable materials and prepare the required master data in SAP S/4HANA PEO
for a prototype.
Note:
1. Open shop floor routing for the configurable material CAR-## in the Manage Shop Floor
Routing app.
a) Select CAR-## from the routings list and choose the Change button at the top of the
list.
b) In the Structure Workspace, you can see the following predefined operations:
● 0010 Body Shop
● 0020 Paint Shop
● 0030 Final Assembly
c) Expand all nodes to see which operation activities (OA) are included.
2. Assign optional and alternative components to operation activities.

a) To switch to the Component Assignment Workspace, select the Structure Workspace
at the top left.
b) On the left side of the screen, you can see all the relevant components required to
assemble the car, for example, Spoke_Wheel5, Cylinder_Engine100.
c) In the Quantity column, you can see how often a component is planned.

d) On the right side of the screen, you can see all operations, operation activities in a
structured order.
e) Assign all components from the list to the corresponding operation activity (or to the
logical component item below the activity).
After you have assigned components to the relevant operation activities, the columns
display different icons for component assignment, logical component, assigned
operation (-activities) status, and object dependencies.
f) Switch to the Details Workspace. On this screen, you can see more details about this
operation activity and you can add logical components, work instructions, PRTs, and
so on.
g) In operation 0010 Body shop, select the activity OA20 and choose Logical Components
on the right side of the screen.
h) Add SUNROOF as a logical component and select the Reference checkbox.
i) Select OA is selected if assigned. This needs to be chosen.
j) Repeat these steps for the operation 0030 Final Assembly.
k) OA10 Assembly Cylinder is selected on the left side of the screen.
l) Add CYLINDER as a logical component and in the OA selection, select Not relevant for
OA selection.
Operation Activity Component OA Selection
OA20 WHEELS Not relevant for OA selec-
tion. Reference checkbox is
deselected.
OA30 SUNROOF OA is selected if assigned.
Reference checkbox is de-
selected.
OA40 GEAR_TRANS Not relevant for OA selec-
tion. Reference checkbox is
deselected.
m) Switch to the Component Assignment Workspace.
n) Select the checkboxes for Spoke_Wheel5, Spoke_Wheel7 and Steel_Wheel on the left
side of the screen.
o) Expand node OA20 Assembly Wheels on the right side of the screen.
The logical component WHEELS is added by the system.
p) Select the WHEELS row.
q) On the top of the screen, choose the Assign button.

Three components are added to this operation activity and the status changes to a
green rectangle.
r) Repeat these steps for Cylinder_Engine100, Cylinder_Engine210, and assign these

components to logical component OA10 CYLINDER on the right side of the screen.

s) Repeat these steps for Gear_Trans5, Gear_Trans6, and assign these components to
the logical component in OA40 GEAR_TRANS on the right side of the screen.
t) Repeat these steps for Sunroof and assign this component to the logical component in
0010 OA20 and 0030 OA30 Sunroof on the right side of the screen.
u) Repeat these steps for Batterypack and assign these components to OA50 Assembly
Battery on the right side of the screen.
v) Repeat these steps for Carbody and assign this component to 0020 OA10 Paint on the
right side of the screen.
w) Repeat these steps for Screw and assign this component to 0030 OA20 Assembly
Wheels on the right side of the screen.
x) Choose the Check button.
y) Proof the status of the component assignment.
3. Save and release the shop floor routing.
4. Create a production version (PV).

a) In the next screen, the Production Version field should be filled in with a four digit code,
for example, groups from 00-20 can choose CA00-CA20.
b) Add a description for your PV, for example, CAR-## Production version 1.
c) Save.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 13
Lesson 2
The Make to Order Process for Configurable
Materials
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Make to Order Process

The make to order (MTO) process covers the steps from sales order creation up to the
delivery of the configurable product. In the next sections, only the first steps up to the release
of a production order are described in more detail.
To Create a Sales Order

Customers or sales agents on behalf of the customer create a sales order using transaction
VA01/VA02. The Create Sales Order app prompts the user to select all mandatory product
options if the material is configurable.
1. Assign yourself the role SAP_BR_INTERNAL_SALES_REP “Internal Sales Representative”

if you want to launch the subsequent steps from the SAP Fiori launchpad.
2. Launch the Create Sales Order app or transaction VA01.
3. Create a new sales order with order type OR in the sales organization 0001 and
distribution channel 01 for which you created the sales organization and distribution
channel-specific data in the material master.
4. Select a customer in the same sales org (1), specify a customer reference number (2),
select a required delivery date a few days in the future to avoid lead-time issues in
planning (3), enter your configurable material (4), and the required quantity (5).

Lesson: The Make to Order Process for Configurable Materials
Figure 320: Create Sales Order for Configurable Product
5. Since the material is configurable, the Create Sales Order app prompts you to specify the
options you defined. Select a value for every option and choose Done.
Figure 321: Variant Configuration
6. After configuration, the Create Sales Order app performs the ATP check. The sales order
requests on behalf of the customer from the manufacturing organization a certain
material with certain options at a certain requested date. Production planners try to make
the requested date possible, even if the confirmed date is later than the requested date. If
the customer is happy with the confirmed date, then the sales agent selects the Fixed Date
and Quantity indicator (1) in the sales order item, in which case the confirmed date will be
copied into the requested date. Accept the delivery proposal by choosing either Delivery
Proposal or Complete Delivery (2).
Figure 322: Standard Order – Availability Control

7. Save the sales order.
To Run MRP
Configurable materials are always made-to-order. Initially, the sales order creates a material
shortage in a make-to-order planning section. MRP creates planned orders to compensate
the material shortage. MRP explodes the end-item’s BOM considering the sales order’s
configuration to determine the component materials needed to make the configurable
product. The component demand can create material shortages for the component materials.
MRP recursively plans all component materials until all material shortages are resolved. MRP
is usually running periodically and automatically creates planned orders to cover material
shortages.
To run MRP and monitor the planning results, perform the following steps:
1. Assign yourself the role SAP_BR_PRODN_PLNR “Production Planner” if you want to

launch the subsequent steps from the SAP Fiori launchpad.
2. View the material shortage for the configurable material after sales order creation. Launch
transaction MD04 or the Monitor Stock / Requirements List app. Specify the material
number and plant of the configurable material. The sales order is made-to-order. It is
separated from other make-to-order sales orders by a planning segment, starting with a
customer stock line. The available quantity in this planning segment is negative.
Figure 323: Stock/Requirement List 1
3. Launch MRP. Launch transaction MD02 or the Schedule MRP Runs app. Specify the plant
and configurable material. When using the Schedule MRP Runs app, include the changed
BOM components in planning by selecting the corresponding indicator.
4. View the material again after MRP using transaction MD04 or the Monitor Stock /
Requirements List app. MRP created a planned order in the make-to-order planning
segment covering the sales order.

Figure 324: Stock/Requirement List 2
5. Drill down into the planned order in change mode and check the planned order’s
production version. If several valid production versions exist for the same material, MRP
may have selected a different production version than you expected. If this is the case,
change the planned order’s production version.
6. Check the planned order components. Planned order components depend on the
configuration. The planned order only has the components needed for the desired
configuration; it has a 100% BOM. Check if MRP determined the correct components.
Figure 325: Planned Order - Component Overview
To Convert a Planned Order into a Production Order

Production planners are responsible for planned orders; production supervisors are
responsible for production orders. The production planner converts planned orders into
production orders and hands responsibility for the order over to the production supervisor.
Proceed as follows to convert the planned order into a production order:
1. Assign yourself the role SAP_BR_PRODN_PLNR “Production Planner” if you want to

launch the subsequent steps from the SAP Fiori launchpad.
2. Launch transaction MD04 or the Monitor Stock / Requirements List app. Specify the
material number and plant of the configurable material. Select the planned order (1) and
convert it into a production order (2).

Figure 326: Converting Planned Order into Production Order
3. Save the production order.
4. Return to the Stock/Requirements List and refresh the list. Check if the production order
was created.
To Release a Production Order

Production supervisors release production orders if they are ready for production.
● As a production supervisor in SAP PEO, you need the following roles:
SAP_BR_PRODN_SUPERVISOR_DISC, SAP_BR_PRODN_SUPRVSR_DISC_CAM, and
SAP_BR_PRODN_SUPRVSR_DISC_EPO.
● Launch the Manage Production Orders app.
You should find your production order in the list. If this is not the case, check your area of
responsibility and the production supervisor in the material master.
● Select the production order and release.
Figure 327: Manage Production Orders – Release
● Drill down into the production order display of the configuration.

Figure 328: Manage Production Orders – Configuration View
● Return to the production order overview and check the production order components. The
production order components depend on the configuration. The production order must
only have the components needed for the configuration.
Figure 329: Manage Production Orders – Component Overview
● Navigate to the order schedule and drill down into the operations. Only the operation
activities required for the selected variant options are displayed. Operation activities that
are not needed were automatically removed from the routing.
Figure 330: Manage Production Orders – Operation Activities

Production Order Execution

After the production operator has been assigned to an operation activity, they can launch the
Perform Work app from their personal work queue. The execution steps are already explained
in great detail in previous units.
Constraints and Restrictions

The variant configuration solution for SAP PEO in release 2020 FP1 has the following
constraints:
● A configurable BOM, that is a BOM with object dependencies, can only be used in
combination with a configurable routing.
● A BOM or routing cannot depend on parameter effectivity and configuration at the same
time. BOM items of the material either have parameter effectivity or object dependencies
or neither parameter effectivity nor object dependencies, never both. The routing only
supports assigned BOMs, which either have components depending on parameter
effectivity or object dependencies. Different materials in the same BOM hierarchy can
potentially be either configurable or subject to parameter effectivity, which should allow
combining engineer-to-order and configure-to-order.
● All downstream materials of a configurable material must be configurable. All materials
between a given configurable sub-assembly and the end-product must be configurable.
The configuration is propagated from the configurable end-product to all configurable sub-
assemblies. Propagation does not work if the chain of configurable materials is broken by a
non-configurable material.
● Reference materials are items of the current material’s BOM only.
● Variant configuration in SAP PEO supports the object dependencies available in advanced
variant configuration AVC. The Perform Work and Manage Production Order apps allow
drilldown into the configuration only if advanced variant configuration is used. Therefore,
SAP recommends using advanced variant configuration. Variant configuration in SAP PEO
also works if you use classic LO-VC variant configuration, but then you cannot drill down
from the production order or the Perform Work app into viewing the configuration.
● Variant configuration in SAP PEO only support local object dependencies. This guarantees
that a released BOM version cannot be implicitly changed by changing object
dependencies. It is not recommended to use global object dependencies. Do not break the
versioned BOM’s life cycle management. Global object dependencies can be changed after
releasing a BOM version, which is using the global object dependencies. If you can make
sure organizationally that global object dependencies are not changed after one of the
consuming BOM versions is released, then you can also use global object dependencies.
● SAP PEO uses version controlled BOMs and routings. Production engineers releasing a
BOM or routing expect the BOM or routing will be used exactly as defined at the time of
release. It is not allowed to change a BOM item’s object dependencies after BOM release.
● One logical component must be satisfied from one BOM item. In general, we expect the
routing to be more detailed than the BOM. You can group several BOM item instances in
one BOM item (BOM item quantity is greater 1), but you often want to explain how to
assemble every component instance. Your car has four wheels, but you want to explain
separately how to assemble the front left and the rear left wheel. Therefore, you can split
one BOM item to several logical components, but every logical component must be
completely satisfied from one BOM item of every BOM assigned to the routing.

● All BOM items with the same logical component must use at least one common
characteristic in their object dependencies. Every possible value of the common
characteristic must be covered by the object dependencies of the BOM items with the
same logical component.
● The routing consistency check cannot check over-allocation of components to operation
activities if the operation activity depends on the assigned components.
● If an operation activity has components assigned where the operation activity depends on
only some of the components, then all optional components must belong to the same
logical component.
● You can assign only one BOM to a routing if the material is configurable. For configurable
materials, the variability is defined by the 150% BOM and the object dependencies. There
is no need for additional flexibility by defining different BOMs for very similar products.


Unit 13
Exercise 40
Create Sales Order and Run MRP
Simulation: Create Sales Order and Run MRP

For more information on Create Sales Order and Run MRP, please view the
simulation in the lesson The Make to Order Process for Configurable Materials in
your online course.
Business Example
model their complex products. For testing the Make to Order (MTO) process flow, John is
tasked to create a sales order for a configurable product and run MRP to see and explain how
the BOM explosion is performed.
Note:
1. Create a standard sales order with the VA01 transaction for following data:
● Order Type: OR
● Sales Organization: 1010
● Distribution Channel: 10
● Material: CAR-##
2. Run MRP for material CAR-##.

Unit 13
Solution 40
Create Sales Order and Run MRP
Simulation: Create Sales Order and Run MRP

For more information on Create Sales Order and Run MRP, please view the
simulation in the lesson The Make to Order Process for Configurable Materials in
your online course.
Business Example
model their complex products. For testing the Make to Order (MTO) process flow, John is
tasked to create a sales order for a configurable product and run MRP to see and explain how
the BOM explosion is performed.
Note:
1. Create a standard sales order with the VA01 transaction for following data:
● Order Type: OR
● Material: CAR-##
a) Select Sold-To Party and Ship-To Party (C605-WE2).
b) Add a Cust. Reference, for example, Car-00 sales order 1- AVC, and press Enter.
c) Select the Sales Area 1010/10/00.
d) In the bottom table, in the Item field, enter 10.
e) In the Material field, enter CAR-## with Order Quantity 1.
f) Press Enter to configure CAR-##.

Note:
If you select SUNROOF=YES, the operation activity 0010 OA20 in the shop
floor routing will be executed. If you select NO, OA20 will not be available
during execution in the Perform Work app.
g) After you have configured your car, choose OK and then choose the Complete dlv.
button on the upper part of the screen.
h) If a pop-up window displays a message about editing your incomplete document,

choose Edit to full fill your standard order.
i) Select the missing data row (Pricing). Then choose the Complete Data button.
j) In the CnTY field, enter PR00. For Amount, enter 89.989,00 and for Crcy, enter EUR.
k) Go back to your sales order creation and save it. Note down your order number.
Note:
A pop-up window appears serveral times but if you have maintained the
Pricing, save the incomplete document afterwards and proceed with the
next steps.
2. Run MRP for material CAR-##.

a) Enter MD04 in the transaction field. Alternatively, you can use the Monitor Stock/
Requirements List app.
b) Select your CAR-##.

Your order is placed at the bottom with Available Qty 1.
c) Enter transaction MD02 or use the Schedule MRP Runs app.
d) Select CAR-## and press Enter.
e) In transaction MD04, check the material schedule.


Unit 13
Exercise 41
Convert a Planned Order to a Production Order
and Release It
Simulation: Convert a Planned Order to a Production Order and Release It

For more information on Convert a Planned Order to a Production Order and
Release It, please view the simulation in the lesson The Make to Order Process
for Configurable Materials in your online course.
Business Example
model their complex products. For testing the Make to Order (MTO) process flow, John has
created a sales order for a configurable product and run MRP. Now he is going to convert the
created planned order into a production order and release it for production. In the Manage
Production Orders app, he validates that the routing plan and the assigned components are
correctly selected with regards to the selected variants in the sales order.
Note:
1. Convert the planned order for material CAR-## into a production order.
2. Release the production order in the Manage Production Order app and review the assigned
components and routing plan.
3. Run the production process with the Perform Work app (Order).

Unit 13
Solution 41
Convert a Planned Order to a Production Order
and Release It
Simulation: Convert a Planned Order to a Production Order and Release It

For more information on Convert a Planned Order to a Production Order and
Release It, please view the simulation in the lesson The Make to Order Process
for Configurable Materials in your online course.
Business Example
model their complex products. For testing the Make to Order (MTO) process flow, John has
created a sales order for a configurable product and run MRP. Now he is going to convert the
created planned order into a production order and release it for production. In the Manage
Production Orders app, he validates that the routing plan and the assigned components are
correctly selected with regards to the selected variants in the sales order.
Note:
1. Convert the planned order for material CAR-## into a production order.
a) To select your PldOrd (Planned Order) in the MD04 transaction, double-click it.
The Additional Data for MRP Element window displays.
b) To execute the conversion from planned order to production order, select Prod.Ord.
The system navigates to the create a production order screen.
c) Release the production order and save it.
d) Note down the order number, for example, 1000261.
e) Refresh your browser or choose the Refresh button in transaction MD04.

The Pld. Order has changed to a Prd.Order.
2. Release the production order in the Manage Production Order app and review the assigned
components and routing plan.
a) If you have not released your production order, switch to the Manage Production Order
app.
b) Search for your order number and select it.

c) Choose the Display Configuration button.

You can see which selection criteria were chosen from the sales order creation with
variant configuration.
d) Check the order information, components, and order schedule.
e) Release the production order.
3. Run the production process with the Perform Work app (Order).
a) Open the Perform Work app (Order).
b) Enter your order number and the first operation, 0010.
c) Start the operation activity and complete all steps.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 13
Learning Assessment
1. Which types of BOM are mainly used for Configure-to-Order?

X A One level BOM
X B Customer BOM
X C Super BOM
X D 150% BOM
2. Put the Make-to-Order Process for configurable material in the correct sequence.
0 Releasing a Production Order
0 Running MRP
0 Creating a Sales Order
0 Executing the Production Order
0 Converting Planned Order into Production Order


UNIT 14 Product Manufacturing
Information (PMI)
Lesson 1
Creating and Consuming 3D Views in Work Instructions 506
Exercise 42: Create 3D Views and Insert them in a Work Instruction 511
Lesson 2
Creating Routing Objects with PMI 515
Exercise 43: Assign a Dimension PMI to an Inspection Characteristic 519
Exercise 44: Assign a PMI to Equipment 523
Exercise 45: Display 3D Work Instruction in the Perform Work App 527
Lesson 3
Tracking and Managing Changes to PMI and Related Routing Objects 531
Exercise 46: Create a New Version of Routing with Changed PMI Data 535
Exercise 47: Execute Production Order with Reference to PMI 539
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Understand how PMI data is created and stored in SAP S4/HANA PEO
● Create and consume 3D views in work instructions
● Assign a PMI to an inspection characteristic (direct assignment)
● Assign a PMI to other OA objects (indirect assignment)
● View changed Product Manufacturing Information in SAP S/4HANA PEO shop floor
routings
● Apply changes to new routing versions

Unit 14
Lesson 1
Creating and Consuming 3D Views in Work
Instructions
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to create 3D views in work instructions and use these during
production execution in the Perform Work app.
Business Example
John is a production engineer in the low-volume A&D Company focusing on the final assembly
of complex products. From the product designer, he receives 3D models of complex products
enhanced with detailed product manufacturing information required for product assembly.
He is tasked to review the PMI data and incorporate it in shop floor routings to make it
available to the production operators for supporting the assembly process and inline quality
inspection.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Business Context
In the product design phase, the required manufacturing information is defined which
specifies in detail how a product has to be build. This information is referred to as PMI data. It
provides details about welds, dimensions, and other important manufacturing or material
requirements and may be included in 2D drawings, Microsoft Excel, or other text based files.
The PMI data may be originated in different systems (PLM, PDM, CAD Welding, Notes, EH&S,
and so on) but it is all related to a product or specific assembly. It is the purpose of the TDMI
interface between the PLM and SAP S4/HANA PEO system to consolidate and persist all of
this information to make it available for the downstream manufacturing process.
The PMI data is part of the engineering snapshot handed over by the PLM system and as such
it is applied the same scope and validity as all other artifacts of the engineering snapshot (for
example, EBOMs, visuals).

Lesson: Creating and Consuming 3D Views in Work Instructions
Figure 333: PMIStorageAndUseInPEO.pptx
3D Views in Work Instructions

The 3D View Editor can be accessed from within the Manage Shop Floor Routing app. It offers
the possibility to create and save 3D views with different perspectives and zoom to highlight
the relevant PMI or part, which is relevant for a specific operation activity.
Figure 334: 3D View Editor in Manage Shop Floor Routing App
Animation: 3D View Editor in Manage Shop Floor Routing App

For more information on 3D View Editor in Manage Shop Floor Routing App,
please view the animation in the lesson Creating and Consuming 3D Views in
Work Instructions, in your online course.
To create 3D views, use the following information:

Unit 14: Product Manufacturing Information (PMI)
● You can create 3D views for a specific operation activity.

● The option is available as a tab in the Work Instructions app.
● You can also launch the 3D View Editor directly from the General tab of an operation
activity either in the Details Workspace or the Auxiliary Data Workspace.
● You can create, rename, or delete multiple 3D views.
● To create a 3D view, choose Add (+), set a camera position in the 3D viewer where the
relevant PMI or part is clearly visible, and lock the 3D view.
● To change a 3D view, unlock it, reset it to the desired camera position and lock the 3D view.
Figure 336: Assigning 3D Views to Work Instructions
To insert 3D views in work instructions, use the following information:

● Once you have created the required set of 3D views, you can use them in the Work
Instructions text.
● To use 3D views, choose the Text Editor tab of the Work Instructions.
● Select the 3D view from the dropdown above the 3D viewer.
● Position the cursor in the text editor and choose Add Reference.
● A clickable hyperlinked text pointing to the 3D view is inserted in the text of the Work
Instructions.
Use of 3D Work Instructions During Production Execution

After the creation of 3D views and assignment to work instructions, it is then made available
to the shop floor for the production operator when executing the operation activities.

Figure 337: 3D Views in the Perform Work App
To use 3D views in the Perform Work app, take note of the following information:
● Once the 3D views are added to the work instructions, they can be consumed in the
Perform Work app.
● The 3D viewer now has a dropdown from which you can browse through the available 3D
views.
● You can also click the referenced work instruction text and the view changes accordingly in
the 3D viewer.


Unit 14
Exercise 42
Create 3D Views and Insert them in a Work
Instruction
Simulation: Create 3D Views and Insert them in a Work Instruction

For more information on Create 3D Views and Insert them in a Work Instruction,
please view the simulation in the lesson Creating and Consuming 3D Views in
Work Instructions in your online course.
Business Example
inspection.
Note:
1. Open the SAP Fiori launchpad using the link provided by the instructor.
2. Navigate to the Manage Shop Floor Routings app in the Production Engineering group on
the SAP Fiori launchpad.
3. Select your routing Bracket Pump-## and assign all components to the operation activity.
4. In the Details Workspace, create a new Work Instruction.
5. Insert the views in the Work Instruction in the Text editor.

Unit 14
Solution 42
Create 3D Views and Insert them in a Work
Instruction
Simulation: Create 3D Views and Insert them in a Work Instruction

For more information on Create 3D Views and Insert them in a Work Instruction,
please view the simulation in the lesson Creating and Consuming 3D Views in
Work Instructions in your online course.
Business Example
inspection.
Note:
2. Navigate to the Manage Shop Floor Routings app in the Production Engineering group on
3. Select your routing Bracket Pump-## and assign all components to the operation activity.
a) Select your routing Bracket Pump-##.
b) Note down your Routing Group, Group Counter, and Routing Version.
c) Assign all components to OA10.
4. In the Details Workspace, create a new Work Instruction.

a) In the Details Workspace, expand the operation structure and select OA10. In the
General tab, choose Start 3D View Editor.
b) Choose the + icon to create a new view.
c) Use your mouse and the orbit functionality on the right to rotate the 3D visual into
position.
d) Enter a View Name, for example, Back View ISO.

e) Choose the Lock button to lock this position.
f) Create one more view.
5. Insert the views in the Work Instruction in the Text editor.

a) Select a view at the left from the dropdown menu, for example, Back View ISO.
b) Click at any position in the Work Instruction text editor.
c) Choose Add Reference. The selected view will take place at this position in the text.
d) Repeat this step for all generated views and test if the visual on the left side is changed
for the respective view by selecting the blue hyperlink.
e) Choose Done.
f) If the routing is complete, save it and continue to the next exercise.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 14
Lesson 2
Creating Routing Objects with PMI
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to assign PMI to different OA objects.
Business Example
inspection.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Auxiliary Data Workspace in the Manage Shop Floor Routing App

With the SAP S/4HANA PEO 2020 release, the new Auxiliary Data Workspace was added to
the Manage Shop Floor Routing app. It provides synchronized visual and text based access to
PMI data. Selecting a PMI in the list highlights the same item in the 3D model and vice versa.
Figure 339: Auxiliary Data Workspace in the Manage Shop Floor Routing App

Assigning PMI to Inspection Characteristics

Referencing PMI data in Work Instructions and linking it to the 3D viewer already provides
good support for production operators. But it offers even more capabilities. Single PMI data
sets can be assigned to specific OA objects like inspection characteristics. With this, the
production operator is pointed to the visual part when executing the inline quality data
collection.
Figure 340: Assign 3D Views Inspection Characteristics
Animation: Assign 3D Views Inspection Characteristics

For more information on Assign 3D Views Inspection Characteristics, please view
the animation in the lesson Creating Routing Objects with PMI, in your online
course.
To assign 3D views to inspection characteristics, complete the following steps:

● Select any PMI from the list on the top left of the screen and navigate to the required
details screen for an operation activity (for example, to assign a dimension PMI to an
inspection characteristic).
● Create the object using the selected data.
● If a mapping (BAdI) has been defined for the selected auxiliary data type and OA object
pair, the system maps all the values from the PMI to the corresponding fields of the details
object.
● After creation, a direct assignment is established between the PMI and the OA object.
Such a direct assignment will be useful for automatic change incorporation for changed
PMI data.
● You can check for existing assignments using the green indicator in the Assigned column
and for more details ,you can choose Show Assignments for any assigned PMI object.

Lesson: Creating Routing Objects with PMI
Creating OA Objects with Indirect Assignment to PMI

If PMI data is assigned to an OA object itself rather than to a specific value of an OA object, it
is referred to as indirect assignment. This type of assignment is possible for any OA object.
Figure 342: Indirect PMI Assignment to OA Object
To establish an indirect PMI assignment to an OA object, complete the following steps:

● Create any OA object as you would usually do (such as a PRT).
● Select the created object and any PMI in the list, and choose Assign Selected Data.
● An indirect (no value mapping) assignment is created between the PMI and OA object pair.
● This assignment is useful if a PMI is changed and a corresponding manual change is
required in all the assigned OA objects.
● You can check for existing assignments using the green indicator in the Assigned column
and for more details, you can choose Show Assignments for any assigned PMI object.


Unit 14
Exercise 43
Assign a Dimension PMI to an Inspection
Characteristic
Simulation: Assign a Dimension PMI to an Inspection Characteristic

For more information on Assign a Dimension PMI to an Inspection Characteristic,
please view the simulation in the lesson Creating Routing Objects with PMI in
your online course.
Business Example
inspection.
Note:
1. Navigate to the Manage Shop Floor Routings app in the Production Engineering group in
2. Select a routing to work with and assign all components to the operation activity.
3. Switch to the Auxiliary Data Workspace.
4. Select any PMI data from the left and the system maps the value to inspection
characteristics.
5. Create the PRT as usually done for the OA.
6. Select the PMI data on the left and the PRT on the right and choose Assign selected Data.

Unit 14
Solution 43
Assign a Dimension PMI to an Inspection
Characteristic
Simulation: Assign a Dimension PMI to an Inspection Characteristic

For more information on Assign a Dimension PMI to an Inspection Characteristic,
your online course.
Business Example
inspection.
Note:
1. Navigate to the Manage Shop Floor Routings app in the Production Engineering group in
2. Select a routing to work with and assign all components to the operation activity.
a) Select your routing from the previous exercise.
It should be in the status In Process.
b) Assign all components to the operation activity, as done previously.
3. Switch to the Auxiliary Data Workspace.
4. Select any PMI data from the left and the system maps the value to inspection
characteristics.
a) Select any PMI from the list on the top left of the screen and navigate to the required
details screen for an operation activity (for example, to assign a dimension PMI to an
inspection characteristic), this is an indirect assignment.
b) Select any PMI from the list, for example Hi1_D68 on the top left of the screen, and
navigate to the required details screen for Inspection Characteristics for operation
activity on the right hand side.

c) Create a new IC by choosing the Add button and select IC Using selected Data.
The system will transfer all relevant data from PMI to IC.
After creation, a direct assignment is established between the PMI and the OA object.
Such a direct assignment will be useful for automatic change incorporation for
changed PMI data. For the selected auxiliary data type and OA object pair, the system
maps all the values from the PMI to the corresponding fields of the details object.
Check for existing assignments using the green indicator in the Assigned column and
for more details, choose Show.
5. Create the PRT as usually done for the OA.

a) On the PRTs tab, choose Add and then Equipment Using Selected Data.
b) In the Equipment field, choose any equipment, and enter 1 for PRT Control Profile.
c) Choose OK.
6. Select the PMI data on the left and the PRT on the right and choose Assign selected Data.
a) Check for existing assignments using the green indicator in the Assigned column and
for more details, choose Show Assignments for any assigned PMI object.
b) Choose Save and continue to the next exercise.


Unit 14
Exercise 44
Assign a PMI to Equipment
Simulation: Assign a PMI to Equipment

For more information on Assign a PMI to Equipment, please view the simulation
in the lesson Creating Routing Objects with PMI in your online course.
Business Example
data collection.
Note:
1. In the Details Workspace, add a PRT for the operation activity.
2. Go to the Auxiliary Data Workspace.
3. Select a PMI from the list an assign it to an OA object.
4. Check the green indicator to see if PMIs are assigned.
5. Create a production order.

Unit 14
Solution 44
Assign a PMI to Equipment
Simulation: Assign a PMI to Equipment

For more information on Assign a PMI to Equipment, please view the simulation
in the lesson Creating Routing Objects with PMI in your online course.
Business Example
data collection.
Note:
1. In the Details Workspace, add a PRT for the operation activity.

a) Go to the Details Workspace to add a PRT to any operation activity.
b) Add any OA object, such as a PRT.
c) Enter PRT Control Key 1.
3. Select a PMI from the list an assign it to an OA object.

a) Select the created object and any PMI in the list and choose Assign Selected Data on
the right.
An indirect (no value mapping) assignment is created between the PMI and OA object
pair.
This assignment is useful if a PMI is changed and a corresponding manual change is
required in all the assigned OA objects.
4. Check the green indicator to see if PMIs are assigned.

a) You can check for existing assignments using the green indicator in the Assigned
column and for more details, you can choose Show Assignments for any assigned PMI
object.

b) Add the additional IC and PRTs in the Work Instruction. On the Work Instruction tab,
choose the Select Edit button.
c) In the Change Work Instruction screen, choose the IC and PRT tabs respectively. Select
the IC and PRTs marked red and choose Add Reference.
d) Save and release your routing.
e) Create a production version, for example BP##.
5. Create a production order.

a) Navigate to the Create Production Order app in the Shop Floor Control and
b) On the initial screen, enter the following data and choose Continue:
● Material: A0001-001-BRACKET_PUMP
c) In the Total Qty field, enter 1.
d) In the Scheduling Type dropdown list, select Current date.
e) In the Production Supervisor field in the Assignment view, enter DMO.
f) Make sure that the correct production version has been picked for the order in the
Master Data view.
g) Choose Release.
h) Note down the production order number.
i) Choose Save.


Unit 14
Exercise 45
Display 3D Work Instruction in the Perform
Work App
Simulation: Display 3D Work Instruction in the Perform Work App

For more information on Display 3D Work Instruction in the Perform Work App,
your online course.
Business Example
Tom is a production operator in the low-volume A&D Company focusing on the final assembly
of complex products. He is assigned to a list of operation activities and expected to execute
those by following the detailed work instructions attached to it. Therefore, he uses the
Perform Work app. From this app, he gets access to all operation activity-related and relevant
information.
Note:
Note:
If you have not created the production order yet, go back to the exercise
Assign a PMI to Equipment.
2. Navigate to the Perform Work (Order/Operation) app in the Shop Floor Control and
3. In the Order field, enter the order number that you have worked with.
4. Start with the first operation 0010 and OA10.
5. On the right, you can switch to other views using the dropdown or by selecting the
reference link at the top of the left side of the screen.

Unit 14
Solution 45
Display 3D Work Instruction in the Perform
Work App
Simulation: Display 3D Work Instruction in the Perform Work App

For more information on Display 3D Work Instruction in the Perform Work App,
your online course.
Business Example
of complex products. He is assigned to a list of operation activities and expected to execute
those by following the detailed work instructions attached to it. Therefore, he uses the
Perform Work app. From this app, he gets access to all operation activity-related and relevant
information.
Note:
Note:
If you have not created the production order yet, go back to the exercise
Assign a PMI to Equipment.
3. In the Order field, enter the order number that you have worked with.
4. Start with the first operation 0010 and OA10.

a) In the Operation field, enter 0010.
b) Choose Go.
c) Choose the Start button in the footer bar.
d) Choose the scan icon next to any component and enter the required quantity for the
component.

e) Choose Post.
f) Choose Complete to complete the activity.
5. On the right, you can switch to other views using the dropdown or by selecting the
reference link at the top of the left side of the screen.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 14
Lesson 3
Tracking and Managing Changes to PMI and
Related Routing Objects
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to track changed Product Manufacturing Information (PMI) in
SAP S/4HANA PEO shop floor routings and apply those changes to a new routing version.
Business Example
of complex products. From the product designer, he regularly receives changes to product
manufacturing information for previously submitted engineering BOMs. His task is to
incorporate those changes in new routing versions and make production operators aware of
the changed items.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
routings
Change Impact Analysis for PMI Change

PMI changes are captured and recognized by the change record. It is even represented as a
new PMI object in the network graph of related objects. That way, PMI changes can be tracked
and managed just like any other change object (for example, BOMs).

Figure 346: Change Impact Analysis App for PMI Change
To track PMI changes, use the following information:

● The Change Impact Analysis can track changes to PMI.
● A new PMI object can now be seen in the network graph.
● The change record also adds all the planning scopes required to pass on these PMI
changes from the EBOM to the MBOM.
● On launch, VEMP also notifies the user that there are PMI changes in the current planning
scope.
● Just a simple save of the planning scope will pass on all the PMI changes to the target
MBOM(s).
Management of Changes to PMI in Auxiliary Data Workspace

Changes of PMI compared to a previous MBOM version are highlighted. Per PMI data set, the
change status and change incorporation status is displayed. The production engineer may
apply some or all changes as required by the business.
Figure 347: Changed PMI in Auxiliary Data Workspace

Lesson: Tracking and Managing Changes to PMI and Related Routing Objects
● Once PMI changes have been passed on to the MBOM, you can use the new Auxiliary Data
Workspace to manage all the changes.
● If a new MBOM version is available, an asterisk (*) is displayed next to the Selected MBOM
field in the header.
● Select the new MBOM version with the PMI changes. Now the workspace shows you the
changes compared to the previous version.
● New columns in the PMI list display the change status, change incorporation status, and
the actual versus the compared value.
● You can accept the changes in the Show Assignment pop-up window for each changed PMI
individually, or you can choose Incorporate All to accept all changes.
● On incorporation (mass or individual), the OA objects with direct assignment are
automatically updated with the new PMI values. For indirect assignments, these updates
need to be performed manually.


Unit 14
Exercise 46
Create a New Version of Routing with Changed
PMI Data
Simulation: Create a New Version of Routing with Changed PMI Data

For more information on Create a New Version of Routing with Changed PMI
Data, please view the simulation in the lesson Tracking and Managing Changes to
PMI and Related Routing Objects in your online course.
Business Example
of complex products. From the product designer, he receives regularly changes to product
changed items.
Open the SAP Business Client or with transaction MSFR4 to create a new routing and MBOM
version.
Note:
1. Once PMI changes have been passed on to the MBOM, you can use the new Auxiliary Data
2. If a new MBOM version is available, an asterisk (*) is displayed next to the Selected MBOM
3. Optional: Create a new MBOM version.
4. Go to the Manage Shop Floor Routing app. In case you released your routing from before,
create a new routing Bracket Pump-## version 2 (copy to new routing). Select the
new MBOM version with the PMI changes in the Details Workspace on the right hand side.
5. Insert a direct assigned Inspection Characteristics in the Work Instructions.

The workspace shows you the changes compared to the previous version. Choose Show
Changes.
7. New columns in the PMI list display the change status, change incorporation status, and

8. You can accept the changes in the Show Assignment pop-up window for each changed
PMI individually, or you can choose Incorporate All to accept all changes.
On incorporation (mass or individual), the OA objects with direct assignment are
9. If you have changed Inspection Charateristics, PRTs, or Work Instructions, choose Save.
10. Choose Save and Release Routing.
11. In the pop-up window, deselect the Maintain Production Version checkbox and choose OK.
For the production order creation, ensure that you use the correct production version (in
the Master Data tab, production version BP## should be selected from a previous
exercise).

Unit 14
Solution 46
Create a New Version of Routing with Changed
PMI Data
Simulation: Create a New Version of Routing with Changed PMI Data

For more information on Create a New Version of Routing with Changed PMI
Data, please view the simulation in the lesson Tracking and Managing Changes to
PMI and Related Routing Objects in your online course.
Business Example
of complex products. From the product designer, he receives regularly changes to product
changed items.
Open the SAP Business Client or with transaction MSFR4 to create a new routing and MBOM
version.
Note:
1. Once PMI changes have been passed on to the MBOM, you can use the new Auxiliary Data
2. If a new MBOM version is available, an asterisk (*) is displayed next to the Selected MBOM
a) If no new MBOM is available (check with Maintain Bill of Material app), create a new
version using the Cockpit for VMP app in the Production Engineering group and select
A0001-001-Bracket_Pump BOM Alternative 2 and BOM Version 0001.
b) Normally, there should be a new MBOM version Alternative 2 and BOM version 0003 –
please use this version and skip step 3 (optional step to create a new MBOM version).
c) Note down your MBOM version to use this version in the new routing (next step).
3. Optional: Create a new MBOM version.

a) Navigate to the Cockpit for VMP app in the Production Engineering group.
b) On the initial screen, search for material A0001-001-Bracket_Pump and Planning

Scenario 05.

c) Select the returned planning scope in the table and choose the Start Planning button
from the main menu.
The Visual Manufacturing Planner opens and shows the A0001-001-Bracket_Pump
MBOM in the Target Panel.
d) Select the change record for the changed version of Bracket Pump, for example,
100000041.
e) If changes need to be done, select the A0001-001-Bracket_Pump node of the MBOM

structure and choose the Add to Working Panel button from the Target Panel menu.
The MBOM gets transferred to the Working Panel.
f) If no changes are required, mark the MBOM for release.
g) Choose Save and Exit Planning from the main menu (confirm the pop-up message
box).
The Bracket Pump MBOM is saved and released.
h) A new MBOM version of Bracket Pump will be created.
i) Note down your created MBOM version – you will need it in a later step.
4. Go to the Manage Shop Floor Routing app. In case you released your routing from before,
create a new routing Bracket Pump-## version 2 (copy to new routing). Select the
new MBOM version with the PMI changes in the Details Workspace on the right hand side.
5. Insert a direct assigned Inspection Characteristics in the Work Instructions.

The workspace shows you the changes compared to the previous version. Choose Show
Changes.
7. New columns in the PMI list display the change status, change incorporation status, and
8. You can accept the changes in the Show Assignment pop-up window for each changed
PMI individually, or you can choose Incorporate All to accept all changes.
On incorporation (mass or individual), the OA objects with direct assignment are
9. If you have changed Inspection Charateristics, PRTs, or Work Instructions, choose Save.
10. Choose Save and Release Routing.
11. In the pop-up window, deselect the Maintain Production Version checkbox and choose OK.
For the production order creation, ensure that you use the correct production version (in
the Master Data tab, production version BP## should be selected from a previous
exercise).

Unit 14
Exercise 47
Execute Production Order with Reference to
PMI
Simulation: Execute Production Order with Reference to PMI

For more information on Execute Production Order with Reference to PMI,
please view the simulation in the lesson Tracking and Managing Changes to PMI
and Related Routing Objects in your online course.
Business Example
of complex products. The PMI data specified by the product designer is presented to him in
the Perform Work app. Guided by a detailed work instruction, he can select all PMI data sets
and collect actual values for the required inline quality data collection.
Note:
1. Create a production order with the related shop floor routing, including references to PMI
data.
3. Click and collect the hyperlinks and the data collection in the work instructions.
4. Post, scan, and enter values for components, inspection characteristics, and register your
PRTs.

Unit 14
Solution 47
Execute Production Order with Reference to
PMI
Simulation: Execute Production Order with Reference to PMI

For more information on Execute Production Order with Reference to PMI,
please view the simulation in the lesson Tracking and Managing Changes to PMI
and Related Routing Objects in your online course.
Business Example
of complex products. The PMI data specified by the product designer is presented to him in
the Perform Work app. Guided by a detailed work instruction, he can select all PMI data sets
and collect actual values for the required inline quality data collection.
Note:
1. Create a production order with the related shop floor routing, including references to PMI
data.
a) Create a production order with reference to PMI.
a) In the Order field, enter the order number that you have worked with.
b) In the Operation field, enter 0010.
c) Choose Go.
d) Choose 0010 Fabricate Bracket with OA10 Assembly Bracket and choose Go on the
right.
f) Choose the scan icon next to any component and enter the required quantity for the
component.
g) Choose Post.
3. Click and collect the hyperlinks and the data collection in the work instructions.
a) On the right side, you can switch to other views using the dropdown, or by selecting at
the reference link in the Work Instructions.

Lesson: Tracking and Managing Changes to PMI and Related Routing Objects
4. Post, scan, and enter values for components, inspection characteristics, and register your
PRTs.
a) Assemble all components.
b) Register your PRT in the Work Instruction and check it in the Track Tool Usage app.
c) Enter a value for Inspection Characteristics and accept the value.
d) Enter a value for Inspection Characteristics and do not accept the value.

LESSON SUMMARY
routings

Unit 14
Learning Assessment
1. What does PMI stand for?

X A Product Management Information
X B Product Manufacturing Information
X C Process Manufacturing Information
2. Which of the following types of PMI can you include in SAP PEO?
X A Customer Information
X B Welding Points
X C Operator Skills
X D Tolerances
X E Measurements


UNIT 15 Planning and Execution BOMs
and Routings
Lesson 1
Creating Master Data for MRP Planning 546
Exercise 48: Create Planning BOM with Phantom Assembly 549
Exercise 49: Run MRP and Validate Procurement Elements 555
Lesson 2
Creating Shop Floor Master Data for Execution 560
Exercise 50: Create Execution BOM and Routing 563
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Explain the differences between planning and execution BOMs

● Understand where and how phantom BOMs can be utilized
● Create master data for MRP planning
● Create shop floor master data for existing planned orders

Unit 15
Lesson 1
Creating Master Data for MRP Planning
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to create master data for MRP planning, and, when it is useful
and required, to distinguish between planning and execution data.
Business Example
of complex products. The procurement of components and sub-assemblies for the final end
item takes several months. In order to keep the overall lead time of the product assembly as
short as possible, it is crucial to start material planning of the required components as early
as possible to avoid delays during production execution. Therefore, the procurement process
starts even before all routing and BOM details are finalized.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Process of Master Data Creation and Order Execution

Starting the material planning and procurement process only when all BOM levels and routing
steps of a major assembly are completely defined would potentially increase the overall lead
time of production. For dependent materials with a long replenishment time, it is especially
desirable to start the procurement process even before the production order is started.
To fulfill this requirement, the decoupling of the planning and execution process has been
introduced as a new concept. In addition to the classical production BOMs and routings, there
are now two more usage types available for planning and execution purposes only. This allows
an early MRP run based on the planning BOM and routing to create planned orders and
purchase requisitions. However, these planned orders cannot be converted to production
orders as long as the corresponding execution BOM and routing are also released.

Lesson: Creating Master Data for MRP Planning
Figure 350: Planning BOMs and Routings for MRP
Note:
The introduction of planning master data is optional and normally not set up in
customizing. If you want to implement this process, please check the customizing
instructions in the PEO implementation guide.
Planning BOM with Phantom Assemblies

Phantom BOMs are common and frequently used in a classical PP environment. However,
with the introduction of version-controlled BOMs in SAP S/4HANA PEO, this concept had to
be revised. Version-controlled manufacturing BOMs document the to-be state and must not
be changed after BOM version release. Production engineers expect the product to be built
exactly as defined by the manufacturing BOM at BOM version release. Phantom assemblies
undermine this concept.
● Phantom BOMs and the parent BOM can be released independently.
● The phantom property can be defined in the material master, which is not version
controlled.
● The same phantom material can be referenced by several BOM items of the same BOM.
MRP and production order creation select phantom BOM alternative and version
independently for every phantom item.
Resulting from this issue, phantom BOMs are only allowed in planning BOMs and are flattened
when converted to execution BOMs, as shown in following figures.

Unit 15: Planning and Execution BOMs and Routings
Figure 351: Preserving Phantom Hierarchy Information in Execution BOM
Figure 352: Resolving Phantom BOM Hierarchy in Execution BOM
The phantom hierarchy is still preserved in the planning routing and can be displayed in a
separate detailed pop-up window.
Figure 353: Phantom Hierarchy Display in Shop Floor Routing

Unit 15
Exercise 48
Create Planning BOM with Phantom Assembly
Simulation: Create Planning BOM with Phantom Assembly

For more information on Create Planning BOM with Phantom Assembly, please
view the simulation in the lesson Creating Master Data for MRP Planning in your
online course.
Business Example
as possible to avoid delays during production execution. As a prerequisite for MRP planning,
John first starts to create planning BOMs.
Note:
1. In the SAP Business Client, launch the SAP Fiori launchpad and open the Cockpit for VMP
app.
Alternatively, you can call transaction VMP_MAINTAIN in the back-end system.
2. Create a new planning scope to convert the ENGINE-## EBOM into a planning BOM using
the following data:
● Description: Any free-form text (for example, MBOM for planning only)
● Source Material: ENGINE-##
● EBOM Usage: E
● MBOM Usage: R
3. Choose Save & Start Planning in the toolbar.

The system saves the planning scope and launches the VEMP to perform an EBOM to
MBOM handover.

4. Create a phantom BOM for the grouping of components.
5. Create a BOM for the engine.
6. Assign parameter effectivity to the phantom assembly in the Working Panel.
7. Add a new line with following parameter effectivity:

M1, 1 -25
8. In the Working Panel, select the engine and move it back to the Target Panel.
9. Save and exit the planning.
10. Create a production version for the new planning BOM using the following data:
Header Data:
● Production Version: 0001
● Prodn Version Text: ENGINE-##
● Use Different Master Data for Planning and Execution: Select
Selection Criteria:
● Material: ENGINE-##
● Plant: 1020
Planning Master Data:
● BOM Usage: Planning BOM
11. Save the production version.
12. Create a production version for the phantom BOM using the following data:
Header Data:
● Prodn Version Text: OUTLET-##
Selection Criteria:
● Material: OUTLET-##
● Plant: 1020

Unit 15
Solution 48
Create Planning BOM with Phantom Assembly
Simulation: Create Planning BOM with Phantom Assembly

For more information on Create Planning BOM with Phantom Assembly, please
online course.
Business Example
as possible to avoid delays during production execution. As a prerequisite for MRP planning,
John first starts to create planning BOMs.
Note:
1. In the SAP Business Client, launch the SAP Fiori launchpad and open the Cockpit for VMP
app.
Alternatively, you can call transaction VMP_MAINTAIN in the back-end system.
2. Create a new planning scope to convert the ENGINE-## EBOM into a planning BOM using
the following data:
● Description: Any free-form text (for example, MBOM for planning only)
● Source Material: ENGINE-##
● EBOM Usage: E
● MBOM Usage: R
a) Choose Create from the menu and select planning scenario 05.
b) Enter the data provided in the step on the entry screen and press Enter.

The system disables the change number field as it is not relevant for the BOM usage R
which is version controlled.
3. Choose Save & Start Planning in the toolbar.

The system saves the planning scope and launches the VEMP to perform an EBOM to
MBOM handover.
4. Create a phantom BOM for the grouping of components.

a) From the Working Panel menu, choose Create → Create New Manufacturing Structure
and enter the existing material OUTLET-## in the pop-up window.
b) Select the mounting plate and nozzles in the Source Panel and add them to the
Working Panel (using drag and drop or using the menu).
c) Move the OUTLET-## structure to the Target Panel (using drag and drop or using the
menu).
5. Create a BOM for the engine.

a) In the Target Panel, select the engine and move it to the Working Panel (using drag and
drop or using the menu).
b) From the Source Panel, select all the remaining parts of the engine and move them
underneath the engine in the Working Panel.
c) In the Target Panel, select the OUTLET-## and add it to the engine structure in the
Working Panel using drag and drop.
6. Assign parameter effectivity to the phantom assembly in the Working Panel.

a) In the Working Panel, select the phantom assembly.
b) Choose Edit BOM Item from the menu.
7. Add a new line with following parameter effectivity:

M1, 1 -25
8. In the Working Panel, select the engine and move it back to the Target Panel.
9. Save and exit the planning.

a) Choose Save → Save and Exit Planning from the main menu.
A new BOM alternative with usage R for planning only is created.
10. Create a production version for the new planning BOM using the following data:
Header Data:
● Prodn Version Text: ENGINE-##
Selection Criteria:
● Plant: 1020

a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, start the Manage Production Version app.
b) Choose the Create button above the list.
c) Enter the data provided in the step on the entry screen and save it.
12. Create a production version for the phantom BOM using the following data:
Header Data:
● Prodn Version Text: OUTLET-##
Selection Criteria:
● Material: OUTLET-##
● Plant: 1020
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, start the Manage Production Version app.
b) Choose the Create button above the list.
c) Enter the data provided in the step on the entry screen and save it.


Unit 15
Exercise 49
Run MRP and Validate Procurement Elements
Simulation: Run MRP and Validate Procurement Elements

For more information on Run MRP and Validate Procurement Elements, please
online course.
Business Example
as possible to avoid delays during production execution. After John has created the required
planning BOMs, he will next run MRP to create purchase requisitions for components needed
early on.
Note:
1. Create a sales order for ENGINE-## using the following input parameters:
● Order Type: OR
● Division: 00
2. Check the customer requirement for ENGINE-## using the following data:
● Plant: 1020
3. Run MRP to create a planned order.
4. Check in the planned order that the phantom BOM is included in the component overview.
5. Try to convert the planned order to a production order.

Unit 15
Solution 49
Run MRP and Validate Procurement Elements
Simulation: Run MRP and Validate Procurement Elements

For more information on Run MRP and Validate Procurement Elements, please
online course.
Business Example
as possible to avoid delays during production execution. After John has created the required
planning BOMs, he will next run MRP to create purchase requisitions for components needed
early on.
Note:
1. Create a sales order for ENGINE-## using the following input parameters:
● Order Type: OR
● Division: 00
a) Enter transaction VA01 and enter the data provided in the step to create a new sales
order.
b) Create a sales order item with material ENGINE-## and plant 1020.

Figure 356: Sample Customer Order
c) From the menu, choose Extras → Parameter Effectivity and enter M1 for material and 1
for serial number.
d) Save the sales order.
Note:
Choose OK and Save in the pop-up dialog boxes.
2. Check the customer requirement for ENGINE-## using the following data:
● Plant: 1020
a) In SAP GUI, execute transaction MD04 and enter the data provided in the step.
b) Check if the customer order with a requirement of 1 is available (if not, the instructor
will support you in creating a customer order).
3. Run MRP to create a planned order.

a) Execute transaction MD02.
b) Change Planning mode to 3 to ensure planned order creation.
c) Press Enter twice until the result page is displayed.
d) Execute transaction MD04 to review the planning result.
4. Check in the planned order that the phantom BOM is included in the component overview.
a) Open the planned order using the Element Details button to the left of the planned
order.
b) Choose Component Overview from the menu.
c) Verify that the phantom assembly including its components are contained in the
overview.
d) Close the planned order.

5. Try to convert the planned order to a production order.

a) Choose the Element Details button of the planned order and choose the Convert to
Production Order function.
Conversion of the planned order to a shop floor order is not possible because the
execution master data has not yet been created.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 15
Lesson 2
Creating Shop Floor Master Data for Execution
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to create shop floor master data required for the creation and
execution of production orders.
Business Example
of complex products. After MRP has been carried out for planning BOMs only, it is now his
task to finalize the MBOM and create a shop floor routing for the execution.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Monitor Shop Floor Master Data

The production engineer uses the Monitor Shop Floor Master Data app to find any production
version that is still incomplete in a sense that it only contains planning BOMs and routings but
no valid shop floor routings for execution. If required, he/she can limit the list of production
versions by selecting a horizon for the production order start date.
Figure 357: Monitor Shop Floor Master Data
From the details page of the production version, the production engineer can directly create a
new version for an execution MBOM, or in case of a visual MBOM, launch the VEMP to use the
manufacturing planner to create a new visual execution BOM.

Lesson: Creating Shop Floor Master Data for Execution
Figure 358: Production Version with Only Planning BOM
The last step for the production engineer is to upgrade the MBOM in the shop floor routing
and release it.
Now MRP will replace the planning BOM and routing at the next MRP run and updates the
already existing planned orders which are then eligible for conversion into production orders.


Unit 15
Exercise 50
Create Execution BOM and Routing
Simulation: Create Execution BOM and Routing

For more information on Create Execution BOM and Routing, please view the
simulation in the lesson Creating Shop Floor Master Data for Execution in your
online course.
Note:
1. In the SAP Business Client, launch the SAP Fiori launchpad and open the Monitor Shop
Floor Master Data app from the Production Engineering group.
2. In the Material field, enter ENGINE-##, enter 1020 for plant, and in the Opening Date
Within (Days) field, enter 30.
3. Select the production version of ENGINE-## and navigate to the details page.
4. Check if issues are present (for example, valid shop floor BOM and routing version is not
available).
5. Solve the issue by creating shop floor BOM and routing.

Unit 15
Solution 50
Create Execution BOM and Routing
Simulation: Create Execution BOM and Routing

For more information on Create Execution BOM and Routing, please view the
simulation in the lesson Creating Shop Floor Master Data for Execution in your
online course.
Note:
1. In the SAP Business Client, launch the SAP Fiori launchpad and open the Monitor Shop
Floor Master Data app from the Production Engineering group.
2. In the Material field, enter ENGINE-##, enter 1020 for plant, and in the Opening Date
Within (Days) field, enter 30.
3. Select the production version of ENGINE-## and navigate to the details page.
4. Check if issues are present (for example, valid shop floor BOM and routing version is not
available).
5. Solve the issue by creating shop floor BOM and routing.

a) Choose the Launch VEMP link in the Shop Floor Master Data section.
The system returns an error.
Note:
The current version of PEO does not yet allow the creation or selection of a
new planning scope from the Monitor Shop Floor Master Data app.
The instructor may explain the following steps in theory only:
● Create a new shop floor MBOM of usage type V.
● Create a new shop floor routing using the above MBOM.

● Create a new production version for shop floor BOM and routing.

Lesson: Creating Shop Floor Master Data for Execution
LESSON SUMMARY


Unit 15
Learning Assessment
1. Which of the following statements about planning BOMs with phantom assemblies are
correct?
X A Phantom BOMs and parent BOMs can be released independently.
X B The phantom property can be defined in the material master, which is not version-
controlled.
X C The new concept of planning BOMs is available in the standard. You do not have to
customize this functionality for PEO.
X D The same phantom material can be referenced by several BOM items of the same
BOM. MRP and production order creation select phantom BOM alternative and
version independently for every phantom item.
2. Which app can the production engineer use to find any production version that is still
incomplete?
X A Manage Shop Floor Routing
X B Monitor Shop Floor Master Data
X C Maintain Bill of Material


UNIT 16 Management of Action Settings
Lesson 1
Defining Status and Action Schemas 570
Exercise 51: Define Status and Action Schemas 573
Lesson 2
Defining Reason Codes and Reason Code Groups 577
Exercise 52: Create a Reason Code, Create a Reason Code Group, and Assign the 583
Reason Code to the Group
Lesson 3
Setting Up Action Properties 587
Lesson 4
Configuring Action Type Handlers 591
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Explain the purpose of using status and action schemas in SAP S/4HANA PEO
● Define status and action schemas
● Explain the purpose of using reason codes and reason code groups in SAP S/4HANA PEO
● Create a reason code, create a reason code group, and assign the reason code to the
group
● Explain the settings that can be configured for an action in SAP S/4HANA PEO
● Set up action properties
● Explain the purpose of using action type handlers in SAP S/4HANA PEO
● Assign type handlers to an action or an operation activity

Unit 16
Lesson 1
Defining Status and Action Schemas
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn about the concept of a status and action schema as well as how to
create a new status and action schema to use in SAP S/4HANA PEO.
Business Example
complex products. The company wants the ability to use a specific set of allowed actions at
some stages during the production process. Also, the company wants to use own naming
conventions for an action and status names to be used during the execution of production
process. Peter needs to explain how to define custom actions and statuses and how to create
a specific set of actions. Finally, Peter needs to configure the system to use new actions and
statuses for specific operation activities.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Status and Action Schema

A status and action schema (SAS) defines which status an object type can take and the
actions that represent changes between these statuses. The figure, Status and Action
Schema, is an example of a status and action schema.
Figure 360: Status and Action Schema
To define statuses, actions, and the schemas that connect them in the activities, in
Customizing (transaction SPRO) choose Production Manufacturing for Production Engineering
and Operations Production Operations → Action Processing → Status and Action Schemas.
Status and action schemas are aimed at providing a flexible mechanism to the end-user for
defining or changing a workflow of a product.
Object Types
Object types are the things or processes for which the status and action schema is relevant,
for example, an operation activity or product.

Lesson: Defining Status and Action Schemas
Hint:
In SAP S/4HANA PEO, two standard status and action schemas are available
and are used by default. They are SAP_SAS_SFI_OA for the product and
SAP_SAS_OA for the operation activity.
For each object type for which you want to use a status, you assign the status to that object
type. If you require the same status for different object types, you can assign one status to
multiple object types. For example, the status Finished might apply to both operation
activities and products. To reflect this, in the Customizing, you define one status and then
assign it to both operation activities and products.
Statuses and Status Categories
Statuses indicate what part of the production process an object type is in. For example, an
operation activity is In Process when an operator is currently performing the activity. The
technical information of the status is contained in the status category to which it is assigned.
Therefore, you assign each status to a status category.
Caution:
In SAP S/4HANA PEO, you can only create new and/or change the status name
and its assignment to status category. Status categories are hard-coded; you
cannot change or create them. The following status categories exist by default in
SAP S/4HANA PEO:
● Initial
● In Process
● Completed
● Skipped
● Paused
● Rejected
● Scrapped
The system uses status categories to make certain checks, for example, to make sure that a
status and action schema is not missing any mandatory statuses. Each status and action
schema must have at least one status with the status category Initial and one status with the
status category Complete.
Actions
Actions represent the change (transition) from one status, the start status, to a different
status, the end status. For example, the action Start changes the status category from Initial
to In Process.
Therefore, the end user can perform the following tasks:
● Change the status/action names
● Remove status categories and transitions

Unit 16: Management of Action Settings
Hint:
The status category is removed together with its transitions. For example, if you
remove status category Paused, the actions that trigger the change (transition)
to that status category, such as Pause and Resume Work, are also removed.
SAP S/4HANA PEO contains checks that ensure that fixed status categories (Initial, In
Process, Completed) and transitions (Start/Undo Starts, Complete/Undo Complete) cannot
be removed. This is used for the sake of product integrity and stability and eliminates the risk
of unexpected errors and behavior due to an unknown or incorrect transition.
SAS is assigned in the routing to OA.
Figure 361: Perform Operation Activity

Unit 16
Exercise 51
Define Status and Action Schemas
Simulation: Define Status and Action Schemas

For more information on Define Status and Action Schemas, please view the
simulation in the lesson Defining Status and Action Schemas in your online
course.
Business Example
Note:
1. Create a new status, ACTIVE-##, and assign it to the category In Process.
2. Create a new action GO-## and enter any free-form text in the action description.
3. In the Define Status and Action Schema transaction, create a new status and action
schema (SAS) ##_SAS_SFI_OA with object type 4 and any free-form text in the SAS
description.
4. Select the newly created SAS and choose Action Assignments.
5. For the newly created SAS, add the details described in the following table:
SAS Name Action Start Status End Status
##_SAS_SFI_OA GO-## SAP_IN_QUEUE ACTIVE##
##_SAS_SFI_OA SAP_COMPLETE ACTIVE## SAP_COMPLETED
6. Choose Enter multiple times to save the SAS.
7. In the Released column, select the checkbox next to your SAS and then choose Save.

Unit 16
Solution 51
Define Status and Action Schemas
Simulation: Define Status and Action Schemas

For more information on Define Status and Action Schemas, please view the
simulation in the lesson Defining Status and Action Schemas in your online
course.
Business Example
Note:
1. Create a new status, ACTIVE-##, and assign it to the category In Process.

a) Go to SPRO → SAP Reference IMG → Production → Manufacturing for Production
Engineering and Operations → Production Operations → Action Processing → Status
and Action Schemas (SAS) → Define Statuses.
b) Choose New Entries.
c) In the Status Name field, enter Active##.
d) In the Category dropdown list, select In Process.
e) Set the criticality level to OK.
f) In the Status Description field, enter Active.
g) Choose Enter several times ignoring the warning that may appear and then choose
Save.
2. Create a new action GO-## and enter any free-form text in the action description.
a) Go to the Define Actions transaction.
b) Create a new action GO-## and enter any free-form text in the action description.

Lesson: Defining Status and Action Schemas
c) Choose Enter (ignore the warning if it appears) and then choose Save.
3. In the Define Status and Action Schema transaction, create a new status and action
schema (SAS) ##_SAS_SFI_OA with object type 4 and any free-form text in the SAS
description.
4. Select the newly created SAS and choose Action Assignments.
5. For the newly created SAS, add the details described in the following table:
SAS Name Action Start Status End Status
##_SAS_SFI_OA GO-## SAP_IN_QUEUE ACTIVE##
##_SAS_SFI_OA SAP_COMPLETE ACTIVE## SAP_COMPLETED
6. Choose Enter multiple times to save the SAS.
7. In the Released column, select the checkbox next to your SAS and then choose Save.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 16
Lesson 2
Defining Reason Codes and Reason Code
Groups
LESSON OBJECTIVES
group
Reason Codes
In a manufacturing environment, reason codes are used to describe the reason why a certain
action or situation has happened. For example, if a production operator pauses an operation
activity, the supervisor may need to know the reason for this decision. It can be, for example,
“lunch break”, “training”, and so on. Another example could be that the machine is not
working properly and should be placed on hold. The production operator has to specify the
reason code that later helps the service technician to understand what happened. The reason
could be “Jam” or “Planned Downtime”. For the operator to be able to log a reason code
during manufacturing activities, the reason code must exist in the system. Reason codes are
initially created by the production process specialist with the help of the Manage Reason
Codes app.
Figure 363: Hold
In SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for production engineering and operations (PEO), it is

possible to define reason codes for various objects and actions. There are no default reason
codes provided with the software package delivery; the reason codes are always customer-

defined and are something that a manufacturing user would select later when executing the
production process. Examples of reason codes may include “jam”, “training”, “machine
breakdown”, “lunch”, “damaged component”, “optional step”, and so on. Reason codes
become meaningful when assigned to a reason code group that defines either a purpose or an
action to which the reason codes will be associated later in the process.
To maintain reason codes in SAP S/4HANA PEO, use the Manage Reason Codes app available
in the SAP Fiori launchpad.
Note:
To be able to see and work in the Manage Reason Codes app, your user in the
front-end system must be assigned the SAP_BR_PRODN_PROC_SPCLST_EPO
Production Process Specialist (EPO) PFCG role.
Hint:
The length of the Code field is limited to 4 characters.
Figure 364: New Reason Code
Also, reason codes can be maintained in the classical QS41/QS42 transactions launched from
the SAP Easy Access screen. Reason codes are not new objects – they are defined and stored
in the quality management tables of the SAP QM module. To be able to integrate SAP S/
4HANA PEO reason codes and reason code groups with SAP QM, the following new catalogs
have been introduced:
● 0 (Action Reasons) – used for reason codes associated with all SAP S/4HANA PEO
actions, except hold (for example, skip, complete, pause)
● 7 (Hold Codes) – used for reason codes that will later be associated with SAP S/4HANA
PEO hold actions

Lesson: Defining Reason Codes and Reason Code Groups
Figure 365: Catalogs
Reason Code Groups

A reason code group is a collection of various reason codes. When working in production, the
user triggers an action, for example, pause or hold. When they choose the corresponding
button, the system prompts them to choose a reason code from the list. The list of reason
codes to be displayed comes from the predefined reason code group that has been assigned
to the action and associated with the object (operation activity, order, serialized material, and
so on). Examples of reason code groups include “machine-related issues”, “pause reasons”,
“administrative”, and so on.
Depending on the reason code group and the action/object to which the group is assigned,
the list of reason codes may vary.
Figure 366: Reason Codes
To maintain reason codes in SAP S/4HANA PEO, use the Manage Reason Code Groups app
available in the SAP Fiori launchpad.

Note:
To be able to see and work in the Manage Reason Code Groups app, your user in
the front-end system must be assigned the
SAP_BR_PRODN_PROC_SPCLST_EPO Production Process Specialist (EPO)
PFCG role.
Hint:
The length of the Code Group field is limited to 8 characters.
Figure 367: New Reason Code Group
Reason codes and reason code groups play an important role in traceability. They are
displayed in the SAP S/4HANA PEO monitoring apps, Product Genealogy and Production
Action Log, and help to analyze the root cause of an action.
Figure 368: Reason Code and Reason Code Group Definition Map

Animation: Reason Code and Reason Code Group Definition Map

For more information on Reason Code and Reason Code Group Definition Map,
please view the animation in the lesson Defining Reason Codes and Reason Code
Groups, in your online course.


Unit 16
Exercise 52
Create a Reason Code, Create a Reason Code
Group, and Assign the Reason Code to the
Group
Simulation: Create a Reason Code, Create a Reason Code Group, and Assign the
For more information on Create a Reason Code, Create a Reason Code Group,
and Assign the Reason Code to the Group, please view the simulation in the
lesson Defining Reason Codes and Reason Code Groups in your online course.
Business Example
complex products. The company wants to be able to record a reason why a certain action has
been performed in production, for example, why a production supervisor decided to put an
object on hold or why a production operator created a defect. John needs to explain how to
define custom reason codes and assign them to groups, which in turn are later assigned to
production actions.
Note:
1. Create a new reason code group, PAURC-##, using the details provided in the following
table:
Code Group Catalog Description
PAURC-## Action Reasons Reasons for Pause ##
2. Create new reason codes and assign them to the group using the details provided in the
following table:
Code Code Group Catalog Reason Code De-
scription
LB## PAURC-## Action Reasons Lunch Break
TR## PAURC-## Action Reasons Training

Unit 16
Solution 52
Create a Reason Code, Create a Reason Code
Group, and Assign the Reason Code to the
Group
Simulation: Create a Reason Code, Create a Reason Code Group, and Assign the
For more information on Create a Reason Code, Create a Reason Code Group,
and Assign the Reason Code to the Group, please view the simulation in the
lesson Defining Reason Codes and Reason Code Groups in your online course.
Business Example
complex products. The company wants to be able to record a reason why a certain action has
been performed in production, for example, why a production supervisor decided to put an
object on hold or why a production operator created a defect. John needs to explain how to
define custom reason codes and assign them to groups, which in turn are later assigned to
production actions.
Note:
1. Create a new reason code group, PAURC-##, using the details provided in the following
table:
Code Group Catalog Description
PAURC-## Action Reasons Reasons for Pause ##
b) Navigate to the Manage Reason Code Groups app in the Production Execution Process
Setup group on the SAP Fiori launchpad.
c) Choose the Create button above the table on the right.
d) In the Code Group field, enter PAURC-##.

The length of the Code Group field is limited to 8 characters.
e) In the Catalog dropdown list, select Action Reasons.

f) In the Description field, enter the text provided in the table.
g) Choose Save.
2. Create new reason codes and assign them to the group using the details provided in the
following table:
Code Code Group Catalog Reason Code De-
scription
LB## PAURC-## Action Reasons Lunch Break
TR## PAURC-## Action Reasons Training
b) Navigate to the Manage Reason Codes app in the Production Execution Process Setup
c) Choose the Create button above the table on the right.
d) In the Code field, enter LB##.

The length of the Code field is limited to 4 characters.
e) In the Code Group field, enter PAURC-##.
f) In the Catalog dropdown list, select Action Reasons.
g) In the Reason Code Description field, enter the text provided in the table.
h) Choose Save.
i) Repeat steps c to h to create the TR## reason code and assign it to the group.

LESSON SUMMARY
group

Unit 16
Lesson 3
Setting Up Action Properties
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Actions
During manufacturing processes on the shop floor, production operators perform their work
in different phases described by different statuses and the transition from one status to
another. For example, the first phase in the manufacturing process is the setup, followed by
the produce, and the teardown phase. During each of these phases, multiple different
statuses are possible, for example, during the produce phase, a product may be at the
beginning of a production step, on hold because of missing parts, or already completed. Each
of these statuses is reached because the manufacturing process is taken from one status to
the next. This transition process is what is called an action, taking the whole process from one
step to another.
In SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for production engineering and operations (PEO), we
differentiate between the following types of actions:
● SAS actions: Actions that lead to a status transition of an object such as operation activity
or serialized material. Examples of SAS actions include start, pause, skip, complete, and so
on.
● Non-SAS actions: Actions that do not influence the status transition for an object, but still
need to be performed to manipulate a product or process. For example, hold, accept/
reject buyoff, component assembly, and so on.
An action calls a certain logic that must be performed, for example, changing a status for an
object, sending production confirmations, blocking an object from being processed further,
and so on. An action may also prompt the operator to specify some additional information
about it, like entering a note or reason code, or checking whether the manufacturing user is
qualified to perform an action on the selected object. The additional activity that an action
calls during manufacturing execution is initially defined with the help of the Manage Action
Settings app in SAP S/4HANA PEO.
Actions are specific to a plant and an object.

Figure 371: Configurable Settings for an Action
Note:
To be able to see and work in the Manage Action Settings app, your user in the
front-end system must be assigned the SAP_BR_PRODN_PROC_SPCLST_EPO
Production Process Specialist (EPO) PFCG role.
The Manage Action Settings app allows the user to perform the following tasks:
● Display a list of actions that are defined in status and action schemas (SASs) as well as
non-SAS actions (for example, hold, accept buyoff, component assembly).
● View a detail screen for each action.
● Edit previously-defined actions.
● Define if a user has to specify a reason when he or she performs a certain action on the
shop floor.
● Define if a user has to provide a note when he or she performs a certain action on the shop
floor.
● Define if the system checks that the production operator has sufficient qualifications to
perform a certain action.
● Add action handlers with their respective settings to an action.
Actions are dependent on the plant and object type.

Lesson: Setting Up Action Properties
Figure 372: Manage Action Settings
Action settings are configured individually for each action. The user can define whether a
reason code and a note are optional, mandatory, or not required. Later, based on these
setting, the fields will be marked, and the user's entry will be checked.
Figure 373: Action Settings
If the setting for the Reason Code field is optional and/or required, the user must define a
code group. On action, the list of codes that will be presented to the user are taken from the
assigned code group.
The Check Required checkbox is used to specify whether the user must be checked for
qualification when he or she triggers this action during production activities.

Figure 374: Reason Code and Note
LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 16
Lesson 4
Configuring Action Type Handlers
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Action Hook Framework

The action hook framework (AHF) is a mechanism in SAP S/4HANA PEO that allows
customers and partners to enhance the logic of how an action is executed by applying
implemented methods. The action hook framework provides a flexible and configurable
means of defining and executing sequences of action handlers that the system executes when
a user selects an action.
To configure the action hook framework, choose Customizing (transaction SPRO) under
Production Manufacturing for Production Engineering and Operations → Production
Operations → Action Processing in activity → Define Action Handlers.
Figure 375: Customizing
In this Customizing activity, you can assign action handler classes to action handlers, assign
action handlers to object types and actions, and specify whether the system can execute the
action handler before or after it performs the action.

Action Handlers and Action Handler Classes

Action handler classes are ABAP classes that contain the business logic, for example, checks,
that the system carries out when a user performs an action. To execute the business logic in
an action handler class, you assign an action handler class to an action handler. The action
handler determines when and for which objects the system can execute the business logic in
the action handler class. For example, an action handler class defines the logic for checking
whether all planned components have been assembled into a serialized material by
production operator when executing the corresponding operation activity. The logic will
compare the planned quantity to the assembled quantity and raise the exception if they do
not match. The action handler defines that this logic can be implemented for operation
activities and can only be called before the system performs the action, for example,
Complete.
The following figure lists all action type handlers that are delivered out-of-the-box with SAP S/
4HANA PEO:
● Object type 1 means that the type handler is applicable to an operation activity.
● Object type 4 means that the type handler is applicable to a serialized material in operation
activity.
Figure 376: Action Handlers
Action Assignment defines recommended and logically-relevant actions for an action type
handler. The assignment can be modified if necessary or added if a new type handler has been
introduced in the system.

Lesson: Configuring Action Type Handlers
Figure 377: Action Assignment
Processing Points
Processing points are the locations in the coding of an action where a sequence of handlers is
triggered. SAP provides the following processing points:
Processing Point Description

Preprocessing (PR) The action handler sequence is called at the
beginning of an action before all other coding
is executed.
Postprocessing (PO) The action handler sequence is called at the
end of an action after all other coding has
been executed.
Note:
Action handlers assigned to
postprocessing point are inter-
nally called “fire and forget”.
The system will trigger an activi-
ty (for example, send document
to a print server) after the action
(for example, Complete) has
been executed, but will not ex-
pect and get any result (whether
printed or not) back.
In Customizing, you enable each action handler to be called at a processing point.

Figure 378: Processing Points
Action Handler Order of Execution and Parameters

You can create sequences of action handlers so that you can execute multiple action handlers
when a user performs a single action. In addition, you can overwrite the default parameters
that are defined in Customizing.
Action type handlers are the most convenient and reliable way to extend SAP S/4HANA PEO
with custom logic – be it checks before a certain action executes, or activities that can be
triggered after the action has been performed.
Hint:
For an example of how to define a new type handler, see https://help.sap.com/
viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1809.000/en-US/
554ad43dc9d24ee59ed1f8815fe811cf.html.
Assignment of Type Handlers to Actions

In SAP S/4HANA PEO, you can assign type handlers to actions in the following SAP Fiori
apps:
● Manage Action Settings
● Manage Shop Floor Routings
Note:
To be able to access the Manage Action Settings app, make sure your user has
been assigned the SAP_BR_PRODN_PROC_SPCLST_EPO (Production Process
Specialist (EPO)) PFCG role in the front-end system. To be able to access the
Manage Shop Floor Routings app, make sure your user has been assigned the
SAP_BR_PRODN_ENG_DISC_EME (Production Engineer - Discrete Manufacturing
(EME)) PFCG role in the front-end system.

In the Manage Action Settings app, the user first selects a plant, an object type, and then an
action where the action handler has to be assigned. Then the system allows the user to
specify the following:
● OA Segment type: A type of an operation activity within an operation, for example, Setup,
Produce, Teardown.
● Type Handler Processing Point: When the logic is to be triggered – before or after the
action executes.
● Execution Sequence: The order in which action handlers will execute if more than one is
assigned to an operation activity. "Sequence" here has more a technical meaning. For the
end user it makes no difference, because if at least one check defined in any action
handlers fails, the complete action is rolled back.
● Action Type Handler: The logic itself defined by the associated ABAP class.
● Action Handler is Active: Defines whether the assigned action handler shall be executed or
not.
Figure 379: Manage Action Settings
Caution:
Action handlers defined in the Manage Action Settings app are plant- and object-
type-specific, meaning that they are called every time an action is performed on
the specified object, independent of an operation activity.
In the Manage Shop Floor Routings app, the user first selects a routing, then an operation
activity, and then the Action Handlers view in the Details workspace. There, the system allows
the user to add, change, and delete action type handlers defined for an operation activity. To
add a new type handler, the user chooses the Add button and specifies all the same
properties explained in this lesson.

Hint:
The main difference this assignment has is that this action handler is plant-,
routing-, object-type-, and operation-activity-specific, meaning that it is called
only when an action is triggered at the specified operation activity.
Figure 380: Add Action Handler
In the Action Handlers view, the system shows the Source of an action handler; in other words,
where this action handler has been defined:
● Routing – in a routing for an operation activity
● Plant – for an action within a plant
Figure 381: Action Handler Source
Description of Action Handlers in S/4HANA PEO

CHECK_COMPONENT_AVAILABILITY
This action handler checks whether a serial number, scanned or entered during assembly,
exists in stock and if not, prevents the component to be consumed at an operation activity or
into serialized material in operation activity.
This type handler may not be required anymore, as starting from 1909 FPS1, the
configuration of the serial number profile is taken into account.

Figure 382: Serial Number Profile
Serial number profile (check against stock):

This setting defines how the Perform Operation Activity app will react on the entry of SN that
does not exist in the inventory. We differentiate 3 values here – error, warning, and no stock
check for the profile.
● Error: If a serial number does not exists in stock, the error is displayed on assembly and
the user cannot continue.
● Warning: If a serial number does not exists in stock, the warning dialog will show up with
the option to continue.
● No stock check: No check against stock is performed during assembly. No warnings or
error dialogs. The system will always allow to consume the serial number. Later, if there is
a failed material movements occur, the user can correct them in the Reprocess Failed
Material Movements app.
CHECK_COMP_ASSEMBLED_QTY
This action handlers checks that the consumed quantity of a component exactly matches the
required planned quantity of the component at an operation activity.
CHECK_REWORK_STS_AT_GOODS_MOVT
This action handler is used for non-serialized rework scenario, where we relax all quantity
checks during execution, plus the user can decide at which operation the goods receipt
(manual or automated) shall be performed. We recommend this type handler to be used at
the “last” operation, where the goods receipt shall happen and where the user shall enter all
actuals they really have on hand and reconcile inconsistencies. The action handler will check
that all rework operation activities have been completed before performing the goods receipt.
Available from 1909 FPS1.
CHECK_ACTUAL_QTY_AT_REWORK
This action handler is used for non-serialized rework scenario and checks that quantities that
are processed at rework and are not more than the reported defective quantity. For example,
if during defect recording the user specifies defective quantity as 3 out of 10, then the system

will check at rework operation that no more than 3 can be started and used as planned qty.
Available from 1909 FPS1.
CHECK_DEFECT
This action handler checks that there are no defects with the status “Open” exist for the
current operation activity or serialized material at the operation activity.
CHECK_INSPECTION_CHARACTERISTICS
This action handler checks that the inspection results recorded for all the ‘Required’
inspection characteristics which are specified as “Critical Characteristic” are collected at an
operation activity or for a serialized product in the operation activity.
Figure 383: Critical Characteristic
CHECK_OAC_COMPONENTNS_ASSIGNED
This action handler checks if the components are assigned to an operation activity and if yes,
will not allow to skip the operation activity during production execution.
CHECK_OVER_DELIVERY
This action handler checks whether the confirmed operation activity quantity does not offend
against the over delivery tolerance of the order.
CHECK_UNDER_DELIVERY
This action handler checks whether the confirmed operation activity quantity does not offend
against the under delivery tolerance of the order
CHECK_DURATION_ST_CP
This action handler can have additional parameters specified for it such as “Duration” and
“Unit”. If the value for the duration is entered and the action handler is assigned to an
operation activity or serialized material at an operation activity, the system will check that the
time elapsed between the Start and Complete action corresponds to the pre-defined time in
the action handler. If this does not match, the system will display an error at the processing
point where the action handler is assigned.

Figure 384: CHECK_DURATION_ST_CP
Action Assignment defines recommended and logically-relevant actions for an action type
handler. The assignment can be modified if necessary or added if a new type handler has been
introduced in the system.
LESSON SUMMARY


Unit 16
Learning Assessment
1. In which SAP Fiori app are settings for actions maintained?

X A Manage Execution Settings
X B Manage Action Settings
X C Maintain Bill of Material
2. Which of the following roles is required to configure action settings?

X A The SAP_BR_PRODN_PROC_SPCLST_EPO Production Process Specialist (EPO)

PFCG role
X B The SAP_BR_PRODN_SUPRVSR_DISC_EPO Production Supervisor – Discrete

Manufacturing (EPO) PFCG role
X C The SAP_BR_PRODN_OPTR_DISC_EPO Production Operator – Discrete

Manufacturing (EPO) PFCG role
3. Which of the following settings can be configured for an action?

X A Define if the reason code and note are mandatory, optional, or not required
X B Define a group for reason codes if the setting is mandatory or optional
X C Check for qualification
4. In which SAP S/4HANA PEO apps is it possible to configure action type handlers?
X A Manage Action Settings
X B Manage Production Orders
X C Manage Bill of Material
X D Manage Shop Floor Routings

5. Which PEO feature can help you customize the transitions of a product from operation
activity to another and use your own names to define a status of a product at a certain
production step?
X A Buyoffs
X B Production Tracking and Monitor
X C Status and Action Schema

TS428 1 EN Col20 PP CONSULTANT

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TS428 1 EN Col20 PP CONSULTANT

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

S4280

SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for

© 2021 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. iii

American English is the standard used in this handbook.

This information is displayed in the instructor’s presentation

Related or Additional Information

User interface control Example text

Window title Example text

iv © Copyright. All rights reserved.

1 Unit 1: Production Engineering and Operations Infrastructure

3 Lesson: Explaining Key Features and Benefits of SAP S/4HANA

31 Unit 2: Production Engineering

32 Lesson: Handing Over the Engineering Snapshot from PLM to

71 Unit 3: Setup of Shop Floor Routing

72 Lesson: Creating a Simple Shop Floor Routing and Assigning it a

© Copyright. All rights reserved. v

117 Lesson: Releasing and Managing Shop Floor Orders in SAP S/

215 Unit 5: Unitized Products and the Complex Assembly/Installation

217 Lesson: Understanding the Complex Assembly Process

254 Lesson: Defining Teams and Responsibilities

vi © Copyright. All rights reserved.

320 Lesson: Creating Qualifications and Assigning Qualifications to

369 Unit 10: Advanced Production Process

370 Lesson: Claiming and Registering Tools During Production

© Copyright. All rights reserved. vii

429 Unit 12: Management of Engineering Change During the Production

430 Lesson: Creating and Releasing a New EBOM Version

467 Unit 13: Variant Configuration

468 Lesson: Setting Up Business Process for Variant Configuration

viii © Copyright. All rights reserved.

506 Lesson: Creating and Consuming 3D Views in Work Instructions

545 Unit 15: Planning and Execution BOMs and Routings

546 Lesson: Creating Master Data for MRP Planning

569 Unit 16: Management of Action Settings

570 Lesson: Defining Status and Action Schemas

© Copyright. All rights reserved. ix

© Copyright. All rights reserved. xi

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 1

2 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for Production Engineering and Operations (PEO)

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 3

SAP S/4HANA Benefits

SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for Production Engineering and Operations (PEO)

4 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Figure 1: SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for PEO Main Areas

Animation: SAP S/4HANA Manufacturing for PEO Main Areas

Table 1: SAP S/4HANA PEO Features

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 5

SAP S/4HANA PEO Feature Description

EBOM to MBOM Conversion A predefined process supports production

Manufacturing Change Record Used to orchestrate the whole production en-

6 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

SAP S/4HANA PEO Feature Description

Change Impact Analysis The change impact analysis supports the

Standard Texts Using the Manage Standard Texts SAP Fiori

HTML Work Instructions Offer a great variety of formatting options,

Qualifications Used to ensure that only qualified production

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 7

SAP S/4HANA PEO Feature Description

Buyoffs Contribute to the making of safe products

Production Order Management A shop floor production order is an extended

8 © Copyright. All rights reserved.